Home

WT3000 Precision Power Analyzer User's Manual

1. scarna funeruer _ave err E Ficasure foncsoued CURSOR NULL F mes store MENU STORE SET pr wsc Cre MENU DISPLAY enc WAVE ITEM amp ELEMENT u 1 P sun UPDATE RATE HOLD mes WPIq TIME ruin SINGLE ITEM FORM LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER een USERSET O ALL CAL INTEG OREMOTE i Eq To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 1 Press MEASURE to display the Measure menu 2 Press the Phase soft key to display the Phase menu 3 Press either the 180 Lead Lag or 360 degrees soft key to select the display format of the phase difference User Defined Function S Q Formula Type 1 K Pc Formula Sampling Frequency Measure i Function User Defined Type 1 M M S Q Formula Pc Formula M Sampling Auto Frequency 5 28 IM 760301 01E 5 10 Selecting the Display Format of the Phase Difference Explanation The display form
2. 1 save Rerore NU ress oparsoOyy set the Recall No number of the data to be Be cori pending data is displayed store Convert Memory Initialize Memory Exec Memory Initialize Memory Exec Explanation and Only the data stored in the internal memory can be recalled Nu ul There is a one to one relationship between the store count nimber see secti You can recall and display the stored numeric data or waveform display data ple set Recall ii the Recall No If you wish to recall the first stored data for exa Note 8 20 IM 760301 01E 9 1 PC Cards PC Cards That Can Be Used The WT3000 supports flash ATA cards PC card TYPE Il and compact flash using the PC card TYPE II adapter In addition some of the Flash ATA HDD cards can be used For details contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Note To use the PC card on the PC use a PC that supports the PC card Depending on the PC that you are using the PC cards indicated above may not operate properly Check it beforehand Inserting the PC Card Insert the PC card into the PC card drive with the front side of the card facing right Nolg eae Be sure to insert the PC card all the way in If it isn t the WT3000 may not detect it correctly Ejecting the PC Card Check that the PC card is not being accessed and press the eject button below the PC card
3. CAPS Property Filter ten ALL Convert Con Memory Exec Hen 8 14 IM 760301 01E IGE 8 5 Saving the Stored Data O Executing the Save Operation 19 Press the Convert Memory Exec soft key The stored data is saved to the directory indicated by Pathz At the same time the Convert Memory Exec soft key changes to an Abort soft key Aborting the Save Operation 20 Press the Abort soft key The save operation is aborted At the same time the Abort soft key changes to a Convert Memory Exec soft key File List convert Menory Fath SC4 00NUT1600DA L Space 2138046464 byte File Name Size Date FDO 1 I3C4 001 File Name I3C4 011 STE INDO 1 Bae gt 2001 08 24 06 27 R U Property PN Convert Menory Exec E e sein Ry Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box 11N Press the Filt t key to select Item or All Viewing o P ies 75 11 Onthe ile Lis og 69 press t cursor keys to select the file 12 Press the Rroper t key to isplay the file property window 13 Press ESC tolose t 9A pr window convert Henory Q File List convert Memory Path NgC4 00NUTIGO0DA Space 2139046464 byte File Nami Property IFDO l File Nang gSapo00 Cs File Nane 8C4 061 File Size 35
4. sides when moving the pse setup menus Press an execution key to instrument See man z execute the operation assigned to that key section 3 1 j See section 1 2 SHIFT key Power switch Built in printer option The keys enter the shifted state when you press See section 3 4 Used to print screen images the SHIFT key and the SHIFT key illuminates See the Expansion Function In this state the setup menu marked in purple User s Manual IM760301 51E below the panel keys can be selected Rear Panel See the Communication Interface User s Manual 1M760301 17E CD ROM Voltage input terminal Used to connect voltage measurement cables See sections 3 8 to Input element 2 Input element 1 See section 2 3 Input element 3 Input element 4 GP IB connector RS 232 connector option For details on the RS 232 communication function see the Communication Interface User s Manual 1M760301 17E CD ROM External clock input connector Receives the synchronization source signal that defines the 3 11 a measurement computation period See AN N sre ss 2 section 4 7 ext i t 9 EZ i m Receives the external PLL source Sensor input amp T lee aes Ls p signal for harmonic measurement t P L E See the Expansion Function User s aa NUR fia Pe Manual 1M760301 51E exter
5. oe c Se 13 426 13 g Tomas wr000 l 5 sg o S ola JeL Je B eeeecinileeeeci Bo 0 9 0 0 5alaalaala N ol Co ja_ jogja N 000 So0 e0 Fe 4 T Doo O san 8 mao m e N Dimensions with the JIS rack mount kit 480 1 460 Rear View Unit mm 6 00 Dis 32 427 28 9 opo o0o racc ooo oOoooouu0u00 e Bloscsso O Is o lS loooocdr3 oojoojoojo ojo ojo Bojoo Gce o poo 0 Dimensions with the EIA rack mount kit 481 1 0 4 28 9 oojogjoojo c BSA cxcal eelexee es nauu guuiug D 35 Rack mount attachment plane Rack mount attachment plane Unless otherwise specified tolerance is 3 however tolerance is 0 3 mm when below 10 mm 12 16 IM 760301 01E Appendix Appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions Measurement Functions during Normal Measurement Measurement Functions during Normal Measurement Table 1 2 Method of Determination Equation For de
6. e 2 3 Measurement CORditioris teer trends Lee t ea ELE SLE ER HS LE Sua e Se Pu Ba cde 2 8 Power Measurement cccceeeeecceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeceaaeeeeeesecaeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeseeeeeeeseeteneaee 2 14 roii E 2 16 WTO GAT OM Be 2 19 Waveform Display 5 2 rtt rt He ERR ER tous eate a aee d ER ex addii 2 22 Trend Bar Graph and Vector Displays ssssssseeeeeneneennnneenee 2 28 Saving and Loading Data and Other Functions sesseene 2 29 Chapter 3 Before Starting Measurements 3 1 3 2 A 3 3 3 4 A 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 3 14 3 15 3 16 3 17 Handling Precautions sisenes een paraaan fab Ea E Ao EAOa E OEA ERa eR EEO E EEEE aaia 3 1 Installing the Instrument sseeeeseeseseeeeeeeeeenenenneennnnne nennen nnne nennen nennen nnne 3 2 Connecting the Power Supply cc cceeceeseeceneeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeesaeeseeeeeaeeseaeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeaees 3 4 Turning ON OFF the Power Switch sse 3 5 Wiring Precautloris iie creber E e EUER IRE E a Ee eR EEEE 3 7 Assembling the Adapter to Be Connected to the Input Terminal ssss 3 9 Wiring for Making Accurate Measurements sssssseeee ee 3 11 Guide for Selecting the Method Used to Measure the Power ssssesssss 3 12 Wiring the Circuit under Mea
7. ssseeneeeeneeeneneee nennen 4 23 IM 760301 01 ix Contents 4 10 4 11 Selecting the Data Update Rate sse 4 26 Hold and Single Measurement sssssssseseeeeeeeeeneeeneee nennen nen 4 28 Chapter 5 Power Measurement 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 14 Displaying Numeric Data and Changing the Displayed Items sesessss 5 1 Selecting the Voltage Current Mode RMS MEAN DC or RMEAN 5 9 Selecting the Frequency Measurement Source ssssssee 5 10 Setting the User Defined Function nennen 5 12 Setting MAX hold 2 5 etel op DIRE 5 17 Measuring the Average Active Power sssseeeeneneem eene 5 19 Setting the Equation for Efficiency ssseeeeeeeeneeneen eene 5 20 Setting the Wiring Efficiency and Two Wattmeter Method Compensations 5 22 Setting the Equations for Apparent Power Reactive Power and Corrected Power 5 25 Selecting the Display Format of the Phase Difference ssssssssssessss 5 28 Setting the Normal Integration Mode and the Integration Timer 5 30 Setting the Real time Integration Mode the Integration Timer and the Reservation Ime irc tt e e eat t tl pie doctas etica 5 32 Turning ON OFF Integration Auto Calibration sese
8. Selecting the Voltage Mode 2 Press VOLTAGE RANGE MODE to select one of the modes from RMS to RMEAN 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select the voltage mode of all elements Selecting the Current Mode 4 Press CURRENT RANGE MODE to select one of the modes from RMS to RMEAN 5 Repeat steps 1 and 4 to select the current mode of all elements Explanation The voltage and current modes can be selected from the following four modes RMS True rms value MEAN Rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value e DC Simple average RMEAN Rectified mean value Theinitial setting is RMS For the method of computing the voltage and current in each mode see appendix 1 When the independent setting of input elements is OFF the element switches according to the wiring system To measure the RMS and MEAN of voltage simultaneously use the user defined function For details see section 5 4 IM 760301 01E 5 9 1ueulioJnseoe u JOMOd I 5 3 Procedure INPUT INFO Selecting the Frequency Measurement Source For a functional description see section 1 2 ne VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE als D vs MEASURING MEASURING NEN zoj S us 3 woe auro MODE DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT QOREMOTE numeri WAVE FORM U I P S Q A WP q ru USER UPDATE RATE SINGLE CAL ELEMENT
9. Yo LOWER FORM USER SET O AL INTEG HOLD LOCAL s 1 Press ITEM to display the Numeric menu N on Pp wo Numeric 4 I gt Item No 1 M Function u M Element7 Element 1 Frequency Meas ter Freq 1 INTERN Freq 2 Lu KP order Reset Items Exec _ a Frequency Meas Item f To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 Press the Frequency Meas Item soft key to display the Frequency Meas Item dialog box Only the input signal of installed elements are displayed Press the cursor keys to select Freq or Freq2 Press SET A box used to select the frequency measurement source appears Press the cursor keys to select the input signal for measuring the frequency Press SET to confirm the frequency measurement source Frequency Meas Ite Freq 1 Freq 2 5 10 IM 760301 01E 5 3 Selecting the Frequency Measurement Source Explanation Two input signals from the installed elements can be selected as targets for frequency measurements On models with the frequency measurement add on option the frequency of all elements can be m
10. lm SCALING LINE FILTER MOTOR FREQ SET LTER 7 um set measure pme source CURSOR NULL FILE fmacesave STORE MENU STORE SET PRINT MISC HELP 1 Selecting the Input Filter DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT OREMOTE numeri WAVE OTHERS U I P 0 1 6 USER Femen UPDATE POAT rou Ea CAL INTEG LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL LOCAL Ln To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 Selecting the Line Filter Press LINE FILTER to display the LINE FILTER menu Only the installed elements are displayed Selecting the Target Element Press one of the soft keys corresponding to the displayed element to select the 2 target element Selecting the Line Filter Press the cursor keys to select a value between OFF and 50 kHz If any of the target elements is set to a setting other than OFF LINE FILTER illuminates 3 Element 1 OFF gt Element 2 OFF Element 3 OFF Element 4 OFF IM 760301 01E 4 21 SUOI IPUOD 1ueuianseo y BH 4 8 Selecting the Input Filter Selecting the Frequency Filter 4 P
11. IM 760301 01E 9 11 9 4 Saving the Screen Image Data Setting the file name 11 12 18 14 15 16 17 Press the File Name soft key to display the File Name dialog box Press the cursor keys to select Auto Naming Press SET to select ON or OFF Press the cursor keys to select File Name Press SET A keyboard appears Use the keyboard to set the file name For keyboard operations see section 3 14 Entering Values and Strings Press ESC to close the File Name dialog box Image Save Image Save Auto Naming Color File Name OFF CAPS 11 s I5 PELDE id pet lela BICIDTELF GUA T J KIL nr id Comment ELIN TOTE TOIR IS TULU T Vx ES A E E E EA E LCD En r il z a CEDERE iu H File List F iu z 5 Executing or Aborting the Save Operation Display the desired screen and carry out the following procedure Press IMAGE SAVE The screen image data is saved to the directory indicated by Pathz If you press IMAGE SAVE again while the save operation is in progress the operation is aborted An icon appears at the upper left corner of the screen while the save operation is in progress 9 12 IM 760301 01E 9 4 Saving the Screen Image Data Explanation The screen image data can be saved Data Format and Extension The data in the following formats can be saved The extension th
12. Item Setting S Q Formula Type1 Pc Formula IEC76 1 1976 P1 and P2 of IEC76 1 1993 P1 0 5000 P2 0 5000 Sampling Frequency Auto Phase 180 Lead Lag Sync Measure Master SYNC SOURCE Element Object Elementi Element2 Element3 Element4 Sync Source n I2 I3 l4 UPDATE RATE Update Rate 500 ms EAMP HOLD Hold Off INTEGRATOR Integrator Status Reset status Integ Set Mode Normal Timer Setting 00000 00 00 Start Time 2005 01 01 00 00 00 End Time 2005 01 01 01 00 00 Auto Cal Off D A Rated Time 00001 00 00 displayed when the optional D A output is installed ITEM for Numeric Item No 1 Function U Element Elementi Order Frequency Meas Item U1 l1 FORM for Numeric Numeric Form 4 Items ITEM for Wave Wave Display On V Zoom amp Position U1 to 14 Speed Torque Element Object Elementi U V Zoom x1 U Position 0 00096 1 V Zoom x1 I Position 0 000 FORM for Wave Format Single Time div 5 ms Trigger Mode Auto Source U1 Slope Rise Level 0 0 Display Setting Interpolate Line Graticule Grid Scale Value On Label Off Wave Mapping Mode Auto User Setting U1 0 11 0 U2 1 12 1 U3 2 13 2 U4 3 14 3 Speed 0 Torque 0 ITEM for Bar displayed on models with the harmonic measurement option Bar Item No Function Element 1 2 3 U P Element1 Element1 Element1 IM 760301 01E App 5 xipueddy Appendix 2 List of Initial Settin
13. esess App 31 Efficiency Compensation Function seeennne App 32 xii IM 760301 01 Chapter 1 Names and Functions of Parts 1 1 Front Panel Rea Front Panel ESC key Used to clear a setup menu and dialog box Soft keys Used to select items on the setup menu that appears on the screen PC card slot Used when saving data toa PC card See section 9 1 r Panel and Top Panel Cursor keys Used to set values including the movement between digits move the cursor and select items in setup operations SET key Enters Confirms the item or value set using the cursor keys RESET key Resets the value entered using the cursor keys to default PAGE key Because all measurement items cannot fit on one screen the WT3000 displays the measurement items on separate pages The PAGE V key and the PAGE A key is used to switch the displayed page See section 5 1 WAS WT3000 SEFE wav VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE a Setup Menu Display Key and SO DO IS estem wlocsom a ExecutionKey ono ET E Keys that are pressed first when entering a LCD ES setting or executing an operation Press Handle the setup menu display key to open various Use the handles both
14. 5 6 lom 5 6 o N 5 6 Z p4 doeet Zero suppressiOTI icici a bentes rrr ca a EE Cra FE REX AREE zero level compensation ZOOM m IM 760301 01E Index 5
15. Properties Displays the following information about the selected file filename extension the file size the date the file was saved the attribute the comment etc Selecting the File Attribute Select the file attribute of each file from the following Note R W Read and write R Read only Cannot write to the file or delete the file You cannot change a directory attribute The number of directories and files that can be displayed in the file list is 2500 If the number of directories and files in a directory exceeds 2500 the file list randomly displays 2500 of the directories and files Files that do not have an archive attribute are not displayed in the File List window Do not remove the archive attribute of the files saved by the WT3000 using your PC Up to 42 characters can be displayed in the path If the path exceeds 42 characters is displayed at the end of the character string File names are not case sensitive Comments are case sensitive In addition the following names cannot be used due to limitations of MS DOS AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK COM1 to COMQ and LPT1 to LPT9 IM 760301 01E 9 19 9 7 Deleting Files CAUTION Do not remove the PC card or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or icon of the PC card is blinking Such acts can damage the PC card or destroy the data on it Procedure a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Sm A UPDATE moe EN v
16. Stopping the Integration 7 Press the STOP soft key The START indicator turns OFF and the STOP indicator illuminates The integration time and integration value are held If you press STOP before the time specified by the integration timer is reached and then press START integration continues up to the time specified by the integration timer If the reservation time for stopping the integration is reached in the real time normal integration mode the START indicator turns OFF and the STOP indicator illuminates The integration time and integration value are held If the time specified by the integration timer elapses in the real time repetitive integration mode the integration time and integration value are automatically reset and the integration is repeated until STOP is pressed or when the reservation time for stopping the integration is reached Resetting the Integration 8 Press the RESET soft key The STOP indicator turns OFF the integration time and integration value are reset and the display shows no data Explanation For functional details see section 2 6 Starting Stopping and Resetting the Integration The integration can be started stopped or reset from the front panel keys or through communication commands The following figure shows the relationship between the integration operation and start stop and reset Pressing RESET after the integration has stopped resets the integration value
17. Item Specifications Number of display rasters 501 Display format Peak Peak compressed data Sample rate Approx 200 kS s Waveforms can be reproduced accurately up to approximately 10 kHz Time axis In the range of 0 5 ms div to 2 s div However less than or equal to 1 10 of the data update rate Trigger Triggertype Edge type Trigger mode Select auto or normal Trigger automatically turns OFF when integration is in progress Trigger source Select from the voltage or current applied to the input element and external clock Trigger slope Select from 4 rising falling or ft rising and falling Trigger level When the trigger source is a voltage or current applied to the input element Set in the range of 100 to the top or bottom edge of the screen from the screen center Resolution 0 1 When the trigger source is Ext Clk external clock TTL level For the specifications of the external clock see section 6 3 Vertical zoom on the waveform Zoom in out vertically for each voltage or current applied to the input element Set the zoom rate in the range from 0 1 to 100 times Waveform display ON OFF Select ON OFF for each voltage or current applied to the input element Waveform display format 1 2 3 and 4 split window displays are possible Display interpolation of the waveform Select dot or linear display Graticule Select the grid and cross scale di
18. USER ELEMENT LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL INTEG r o eo gt r SHIFT Turning ON OFF the Scale Value and To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 To display waveforms set the display mode to Wave Numeric Wave Wave Trend or Wave Bar For the setup procedure see section 6 1 f Press FORM to display the Wave Form menu If the waveform display is at the lower section of the screen on the split display press SHIFT FORM LOWER FORM Displayed only on models with the harmonic measurement option 2 Press the Display Setting soft key to display the Disp Setting menu Turning ON OFF the Scale Value Display 3 Press the Scale Value soft key to select ON or OFF Turning ON OFF the Waveform Label 3 Press the Label soft key to select ON or OFF Wave For Format Single Ed Time div Sms Trigger Display Settings Wave Mapping Wave Form M Format Single Time div Sms i Trigger Disp Settings interpolate Graticule H FH Scale Value IM 760301 01E 6 21 Aejdsiq u0JoAeA Hu 6 8
19. j F Testing the Keys and the Keyboard Testing the Keys Press the Test Exec soft key Press a key on the front panel The test for the pressed key is executed Press the 4 or p cursor key The indicator lights one by one each time an arrow key is pressed 8 Press ESC twice to exit from the key test nom Testing the Keyboard 9 Press the Soft Key soft key A keyboard appears 10 Operate the keyboard Check that the characters entered on the keyboard are correctly displayed in the entry box of the keyboard For keyboard operations see section 3 14 Entering Values and Strings Selftest Test Item Selftest M Test Item Key Board Key Board m INSERT M Soft Key ilz BIST ISD2 I8 3 Te 55 E 97 p LK Soft Key d m E Test Exec Test Exec Memory Test Tests whether the internal ROM and RAM are operating correctly If Pass is displayed it is operating correctly If Failed is displayed contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Testing the Keys and Keyboard Tests whether the front panel keys are operating properly If the name of the key being pressed appears on the screen it is operating correctly e If the indicator turns ON OFF when the lt q or p cursor is pressed the keys are operating correctly To exit from the key test press ESC twice Ifthe display is not correct contact your
20. 1P2W Wiring system Pattern 3 Wiring system Pattern 4 1P2W 1P2W 1P2W P3W or 3P3W XB 1P3W or 3P3W XA Wiring system Pattern 5 1P3W or 3P3W XA 1P3W or 3P3W Wiring system Pattern 6 Wiring system Pattern 7 Note 3P4W or 3P3W 3V3A XA 3P4W or 3P3W 3V3A ZA Select the wiring system to match the circuit under measurement that is actually wired The method in which the X function is determined varies depending on the wiring system If the selected wiring System does not match the actual circuit measurements and computation will not be correct For the relationship between the wiring system and the determination of the function see appendix 1 4 2 IM 760301 01E 4 1 Selecting the Wiring System The wiring system configuration is displayed at the right side of the screen Because it is displayed behind the menu press the ESC key to hide the menu allowing the configuration to be viewed Below are examples showing the wiring systems on a model with four input elements installed When elements 1 to 4 are set When elements 1 and 2 are set to single phase three wire to single phase two wire and elements 3 and 4 are set to three phase three wire _ Element _ aCip3w Wiring unit and wiring system U1 1000vrms U1 1000vrms 11 3 Arms 11 3 Arms Displays the elements that compose Element2 U2 1000vrms the wiring unit with a frame U2 1000vrms 12 30A
21. 7 7 300 Vpk 900 Vpk 1 1 grid 1 div 1 grid 1 div 75V 225V Horizontal Time Axis For procedures see section 6 3 Set the horizontal time axis by specifying the time per grid 1 division The time axis can be set in 1 2 or 5 steps in the range up to the point in which the time corresponding to one screen is equal to the data update rate For example if the data update rate is 500 ms the time per division can be changed in the order 0 5 ms 1 ms 2 ms 5 ms 10 ms 20 ms and 50 ms This allows the time of one screen to be changed in the order 5 ms 10 ms 20 ms 50 ms 100 ms 200 ms and 500 ms 1 grid 1 div 10 ms 1 grid 1 div 20 ms 100 ms a p 200 ms Observation time Observation time 2 22 IM 760301 01E 2 7 Waveform Display Note Number of displayed points on the screen When waveforms are displayed the data points waveform display data are displayed in segments called rasters There are 501 rasters in the time axis direction on one screen On the other hand data is sampled according to the sample rate and one screen of the sampled data becomes the data that is displayed on the screen as a waveform Because the number of display segments number of displayed points on the screen is constant at 501 rasters while the number of sampled data points varies according to the
22. Cursor Measurement ITEM amp ELEMENT OneoTE wi 0 8 cud o toca WP q TIME FU FI n SINGLE CAL INTEG DISPLAY numeri WAVE ITEM FORM USER Femen LOWERITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL s To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys ofz M z z E 5 LJ SYNC SOURCE In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section STORE SET 3 14 scauwe merces MOTOR FREQ MEASURE CURSOR Fe ace save MENU pr usc Cre MENU To display trends set the display mode to Trend Numeric Trend Wave Trend or Bar Trend For the setup procedure see section 7 1 Displayed only on models with the harmonic measurement option 1 Press SHIFT MEASURE CURSOR to display the Cursor menu For split display of Wave Trend or Bar Trend proceed to step 3 For all other displays proceed to step 3 2 Pressthe Trend Cursor Setting soft key to display the Cursor menu for the trend display Cursor Trend Cursor prr ON M Trendc1 Traci T1 M TrendC2 Traci Tz Trend C1
23. Displayed only on models with the harmonic measurement option 1 Press ITEM to display the Trend Items menu If the trend display is at the lower section of the screen on the split display press SHIFT ITEM LOWER ITEM 2 Press the Trend Items soft key to display the Trend Items menu Aejdsig pualy E Trend Items Trend Scale K Frequency Meas Item IM 760301 01E 7 5 7 3 Selecting the Trend Display Target Selecting the Item to Be Set 3 Press the Trend Object soft key 4 Press the cursor keys to select a value between T1 and T16 Selecting the Measurement Function 5 Pressthe Function soft key The measurement function selection box appears 6 Press the cursor keys to select any of the measurement functions starting with U 7 Press SET to confirm Selecting the Element Wiring Unit 8 Press the Element X soft key to display the element wiring unit selection box 9 Press the cursor keys to select any of the elements wiring units starting with Elementi 10 Press SET to confirm ff Trend Ttens T Trend items rend object S Trend Object I Trend Object T1 Sa T1 HF Function Function u Lv 1 P s Q A 2 ii pL y M Element eU 1 FreqU Freq z Rs FSet OM Element7 Element 1 Rp xp Uhdf Ihdf Phdf Uthd Ithd Element 1 Element 1 Order Pthd Uthf Ithf Utif Itif hvf het Order Element 2 Jimi U peak U peak peak I
24. Do not open the secondary side of the CT as it may damage the CT For other handling precautions of the VT or CT follow the information that comes with the VT or CT that you are using 3 20 IM 760301 01E 3 11 Wiring the Circuit under Measurement When Using the VT CT Note After wiring the wiring system must be selected See section 4 1 Selecting the Wiring System The thick lines on the wiring diagrams are the sections where the current flows Use appropriate wires that are suitable for the current Make sure you have the polarities correct when making the connections Otherwise the polarity of the measurement current will be reversed and correct measurements cannot be made Be especially careful when connecting the clamp type current sensor because it is easy to reverse the connection The scaling function can be used to transform the input signal to data that correspond to direct measurements For the setup procedure see section 4 5 Setting the Scaling Function When Using the VT CT Note that the frequency and phase characteristics of the VT or CT affect the measured data For safety reasons this section indicates wiring diagrams in which the common terminals of the secondary side of the VT or CT are grounded However the necessity of grounding and the grounding location ground near the VT or CT or ground near the power meter vary depending on the object being measured To measure the apparent
25. I3 l4 IZA WP 1 WP 3 F2 P1 P2 P3 P4 PXA WP 1 WP 3 F3 1 S2 S3 S4 SZA qi q3 F4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 QXA q 1 q 3 n1 A1 A2 A3 M AXA q 1 q 3 n2 91 o2 93 94 ZA WS1 WS3 n3 Pc1 Pc2 Pc3 Pc4 PcXA wai WQ3 n4 fU FreqU 1 fU FreqU 2 fU FreqU 3 fU FreqU 4 UZB WP2 WP4 Speed fl Freql 1 fl Freql 2 fl Freql 3 fl Freql 4 IZB WP 2 WP 4 Torque U pk1 U pk2 U pk3 U pk4 PXB WP 2 WP 4 SyncSpd U pk1 U pk2 U pk3 U pk4 S B Slip l pk1 l pk2 l pk3 l pk4 QZB Pm l pk1 l pk2 I pk3 I pk4 AXB CfU1 CfU2 CfU3 CfU4 OB Cfl1 Cfl2 Cfl3 Cfl4 PcXB IM 760301 01E App 9 xipueddy Appendix 2 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numeric Data ALL Item Display Display Page 2 3 4 5 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 1 U n1 U pk Wp n2 F2 I k I k Ithd oU1 U3 P l pk WP n3 F3 P k P k Pthd U1 H S l pk WP n4 F4 S k Q k Uthf Q CfU q AF1 F5 Q k Z k Ithf A Cfl q AF2 F6 A K Rs k Utif Pc q AF3 F7 o k Xs k Itif AF4 F8 fl Freql Speed F9 Torque F10 SyncSpd F11 Slip Pm Left Side of the Sin
26. U nja App 20 IM 760301 01E Appendix 4 Power Basics Power Harmonics and RLC of AC Circuits Series RLC Circuit The equation below expresses the voltage relationship when resistance Rs C inductance L H and capacitance C F are connected in series U y Urs UL Uc IRs IXt IXc IJ Rs XL Xc IRs Xs Xs tan a Rs Xs Rs I Rs L AAW NN 880 E Uns UL ap Uc 2 U The relationship between resistance Rs reactance Xs and impedance Z is expressed as follows Xs XL Xc Z Rs Xe Parallel RLC Circuit The equation below expresses the current relationship when resistance Rp Q inductance L H and capacitance C F are connected in parallel l y Ine IL Ic To uf n __ ReXP Re Xp Ic Es bay RP IRP a The relationship between resistance Rp reactance Xp and impedance Z is expressed E ae ctam xc as follows xipueddy XLXc P Xc XL ReXp 4 RP XP Z IM 760301 01E App 21 Appendix 5 For Making Accurate Measurements Effects of Power Loss By wiring the circuit to match the load you can minimize the effect of the power loss on the measurement accuracy We will consider the current source SOURCE and load resistance LOAD below When the Measurement Current Is Relatively Large Wire so that the voltage
27. Yes Settings can be modified No Settings cannot be modified Starting integration in auto range mode switches the measurement range to fixed range mode Limitation on the Waveform Display Function during Integration The trigger function see section 6 3 for waveform display does not work while integration is in progress or is suspended Therefore the signal level of the waveform display at the left end of the screen may not be stable 5 42 IM 760301 01E Chapter 6 Waveform Display 6 1 Waveform Display Procedure To exit the menu during ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE Ersson operation press ESC OO located above the soft elo A keys In the procedural AL Cw explanation below the MEASURING MEASURING phrase press the cursor WIRING vore auro ms uei 06 H GEH MODE keys may be used This INPUT INFO phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT OreworE and character strings For R toca details on the procedures see section 3 14 GO CAL v l ITEM FORM usen ELEMENT INTEG srr i Y LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL Displaying the Waveform on the Entire Screen 1 Press WAVE to display the waveform screen Displaying the Waveform by Dividing the Display into Halves Split Display 2 Press OTHERS to disp
28. a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT RUE J A numeri WAVE U UP S 0 mm HOLD LOCAL Cursor keys WPIg 4 TIME FU FI n SINGLE CAL v ITEM FORM USER evewenr INTEG LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL ry Y Scaune neren NG To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above MO TOR FREQ the soft keys SET FILTER In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the pecs cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and rue mes store character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 el por _wisc_ Her MENU Note Check that it is okay to initialize the settings before actually initializing the settings You cannot set the settings back after initialization Itis recommended that the setup parameters be saved see section 9 3 before initialization Press MISC to display the Misc menu Press the Initialize Settings soft key An Alert dialog box appears Press the cursor keys to select OK or Cancel Select OK and press SET to execute the initialization Select Cancel and press SET to abort the initialization Bomc Really All Settings will be initialized Remote Do you want to exe
29. 1 Set Reset gt 2004 05 21 17 46 0003 SET 27309 2004 05 21 18 07 R 0002 SET 27309 2004 05721 18 07 R File List All Set Path PC Card PCZ LSpace 123312128 byte File Name Size pate Attribute IPC Card 1 amp gt 200470521 17 46 a Property Attribute Copy Exec IM 760301 01E 9 25 9 8 Copying Files Explanation Selecting the Copy Source Destination Storage Medium and Directory Same as the explanation given in Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory in section 9 3 Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box Same as the explanation given in Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box in section 9 6 Properties Same as the explanation given in Properties in section 9 6 Selecting the File Attribute Same as the explanation given in Selecting the File Attribute in section 9 6 Selecting the Copy Source Files By placing asterisk marks to the left of the file names those files can be copied There are two methods in selecting the files to be copied Selecting the files one at a time Press the Set Reset soft key to place an asterisk mark to the left of the files one at a time Selecting the files at once Press the All Set soft key to place asterisk marks to the left of the selected file names at once There are three methods in selecting the files at once f
30. 3 9 Wiring the Circuit under Measurement for Direct Input Note After wiring the wiring system must be selected See section 4 1 Selecting the Wiring System The thick lines on the wiring diagrams are the sections where the current flows Use appropriate wires that are suitable for the current Wiring Example of a Single Phase Two Wire System 1P2W If four input elements are available four single phase two wire systems can be set up See section 3 7 for details on which wiring system below should to be selected SOURCE LOAD U source LOAD Input terminal SOURCE LOAD source uv Loan Input terminal Wiring Example of a Single Phase Three Wire System 1P3W If four input elements are available two single phase three wire systems can be set up elements 1 and 2 and elements 3 and 4 The assignment of elements to the input terminals in the figure varies depending on the number of installed input elements For details see Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems in section 2 3 Measurement Conditions SOURCE LOAD I Q N SOURCE LOAD Input terminal 1 Input terminal 2 3 14 IM 760301 01E 3 9 Wiring the Circuit under Measurement for Direct Input Wiring Example of a Three Phase Three Wire System 3P3W If four input elements are
31. 50 60Hz 0 01 of range or less Upto 200 kHz reference value Voltage 3 range x f of range or 3 whichever is less or less Direct current input and external current sensor input maximum range range x 0 001 x f of range or less Except 0 0196 or greater The unit of frequency f is kHz The maximum range in an equation is 30 A or 10 V Line filter Select OFF 500 Hz 5 5 kHz or 50 kHz Frequency filter Select On or Off A D converter Simultaneous conversion of voltage and current inputs Resolution 16 bits Conversion rate sampling interval Approx 5 us For the measurement functions of harmonic measurement see chapter 7 in the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Range switching Can be set for each element Auto range function Range Increase When U or exceeds 110 of the rated range When the peak value of the input signal exceeds approximately 330 of the rated range approximately 66096 when the crest factor is set to 6 Range decrease When U or is less than or equal to 30 of the rated range and Upk or Ipk is less than or equal to 300 of the lower range approximately 600 when the crest factor is set to 6 IM 760301 01E 12 1 suoleoyioeds H 12 2 Display Item Specifications Display 8 4 color TFT LCD monitor Display resolution of the entire screen 640 H x 480 V dots Display resolution of the waveform display 501 H x 432 V dots Disp
32. 903 System ROM failure Maintenance service is required 904 System RAM failure Maintenance service is required 906 Fan stopped Power off immediately Maintenance service is required 909 Illegal SUM value Maintenance service is required 910 RAM read write error Maintenance service is required 911 Memory bus error Maintenance service is required 912 Fatal error in Communication driver Maintenance service is required 914 Time out occurs in Communications 915 EEPROM SUM error EEPROM may be damaged Maintenance service is required 919 Module installation condition and setup parameters do not match The system has been initialized Maintenance service is required 921 System Failed to Draw Display Maintenance service is required 922 Failed in communication with DSP Maintenance service is required 923 Transmit data abnormality from DSP Maintenance service is required Note If the system is not operating correctly or if servicing is necessary try initializing the WT3000 The WT3000 may recover 11 4 IM 760301 01E 11 3 Self Test Procedure fa Cursor keys C4 amp eoe scams meme ave MOTOR FREQ SET FILTER CURSOR NULL ue mes store MI ENU print msc er DISPLAY numeri WAVE ITEM amp ELEME
33. If you are using this instrument for the first time make sure to thoroughly read Safety Precautions given on pages v and vi Do Not Remove the Case Do not remove the case from the instrument Some parts of the instrument use high voltages which are extremely dangerous For internal inspection and adjustment contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Unplug If Abnormal Behavior Occurs If you notice smoke or unusual odors coming from the instrument immediately turn OFF the power and unplug the power cord In addition turn OFF the power to the circuit under measurement that is connected to the input terminals If these symptoms occur contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Do Not Damage the Power Cord Nothing should be placed on top of the power cord The power cord should also be kept away from any heat sources When unplugging the power cord from the outlet never pull by the cord itself Always hold and pull by the plug If the power cord is damaged check the part number indicated on page iii and purchase a replacement General Handling Precautions Do Not Place Objects on Top of the Instrument Never stack the instruments or place other instruments or any objects containing water on top of the instrument This may damage the recorder Keep Electrically Charged Objects Away from the Instrument Keep electrically charged objects away from the input terminals They may damage the internal circuitry Do Not Damage the LCD Since the LC
34. Press the cursor keys to select the item you wish to set Press SET A box used to set the color level appears Press the cursor keys to set the color level Press SET or ESC to close the box BO Orge Graph Color Mode a Default Graph Color 1 User Color R R lo E _ 13 Speed U4 Torque 14 Setting the Text Color Selecting Preset or User 3 Press the Text Color soft key to display the Text Color menu 4 Press the cursor keys to select a value between Preset1 and User iu User Color i D A Output Items Setting User Colors Press the User Color soft key to display the Text Color dialog box Press the cursor keys to select the item you wish to set Press SET A box used to set the color level appears Press the cursor keys to set the color level Press SET or ESC to close the box DIEGO OY IM 760301 01E 10 9 suonoung 19410 B 10 6 Setting the Display Color Text Color Iv Preset 1 qo Explanation Text Color User Color R G B 5 Menu Fore ee 4 7 Menu Back Select Box Sub Menu Selected Key The display color for each item can be specified Set the color using a ratio 0 7 of red R green G and blue B Setting the Graphic Color Select default color or a user color For user color the d
35. The sampled data is processed as numeric data or data used to display waveforms on the screen waveform display data 2 Sample rate represents the number of data points that are sampled within 1 s For example at a sample rate of 200 kS s 200000 data points are sampled every second Types of Measurement Functions e Measurement Functions on Each Input Element The following 22 measurement functions are available For details related to the determination of measurement function data see Appendix 1 U voltage Urms Umn Udc Urmn current Irms Imn Idc Irmn P active power S apparent power Q reactive power power factor phase difference fU fl also expressed as fU FreqU and fl Fregl measures the frequencies of up to two voltage current signals U pk U pk maximum minimum values of voltage I pk I pk maximum minimum values of current CfU Cfl crest factor of voltage current Pc Corrected Power 3 The frequencies of voltage and current on all input elements can be measured on models with the frequency measurement add on option Measurement Functions of the Average or Sum of Input Elements Functions The following 14 measurement functions are available For details related to the determination of measurement function data see Appendix 1 UX voltage average Urmsz Umnz UdcX Urmn2 I current average Irmsz Imn IdcX IrmnX PX sum of active powers SX sum of apparent power
36. The setup parameters that exist immediately before the power switch is turned OFF are stored in memory The same is true when the power cord gets disconnected from the outlet The next time the power switch is turned ON the instrument powers up using the stored setup parameters Note ____ A lithium battery is used to retain the setup parameters When the lithium battery voltage falls below a certain level a message is displayed on the screen see section 11 2 when the power switch is turned ON If this message appears frequently the battery must be replaced quickly The user cannot replace the battery Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer to have the battery replaced For information regarding battery life see section 11 6 3 6 IM 760301 01E 3 5 Wiring Precautions AN To prevent the possibility of electric shock and damage to the instrument follow the warnings below Employ protective earth ground before connecting measurement cables The power cord that comes with the instrument is a three pin type power cord Connect the power cord to a properly grounded three prong outlet Turn OFF the power to the circuit under measurement when wiring the circuit Connecting or removing measurement cables while the power is ON is dangerous Take special caution not to wire a current circuit to the voltage input terminal or a voltage circuit to the current input terminal Strip the insulation cover of the measurement cable so that
37. may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and FILE IMAGE SAVE STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 pr msc Crap 1 Press AVG to display the Avg menu Turning ON OFF the Averaging Function 2 Pressthe Averaging soft key to select ON or OFF Selecting the Averaging Type 3 Press the Avg Type soft key to select Exp or Lin Setting the Attenuation Constant or Average Count 4 Press the cursor keys to set the attenuation constant or the average count If the averaging type is Exp exponential averaging set the attenuation constant If the averaging type is Lin moving averaging set the average count IM 760301 01E 4 23 suonipuo 1ueuianseo y BH 4 9 Selecting the Averaging Function Explanation For functional details see section 2 3 The averaging function is effective when reading of the numeric display is difficult due to fluctuations This occurs when the fluctuation of the power supply or the load is large or when the input signal frequency is low Measurement Functions of Normal Measurement Turning ON OFF Averaging You can select whether to perform the specified averaging operation ON Performs averaging OFF Does not perform averaging Selecting the Averaging Type Select one of the choices below For th
38. nero AVG To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above E the soft keys INC SOURCE In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the om cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 5 Press any soft key ir PN e i is the numeric data If you select Wave e st on aveform di If you select NumericyWave ZA em i th waveform display data Store Set Wo p Mode Recall A ore io 17 Recall File Setting Convert gt Menory Initialize Memory Exec Convert Memory 8 6 IM 760301 01E 8 3 Setting the Numeric Data and Waveform Display Data to Be Stored Selecting the Numeric Data to Be Stored This operation is valid if the stored item was set to Numeric or Numeric Wave in step 5 6 e N K Store Iten Numeric List rem o e 8 Setting the items one at a time 7 Press the List Item soft key to display the List Item dialog box Selecting all items at once during normal measurement only Press the cursor keys to select All ON Press SET The buttons to the left o
39. 7 Press SET An entry box appears 8 Press the cursor keys to set the hour minute or second that you selected in step 6 9 Press SET or ESC to close the box 10 Repeat steps 6 to 9 to set the hour minute and second Integ Set q Mode Normal Timer Setting L Timer Settin Timer Setting 00000 C00 C00 90000 L0 J a Auto Cal PFF ON 4 D A Output Rated Time Explanation For functional details see section 2 6 To perform integration the integration mode and integration time must be set before starting the operation This section will describe how to set the normal integration mode and the integration time For the procedure to start the integration see section 5 14 Selecting the Normal Integration Mode or Repetitive Integration Mode In this mode the integration time is set in relative time and the integration is performed over the specified time This mode consists of the following two types Normal Integration Mode The integration time is set in relative time The integration is stopped after the specified time elapses when the maximum integration time of 10000 hours is exceeded when STOP is pressed or when the integration value reaches the maximum or minimum integration display value 999999 MWh or 999999 MAh The integration time and value are held at that point Repetitive Integration Mode Continuous Integration The integration ti
40. Crest Factor For procedures see section 4 6 The crest factor is defined as the ratio of the peak value of the waveform to the rms value Crest factor CF Peak valie Rms value Peak value Rms value Input signal waveform The crest factor on the WT3000 is determined by the maximum peak value that can be applied for rated input in terms of a multiplication factor Peak value that can be input Crest factor CF Measurement range 2 10 IM 760301 01E 2 3 Measurement Conditions The crest factor can be set to 3 or 6 on the WT3000 The measurable crest factor is as follows Crest factor CF measurement range x CF setting 3 or 6 Measured value rms value However the peak value of the input signal must be less than or equal to the maximum allowable input If the crest factor of the input signal is greater than the specifications of the WT3000 the crest factor defined at the rated input the signal can be measured by setting a greater measurement range For example even if CF is set to 3 measurement is possible for signals with a crest factor greater than 5 when the measured value rms value is less than 60 of the measurement range If the minimum effective input 1 of the measurement range is being applied at CF 3 measurement for CF 300 is possible The voltage range current range effective input range and measurement accuracy vary depending on the crest factor sett
41. Date Time KKKKKKKKKKK Options 22222222555 Harmonics Measure 651 Yes Built in Printer L B51 Yes Delta Calculation L DTl Yes Add on Freq Measurel FQl Yes DA Output L pDAl Yes 2004 12 03 12 53 50 VGA Output L v11 Yes Serial RS 232 L c21 Yes Selftest Link Date 2004 12 03 Fri 12 40 Product ID NLb5hef5 o c z D o gt o o z 3 a 2 5 pea 5 D 3 o 9 9 3 a 5 7 o o a o 5 Explanation Displaying the System Conditions You can check the model ROM version element configuration and the presence or absence of options etc IM 760301 01E 11 7 11 5 Replacing the Power Fuse A WARNING To prevent the possibility of fire only use a fuse with the specified rating voltage current and type Be sure to turn OFF the instrument and unplug the power cord before replacing the fuse Never short the fuse holder Fuse Rating The power fuse used on this instrument is specified as follows Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 6 3 A Type Time lag Standard UL VDE certified Part number A1463EF Replacement Procedure Replace the power fuse according to the procedure below 1 Turn OFF the power switch 2 Remove the power cord from the power connector 3 Insertthe tip of a flat blade screw driver in the dented section of the fuse holder on the power connector side turn it in the direction of the arrow and pull out
42. Efficiency equation Pm PXA IM 760301 01E 5 21 1ueulioJnseoe u JOMOd E 5 8 Procedure S SENSOR RATIO CA S3 VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE MEASURING MEASURING urn C a MODE auro OEH MoE Auro DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT OREMOTE ITEM numeri WAVE FORM U l P 0 1 6 WP q us USER ELEMENT UPDATE PDAT HOLD SINGLE CAL INTEG LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL 1 Press WIRING to display the Wiring menu 2 Press the Compensation soft key to display the Compensation dialog box Selecting the Wiring Compensation 3 Press the cursor keys to select the wiring compensation of the desired element from element 1 to 4 4 Press SET A wiring compensation selection box appears 5 Pressthe cursor keys to select a value between OFF and I U Wiring Element Wiring Compensation Efficiency Compensation E C 1P2W 1 1P2W 1 1P2Ww 1 1P2W 1 110 230 310 Wiring Setting 4 1 9 Formula OFF FF prr 1 orr 1 Compensation a _ Independent PFF ON 4 Measure LOCAL Eq Setting the Wiring Efficiency and Two Wattmeter Method Compensations To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the sof
43. File Name and Comment the server name user name password and e mail address etc for Ethernet communication The figure below shows the keyboard that appears when entering the file name or comment File names and comments can be temporarily held in the internal memory so that they can be used in other file names and comments 1 Entering the File Name and Comment and Temporarily Storing Them Press the A and W cursor keys to select the desired character You can also press the A and soft keys to move the cursor vertically Press SET to enter characters in the entry box If there are characters already in the entry box use the and y cursor keys to select the entry position Repeat steps 1 and 2 to enter all the characters After entering all the characters select ENT on the keyboard and press SET The string is confirmed and the keyboard disappears you can also press the ENT key to achieve the same result At the same time the confirmed string is temporarily stored in the internal memory Up to 8 sets of strings can be stored After eight strings have been stored a new string overwrites the oldest string Recalling the Temporarily Stored String Press the soft key Each time the soft key is pressed the temporarily stored strings are displayed in the entry box of the keyboard in order When the eight strings that are temporarily stored are displayed the most recent string is displayed again If there are characters alre
44. PHIU1U3 U1 H PHIU111 oU1 l2 PHIU112 U1 13 PHIU113 5 14 IM 760301 01E 5 4 Setting the User Defined Function In side the parentheses a symbol representing the element to which the measured signal is to be applied is entered on the left side and the characters OR followed by the harmonic order is entered on the right side E1 OR2 is an example Elements 1 2 3 4 XA and 2B are represented by the symbols E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 and E6 respectively One of the symbols E1 to E6 can be specified according to the installed elements and wiring system pattern If the harmonic section is set to ORT it represents normal measured values for example Urms for measured voltage if it is set to O zero it represents DC Urms Umn Udc or Urmn is substituted into U according to the specified voltage mode Irms Imn Idc or Irmn is substituted into I according to the specified current mode Values are substituted into URMS and UMN according to the voltage current measurement mode as follows Voltage mode MEAN DC URMS Yes No UMN Yes If the voltage and current modes are set to RMS and UMN is assigned for the user defined function Urms Umn Irms and P can be measured simultaneously If the voltage and current modes are set to MEAN and URMSY is assigned for the user defined function Urms Umn Imn and P can be measured simultaneously Urms Umn Irms
45. Setup parameters ll Y M Y Network printer CRT Recorder LEY Printer 0 Functions such as store recall from internal memory and Ethernet interface cannot be used on the current WT3000 that you are using Saving data such as numeric data waveform display data and store data to the PC card is not possible on the current WT3000 that you are using Conforms to EIA 574 EIA 574 is a standard for the 9 pin EIA 232 RS 232 standard Z G IM 760301 01E uondiosog jeuonouneJ Hu 2 1 System Configuration and Block Diagram Block Diagram Input element 2 to 4 Input element 1 Element Volt meas input circuit l 2to4 A D i l ry 1 gt psp Raa enin nna es as Pee ea secs See wee 2S ese ee ee l Element 1 Freq meas input circuit ZerGBIOE Pulse i m gt O O detection trans Frequency former filter i l Input peak detection circuit Peak l i EUER ENTRETIEN I detection lire ere 91 Delta Poche ee e ute AG d E AA ADT ae ae PS E ees vix EM DSP Current input circuit j gt option 0O A D FF Line Oo k T e filter zero cross Pulse Frequency detection qune i Lp ee filter Peak EAM Ly option detection IR Motor input cir
46. The range changes automatically depending on the amplitude of the input signal The switching conditions and precautions are the same as the descriptions given in section 4 3 Setting the Measurement Range during Direct Input The different ranges used in the auto mode are the same as those available for fixed range suonipuo 1ueuaunseo y BH Setting the External Current Sensor Transformation Ratio The transformation ratio can be set in the range of 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Configuration Example of the External Current Sensor Range and Transformation Ratio When measuring a current with a maximum value of 100 A using a current sensor that outputs 10 mV when 1 A of current is flowing the equation becomes 10 mV A x 100 A 1 V Therefore set 1 V for the external current sensor range and 10 mV A for the external current sensor transformation ratio Note When attempting to directly read the current of the circuit under measurement by multiplying the output of the external current sensor by the transformation ratio turn OFF the external VT CT scaling function see section 4 5 If it is turned ON the value will be multiplied by the CT ratio IM 760301 01E 4 13 4 5 Procedure Setting the Scaling Function When Using VT a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT A numeric WAVE vus sono UPDATE HOLD WPiq gt TIM rmn SINGLE CAL ITEM FORM USER Eeen INTEG LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL a Y
47. fa Cursor keys C4 amp e amp t scams meme ave MOTOR FREQ SET FILTER NUL CURSOR ue mes store MI ENU STORE SET print msc er MENU DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT wie S 0 1 0 mm RATE HOLD OREMOTE LOCAL numeri wave WPIg TIME FU FI n SINGLE CAL ITEM FORM LOWER FORM LOWER ITEM ELEMENT O AL USER USER SET INTEG SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Pressthe Config soft key to display the Config menu 3 Pressthe cursor keys to select a value between 1 and 3 System Overview Initialize Settings Remote Control Date Time Selftest Message Language ENG Menu Language ENG Shift Lock ON Selecting the Screen Brightness Select the screen brightness in the range of 1 to 3 The darkest setting is 1 and the brightest setting is 3 IM 760301 01E 10 7 suonoung Jou10 B 10 6 Setting the Display Color a D
48. marked in purple below the key in the shifted condition condition in which the Shift key is pressed OFF Releases the shifted condition ON Does not release the shifted condition You can continue to select the setup menus marked in purple To release the shifted condition press the Shift key 10 12 IM 760301 01E 10 8 Help Function Procedure Explanation Cu A URS SCALING MOTOR fa rsor k o O v aU LINE FILTER FREQ FILTER MEASURE CURSOR y e UO AVG SYNC SOURCE O NUL n IMAGE SAVE store MENU STORE SET MISC HELP 1 2 DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT OREMOTE numeric WAVE U I P S 0 1 0 UPDATE RATE HOLD WP q TIME FU FI n SINGLE ITEM LOWER ITEM FORM LOWER FORM USER eren USER SET O AL INTEG LOCAL s To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft k eys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 Displaying the Help Window Press HELP to display the help window Press the key or soft key that you wish to revie
49. measurement see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Numeric 4 Numeric 4 S Item No S Item No 1 1 J a S Function M Function None u 1 P s Q A u d N ou 1 FreqU Fregi z n Nn Set Element Z Xs Rp Xp Uhdf thdf Phdf Uthd Element 1 Element 1 Ithd Pthd Uthf Ithf Utif Itif hvf Order Element 2 O hcf U peak U peak I peak I peak cfu Cfi xd Element 3 Element 4 Reset Items Exec ZA ZB Pe Time uP wp WP q q Reset Items Exec Frequency Meas Item q ws wo m1 2 13 4 4r1 4r2 4F3 4F4 QUi Uj qUi Uk i li Y Frequency Meas Item Page Scrolling the Display 15 Press PAGE WV or PAGE A to scroll the page Press PAGE W to display the next page Press PAGE A to display the previous page Jumping to the Last or First Page 16 Press SHIFT PAGE WV W or SHIFT PAGE A A to jump the page Press SHIFT W W to display the last page Press SHIFT A A to display the first page IM 760301 01E 5 1 Displaying Numeric Data and Changing the Displayed Items Resetting the Order of the Displayed Items 1 Press ITEM to display the Numeric menu 2 Press the Reset Items Exec soft key An Alert dialog box appears 3 Pressthe cursor keys to select OK or Cancel 4 Select OK and press SET to reset the order of the displayed items on all pages If you select Cancel and press S
50. or death Use the Correct Power Supply Before connecting the power cord ensure that the source voltage matches the rated supply voltage of the instrument and that it is within the maximum rated voltage of the provided power cord Use the Correct Power Cord and Plug To prevent the possibility of electric shock or fire be sure to use the power cord supplied by YOKOGAWA The main power plug must be plugged into an outlet with a protective earth terminal Do not disable this protection by using an extension cord without protective earth grounding Connect the Protective Ground Terminal Be sure to connect the protective earth to prevent electric shock before turning ON the power The power cord that comes with the instrument is a three prong type power cord Connect the power cord to a properly grounded three prong outlet Do Not Impair the Protective Grounding Never cut off the internal or external protective earth wire or disconnect the wiring of the protective earth terminal Doing so poses a potential shock hazard Do Not Operate with Defective Protective Grounding or Fuse Do not operate the instrument if the protective earth or fuse might be defective Also make sure to check them before operation Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors Operation in such an environment constitutes a safety hazard Do Not Remove Covers The cover should b
51. see section 2 3 Turning ON OFF the Scaling Function You can select whether to multiply the voltage U current I and power P S and Q by the VT ratio CT ratio and power coefficient respectively When turned ON the SCALING indicator illuminates e ON The voltage U current I and power P S and Q are multiplied by the VT ratio CT ratio and power coefficient OFF The voltage U current I and power P S and Q are not multiplied by the VT ratio CT ratio and power coefficient The output values of the external VT and CT are read directly as numeric data in this case Setting the VT Ratio The VT ratio can be set in the range of 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Setting the CT Ratio The CT ratio can be set in the range of 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Setting the Power Coefficient Scaling Factor The power coefficient SF can be set in the range of 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Note If the result of multiplying the VT ratio CT ratio or power coefficient scaling factor to the measured value exceeds 9 99999G the display frame of the numeric data will display OF 4 16 IM 760301 01E 4 6 Selecting the Crest Factor a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT RUE J A numeri WAVE U UP S 0 mm HOLD LOCAL Cursor keys WPIg 4 TIME FU FI n SINGLE CAL v ITEM FORM USER even INTEG SHIFT LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL Y Scala iners l AVG To exit the menu during operatio
52. the X function see appendix 1 The following table shows the relationship between the number of installed elements the selectable wiring system patterns and the assignment of input elements to wiring units XA or XB Installed input elements 1 Installed input elements Wiring system Pattern 1 1P2W Installed input elements 1 2 Wiring system Pattern 1 1P2W 1P2W Wiring system Pattern 2 1P3W or 3P3W XA 1 2 3 Wiring system Pattern 1 1P2W 1P2W 1P2W Wiring system Pattern 2 1P3W or 3P3W 3V3A XA 1P2W Wiring system Pattern 3 1P2W 1P3W or 3P3 W 3V3A XA Wiring system Pattern 4 Installed input elements Wiring system Pattern 1 3P4W or 3P3W 3V3A 1P2W 1P2W XA 1P2W Wiring system Pattern 2 1P3W or 3P3W XA 1P2W Wiring system Pattern 3 Wiring system Pattern 4 1P2W P3W or 3P3W XB 1P2W 1P2W 1P3W or 3P3W XA Wiring system Pattern 5 1P3W or 3P3W XA 1P3W or 3P3W XB Wiring system Pattern 6 Wiring system Pattern 7 3P4W or 3P3W 3V3A XA 1P2W 3P4W or 3P3W 3V3A XA 2 8 IM 760301 01E 2 3 Measurement Conditions Measurement Range For procedures see section 4 3 Set the measurement range using an rms level When directly applying voltage or current signals to the input element two types of measurement ranges is available fixed range and auto range When waveforms are displayed th
53. 11 6 keyboard TeSt deisi arsana turre prre cr Poena 11 6 L Page label ME E ins rrt dte Bec en A eed pe al 6 21 LINE FIETER inire etr eet es 4 21 line filter Load Exec Lower Scale n PS 7 11 LPR client fUnctloni 2c penne petere 2 30 M Page Manul eoii rriei aenea arare ELLERAN AAEE ERE ESLER 8 1 manual SCALING 2 nt mnes 7 11 Iti ge 10 14 master slave synchronization measurement 10 14 master slave synchronized measurement 2 32 ve 6 24 MAX NOIA Enn 2 16 Max Hold e 5 17 maximum display MEAN MEASURE we 1 7 measurement function eessesss 2 8 measurement function symbols meaning of 5 6 measurement functions determination of App 1 measurement method esee 12 8 measurement period 00 0 0 eee cece eter eeeeeee 4 18 App 24 measurement range 2 9 4 6 urere M H n PVG AIO eH Memory i meinoty I amp sl ccs iere nre n irri eee epe ES aiT Message Language eene message language lo EHE minimurm display aane err rx rer eri eit ree MISC P MODEL iie Hcet ete ne eld motor evaluation function esee 2 5 N Page normal integration mode sene 5 30 Nor
54. 13 500mAmea Element4 P1 6 u4 100vrms Element4 7 14 500mAmean U4 100vrms P W isi 14 500mAmean otor 8 Spd 20v Motor 9 Trq 20v Spd 20v S1 Elapsed time 14 20v hd Integ Stop A6 54 55 VA rime ste of integration integ neady MILITE ik ti Start Time Integration start imer H 0 10 00 rida en 00 00 00 reservation time Performing Integration in the Real time Integration Mode 1 Check that the integration mode is set to real time normal integration R Normal or real time repetitive integration R Continuous See section 5 12 2 Check that the integration timer and the reservation time are specified See section 5 12 Starting the Integration 3 Press INTEG to display the Integ menu 4 Press the START soft key The START indicator to the right of the INTEG key illuminates and the instrument enters the ready condition When the reservation time for starting the integration is reached the START indicator changes to illumination and the integration is started 5 38 IM 760301 01E 5 14 Performing Integration Start Stop and Reset Holding the Integration 5 Press HOLD The HOLD key illuminates and the numeric data display is held Integration continues Releasing the Hold Operation 6 Press HOLD while the values are held The HOLD key turns OFF and the numeric data display is updated In the hold condition the display can be updated by carrying out single measurements by pressing SINGLE
55. 1779 wa 1 0 1780 iva Urms1 0 10476 w Change the element ML Lance of the third item P2 0 0000 1 0 1783 iva Scrolling the Page The numeric display consists of up to nine pages The number pages varies depending on the installed options and the number of displayed items The displayed items can be assigned for each page The page can be scrolled to switch the page and the displayed items can be changed collectively PAGI Urms1 nen ms 106 183 v 9 Ums 106 215 d i 4 Ss i 566 992 ma 4 ms 563 406 ma a 55 8659 55 5347 w M B 0 92793 dd 0 92802 Displayed items on page 1 example Displayed items on page 2 example Voltage current power and power factor Voltage current power and power factor of input element 1 of input element 2 Resetting the Numeric Display If the number of displayed items is set to a value other than All the display order of measurement functions can be reset to a default order 1 default set Numeric Display Related to Harmonic Measurement See the Expansion Function User s Manual 1M760301 51E On models with the harmonic measurement option single list and dual list can be displayed IM 760301 01E 2 15 uondiosog jeuonouneJ H 2 5 Computation By using the data of measurement functions the following computations can be performed In addition a function is provided in which the equation used t
56. 2 Displayed only on models with the D A output option IM 760301 01E 3 33 sjuswainseayy Bunes e40Jog BH 3 16 Displaying the Setup Parameter List Explanation Relation Table of Elements and Measurement Ranges Page 1 The following figure shows an example when the crest factor is set to 3 Power Element Settings Element 1 Element 2 Element 3 Element 4 Wiring 1P2W 1P2W 1P2W 1P2W Voltage 1000Vrms 1000 Vrms 1000vrms 1000vrms Current 30Arms 30Arms 30Arms 30Arms Sensor Ratio 10 0000 10 0000 10 0000 10 0000 Gwv A Line Filter off off off off Freq Filter off off Off off Scaling off off off off VT Ratio 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 CT Ratio 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 Scaling 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 Factor Sync Source 11 12 13 14 Relation Table of the Rotating Speed of Motor Evaluation Function Motor Version and Input Ranges of Torque Page 2 Displayed only on models with the motor evaluation function motor version Motor Element Settings Speed Torque Pm Scaling 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 Unit rpm Nm wW Sense Type Analog Analog Tanalog Auto Range off off Range 20v 20v Line Filter off off Sync Source None None Pulse Range Upper 10000 0000 50 0000 Lower 0 0000 50 0000 Rated Upper 50 0000 15000Hz Lower 50 0000 5000Hz Pulse N 60 Sync Spd Pole 2 Source 11 Relation Table of Trend Targets and Measurement Functions Page 3 Trend
57. 5000W 75 000 W 125 000W 187 500W 375 000W 0 75000 kW 1 25000 kw 5 00000 37 5000 W 75 000 W 150 000W 250 000W 375 000 W 0 75000 kW 1 50000 kW 2 50000 kw 10 0000 75 000 W 150 000W 300 000W 500 000 W 0 75000 kW 1 50000 kW 3 00000 kW 5 00000 kw 15 0000 112 500 W 225 000W 450 000W 0 75000 kW 1 12500 kW 2 25000 kW 4 50000 kW 7 5000 kw Active Power Range of the Wiring Unit with 1P3W 3P3W or 3P3W 3V3A Wiring System Current Voltage Range V Range A 7 5000 15 0000 30 0000 50 0000 75 000 150 000 300 000 500 000 250 000m 8 75000 W 7 50000W 15 0000W 25 0000W 37 5000W 75 0000W 150 000W 250 000W 500 000m 7 50000 W 15 0000W 30 0000 W 50 0000W 75 0000W 150 000W 300 000W 500 000 W 1 00000 15 0000 W 30 0000 W 60 0000 W 100 0000 W 150 000 W 300 000 w 600 000 W 1000 000 W 2 50000 37 5000 W 75 0000W 150 000W 250 000W 375 000W 750 000 W 1 50000 kW 2 50000 kw 5 00000 75 0000 W 150 000W 300 000W 500 000W 750 000 W 1 50000 kW 3 00000 kW 5 00000 kw 10 0000 150 000 W 300 000 W 600 000 W 1000 000 W 1 50000 kW 3 00000 kW 6 00000 kW 10 00000 kw 15 0000 225 000 W 450 000 W 900 000 W 1 50000kW 2 25000 kW 4 50000 kW 9 00000 kW 15 0000 kw Active Power Range of the Wiring Unit with 3PAW Wiring System Current Voltage Range V Range A 7 5000 15 0000 30 0000 50 0000 75 000 150 000 300 000 500 000 250 000m 5 62500 W 11 25000 W 22 5
58. 6 IMAGE SAVE oru arie ete eoe tetnds 9 10 inductance App 20 initlal settligs uuu certe een App 4 initialization 2 81 3 25 Initialize Memory Exec seeeene 8 10 Initialize Settings we 9 25 inlet holos pissis irienner siie ade heken enters 3 2 input filler onere eres 4 21 INPUT INEQZ nir rcm cen 3 33 input signal flow and process input terminal connecting to eeeeeeeeeeeee installation condition seeeeeenn installation position instantaneous value eee instrument n mber cerent rne nen eh ii INTEG T Integ Set cine une eode Integ Syon opener ree eto eet gear aa integration auto calibration T integration NOD ssf reanna naani integration mode sess integration overflow d integration reset sese integration starting of seseenee integration stop integration timer eeeeeseeeeeenene integration valid frequency range sss 5 40 internal memory initialization of 8 10 8 12 8 16 Interpolate cesses 6 18 Interval Setting sese 8 3 J Page JPEG Ree eet ae ne ee See 9 13 Index 2 IM 760301 01E K Page Key Board einen ern toner tr cerita 11 5 Key Lock 10 11 ccm
59. 7 10 IM 760301 01E 7 5 Setting the Scale Selecting the Target Trend to Be Scaled 3 Press the Trend Object soft key 4 Press the cursor keys to select a value between T1 and T16 Selecting Auto Scaling or Manual Scaling 5 Pressthe Scaling soft key to select Auto or Manual Setting the Upper Limit during Manual Scaling 6 Press the Upper Scale soft key 7 Press the cursor keys to set the upper limit Setting the Lower Limit during Manual Scaling 6 Press the Lower Scale soft key 7 Press the cursor keys to set the lower limit gure CITIES trend Scale rend object eT rend Object Trend Scale Eirrend Object T1 T1 Scaling a Scaling Manual Auto Manual d e Upper Scale ML Scaling oN qum Upper Scale 1 000E 0 1 000E 0 1 000E 02 Lower Scale Lower Scale Lower Scale 1 000E 0 1 000E 0 1 000E 02 Explanation Setting the Scale Set the upper and lower limits of the display frame when displaying the trend You can select the scaling mode from below Auto Set to auto scaling The upper and lower limits on the screen display are automatically determined from the maximum and minimum values of the trend display data Manual Set to manual scaling The upper and lower limits can be set arbitrary as necessary Setting the Upper and Lower Limits for Manual Scaling You can set the limits i
60. 758922 d BNC cable External sensor cable 758929 adapter set 366924 1 m B9284LK BB w 366925 2 m Conversion Serial port adapter adapter 758924 Spare Parts Sold Separately The spare parts below are available for purchase separately Item Model Quantity Note Part No Printer roll paper B9316FX 10 One roll is one set thermal sensitive paper total length 10 m Power fuse A1463EF 2 250 V 6 3 A time lag IM 760301 01E Safety Precautions This instrument is an IEC safety class 01 instrument provided with a terminal for protective earth grounding The general safety precautions described herein must be observed during all phases of operation If the instrument is used in a manner not specified in this manual the protection provided by the instrument may be impaired Yokogawa Electric Corporation assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements The following symbols are used on this instrument Handle with care To avoid injury death of personnel or damage to the instrument the operator must refer to the explanation in the User s Manual or Service Manual gt Electric shock danger Alternating current Both direct and alternating current ON power OFF power ON power state OFF power state p bO aAa ee Grounding IM 760301 01E Safety Precautions Be sure to observe with the precautions below Not complying might result in injury
61. 9 6 auto NAMING enne ir trino rr nine sess esse 9 8 auto naming function 8 18 9 13 auto range iiit e ener Ed En ain E EXER ERRARE ER SERRE TR 2 9 4 7 auto scallng ierit oret tn e rrr de e RODEO 7 11 average active pOWer esee 5 19 average COUFl ics eite te eco D aor 4 23 Average for the Synchronous Source Period App 31 LV M Y 4 23 averaging seerne 2 12 4 23 averaging type selection of eeesessesssss 4 23 icem P EE 4 23 AVG TYPO e 4 23 B Page bar graplia 35i edi sr ce ae ie c EE Ge FX XR EGER SEES 2 28 block diagralm ts aodio rio rei rte irr er eerta 2 2 BMP builtin printer rre 2 30 C Page o Pr aE RART 10 1 CADACHY App 20 e EE EUN 5 6 Ip E H 8 16 Clear Trend EX66G ueteri ee rere 7 14 Color nes 9 10 9 13 Comment 8 14 9 6 9 11 enini m 9 8 Config 10 5 10 7 10 11 COM NUOUS d S 5 30 5 32 continuous integration eseeeeeeeee 5 34 Convert Memory 8 14 Convert Memory Exec 8 15 COPY uccisi ice es 9 23 copy destination 9 25 Copy Exec 9 25 COPY SOUICO t etn obti ean E ERERARRR RR Asi R XR iEn 9 23 Corrected power sesssssssseseeeeeeeenne enne 2 18 5 6 corrected power equatio
62. 959 FA s 2 Y ol ITEM FORM USER ELEMENT INTEG De LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL d 1 Press INTEG to display the Integ menu 2 Pressthe Integ Set soft key to display the Integ Set menu D SHIFT Turning ON OFF the Integration Auto Calibration 2 Press the Auto Cal soft key to select ON or OFF Inter Integ Set Normal g Start Timer Setting Stop Le Reset gt perme g Auto Cal D A Output Rated Time Explanation Turning ON OFF Integration Auto Calibration Zero level compensation is normally performed when the measurement range or line filter is changed However zero level compensation can be automatically performed during integration ON Zero level compensation is automatically performed every hour while integration is in progress OFF Zero level compensation is not automatically performed while integration is in progress Note When integration auto calibration is ON and zero level compensation is in progress the power or current value measured immediately before is integrated IM 760301 01E 5 35 1ueulioJnseoe u JOMOd I 5 14 Performing Integration Start Stop and Reset Procedure ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE D MEASURING WIRING INPUT INFO 86858 RMS J MEAN J DC J RMEAN CU
63. BNC connector Common to master and slave I O level TTL Common to master and slave Output logic LJ negative logic falling edge Applies to the master Measurement start delay time 1 us 1 sample interval Output hold time Applies to the master Input logic Minimum pulse width Input delay time Low level 500 ns or more Applies to the master LJ negative logic falling edge Applies to the slave Low level 500 ns or more Applies to the slave During HOLD ON Applies to the slave 1 us 1 sample interval During HOLD OFF Within 63 ns 1 sample period Applies to the slave Note The master and slave conditions in which synchronized measurement is not possible are as follows The data update rate differs between the master and slave During real time integration mode or real time store mode Carry out the hold operation according to the procedure below during synchronized measurement Hold ON Turn the hold function ON from the WT3000 set to master Hold OFF Turn the hold function OFF from the WT3000 set to slave Output Circuit for the External Start Stop Signal and Time Chart 10 KQ z A 100 Q Start Stop A output signal Ny Measurement start 5 V 5 V V V Measurement start delay time Start Stop output signal s Output hold time IM 760301 01E 10 15 suoljoun y 48410 B 10 9 Master Slave Synchronization Measurement Input Circuit f
64. For details on the procedures see section 3 14 Press the Integ Set soft key to display the Integ Set menu Selecting Real time Normal Integration Mode R Normal or Real time Repetitive Integration Mode R Continuous Press theMode soft key to display the Mode menu Press either the R Normal or R Continuous soft key to select the integration mode 3 4 Cows c Normal Timer Setting Auto Cal prr ON g D A Output Rated Time D A Output Rated Time 5 32 IM 760301 01E 5 12 Setting the Real time Integration Mode the Integration Timer and the Reservation Time Setting the Integration Timer 5 Pressthe Timer Setting soft key to display the Timer Setting dialog box 6 Pressthe cursor keys to select the hour minute or second box 7 Press SET An entry box appears 8 Press the cursor keys to set the hour minute or second that you selected in step 6 9 Press SET or ESC to close the box 10 Repeat steps 6 to 9 to set the hour minute and second Integ Set q Mode R Normal Timer Setting f Timer Setting swQWICm Real Time Control LL Timer Settin ono Lo Q Auto Cal PFF ON i D A Output Rated Time Setting the Reservation Time 11 Press the Real Time Control soft key to display the Real Time Control dialog box 12 Press the cursor keys t
65. Function f S Q Formula Type 1 Pc Formula Frequency K Sampling Auto iu Phase 180 Lead Lag Sync Measure Measure User Defined Function f S Q Formula Type 1 Pc Formula Clock C IM 760301 01E 10 3 suonoung 19410 B 10 3 Selecting the Sampling Frequency Explanation The frequency used to acquire the sampled data to compute the measurement functions can be selected Auto The frequency is automatically switched among the three frequencies below If the input waveform is observed as a DC signal the measured value may be incorrect due to aliasing This problem can be avoided by setting the sampling frequency to Auto If you wish to fix the sampling frequency select one of the frequency settings below Clock A Samples at 183 823 kHz Clock B Samples at 189 394 kHz Clock C Samples at 195 313 kHz 10 4 IM 760301 01E 10 4 Selecting the Display Font Procedure scauna meme ave _ MOTOR FREQ SET FILTER um set measure pme source CURSOR O NUL Laen SET MENU Bogm System Overview Initialize Settings Remote Control prr Ea DISPLAY foe Cu ITEM FORM ITEM amp ELEMENT ER FU FI n USER ELEMENT SINGLE CAL INTEG Message Language E
66. HOLD OREMOTE LOCAL WPiq TIME FU FI n SINGLE CAL ITEM FORM LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER ese USER SET O AL INTEG SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Pressthe Config soft key to display the Config menu Setting Key Lock 3 Pressthe Key Lock soft key to select ON or OFF Setting Shift Lock 3 Pressthe Shift Lock soft key to select ON or OFF System Overview Remote Control Message Language ENG Menu Language Font Gothic IM 760301 01E 10 11 suonoung 19410 B 10 7 Setting the Key Lock and Shift Lock Function Explanation Key Lock If key lock is turned ON all keys except the power switch MISC key ESC key and the 5th soft key from the top are disabled When key lock is ON the word Lock is displayed at the upper right corner of the Screen Note Key lock ON OFF setting is held even when the power is turned OFF Turning the Shift Lock ON OFF You can select whether the shifted condition is released after selecting a setup menu
67. IM 760301 01E 12 13 suoleoyioeds H 12 11 General Specifications Item Specifications Warm up time Approx 30 minutes Operating conditions Temperature 5 to 40 C Humidity No condensation 20 to 80 RH when not using the printer 35 to 80 RH when using the printer Operating altitude 2000 m or less Installation location Indoors Storage environment Temperature 25 to 60 C Humidity 20 to 80 RH No condensation Rated supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC Permitted supply voltage 90 to 264 VAC range Rated supply voltage 50 60 Hz frequency Permitted supply voltage 48 to 63 Hz frequency range Maximum power consumption 150 VA when using the built in printer External dimensions See section 17 18 Approx 426 mm W x 177 mm H x 459 mm D Excludes the handle and other projections Weight Approx 14 kg main unit 4 input elements and option installed Installation position Horizontal however the stand can be used Vertical position and stacking not allowed Battery backup Setup parameters and the internal time clock are backed up with lithium batteries Fuse Location Maximum Maximum Type Standard Rated Voltage Rated Current Power supply 250 V 6 3A Time lag UL VDEcertified Safety standard Complying standard EN61010 1 Overvoltage category Installation category CAT II Measurement category CAT
68. INTEG OREMOTE ce s To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 Displayed only on models with the harmonic measurement option 1 Press SHIFT MEASURE CURSOR to display the Cursor menu Turning ON OFF Cursor Measurement 2 Press the Wave Cursor soft key to select ON or OFF If ON is selected the result of the cursor measurement is displayed M WaveC2 Trace 11 K Cursor Path Max Wave C1 F 2 0ns gt Wave C2 X 8 Oms IM 760301 01E 6 23 Aejdsiq woane M l 6 9 Cursor Measurement Selecting the Target Waveform for Cursor Measurement Selecting the Target Waveform for Cursor 3 Press the Wave C1 Trace soft key A box used to select the target waveform appears 4 Press the cursor keys to select any of the elements wiring units starting with U1 5 Press SET to confirm the new target waveform Selecting the Target Waveform for Cursor x 3 Press the Wave C2 Trace soft key A box used to select the target waveform appears 4 Press the cursor keys to select any of the elements wiring units starting with U1 5 Press SET to confirm the new target waveform Selecting the Movement Path of the Curs
69. Item M List Item 8 4 IM 760301 01E 8 2 Setting the Store Count the Store Interval and the Store Reservation Time Explanation To store data parameters such as the store mode the store count the store interval and the store reservation time must be specified before executing the operation This section explains the store count the store interval and the store reservation time For the procedure on how to set the store mode see section 8 1 for the procedure on how to start the storage operation see section 8 4 Setting the Store Count Setthe store count in the range of 1 to 999999 Ifthe data being stored exceeds the internal memory size approx 30 MB of the store destination the storage operation stops before reaching the specified store count Setting the Store Interval A time f xe integration timer see section 5 d or 5 12 to an integer Note section 8 4 Reset the reservation time in this ease p e Leap years are recognized at the time of execution ef the storage ope IM 760301 01E 8 5 eea paJ01S eui Burnes pue ejeg Burjjeoeg pue Buros Ile 8 3 Setting the Numeric Data and Waveform Display Data to Be Stored amp 4 DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT NUMERIC WAVE UILIP sans Ed HOLD Loca a e gt omens unl rmn swa CAL ITEM FORM USER eene INTEG 6m surr i LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL sd ic
70. MENU Selecting Master or Slave Mode 1 Press MEASURE to display the Measure menu 2 Press the Sync Measure soft key to select Master or Slave Only a single master and a single slave can be specified User Defined Function M S Q Formula Type 1 Pc Formula MK Sampling Frequency Auto Phase 1 d La iiis T Sync Measure l Master slave bow 9 s Performing Synchronized Measurements Connect the external start signal input output connectors between the master and slave instruments using BNC cables sold separately The slave instrument starts its measurement at approximately the same time as the start of the measurement on the master instrument The slave instrument stops its measurement at approximately the same time as the stop of the measurement on the master instrument 10 14 IM 760301 01E 10 9 Master Slave Synchronization Measurement Explanation With the master instrument outputting measurement start and stop signals and the slave instrument receiving those signals synchronized measurement on two instruments is achieved External Start Stop Signal Input Output Connector Connect the external start signal input output connectors on the rear panel between the master and slave instruments using BNC connectors sold separately and do the same for the external stop signal input output connectors MEAS START AN Item Specifications Note Connector type
71. Numeric 42 numeric data values for a single measurement function are displayed in two columns When the display format is other than Numeric 22 numeric data values for a single measurement function are displayed in two columns Dual List 1 When the display format is Numeric 22 numeric data values each for two measurement functions are displayed in each column When the display format is other than Numeric 11 numeric data values each for two measurement functions are displayed in each column 1 Displayed only on models with the harmonic measurement option For the procedure of changing the displayed items on the Single List or Dual List see chapter 7 in the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E 1ueulioJnseoe u JOMOd eo no data is displayed in places where the measurement function is not selected or where no numeric data is present fUrms Umn Udc Urmn Irms Imn Idc or Irmn exceeds 140 of the measurement range overrange OL is displayed Pshows overrange OL if the measured values of either the voltage or current exceeds 140 of the measurement range fthe measured or computed result cannot be displayed using the specified decimal position or unit overflow OF is displayed fUrms or Irms is less than or equal to 0 3 when the crest factor is set to 3 less than or equal to 0 696 if the crest factor is set to 6 or Umn Urmn Imn or Irmn is less than or equal to 2 of the measu
72. OFF the power when the access indicator or icon of the PC card is blinking Such acts can damage the PC card or destroy the data on it Procedure MOTOR FREQ SET FILTER CURSOR DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT QOREMOTE NUMERIC WAVE mes rem LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM FILE mace save t MENU print msc AVG the soft keys SYNC SOURCE O NULL STORE STORE SET 3 14 HELP MENU U I P sans UPDATE RATE HOLD WP q TIME FU FI n USER SET O AL 1 Press FILE to display the File menu 2 Press the Utility soft key The Utility menu and the File List dialog box appear 3 Press the Function soft key to display the Function menu M File Item Setup Load fe utility EK Function Copy eo All Set IE Property Filter item hr Attribute K Dest Dir SINGLE CAL LOCAL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section IM 760301 01E 9 27 9 9 Renaming Files or Directories and Creating Directories Renami
73. P 8 8 930 080393 o 8588 i 120849 2808 8080 0808 P i i i l e Joc 020 880 gl E 0080s heed o 80800980 o d o J 880 e 880 E 3880 E 880 epo 88280800 0090808 8828080 0088808 808000800980000 608000000080000 IM 760301 01E There are also inlet holes on the Inlet holes See section 3 2 bottom panel 1 2 1 2 Setup Menu Display Key and Execution Key Setting the Measurement Conditions ae VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE ALL S S COOH move auto CEH mone auro INPUT INFO WIRING Key See sections 4 1 4 2 5 7 and 5 8 Displays a menu for selecting the wiring system selecting independent setting of input elements setting the computing equation for efficiency setting the wiring compensation setting the efficiency compensation etc When the wiring compensation or efficiency compensation is enabled the COMPEN indicator illuminates SHIFT WIRING INPUT INFO Key See sections 3 16 and 4 1 Displays a list of conditions for receiving voltage current signals and acquiring the signals as data such as the wiring system of each input element wiring unit measurement range input filter scaling and synchronization source ELEMENT Key See section 4 1 and 4 2 Selects the input element for setting the measurement range The selected input element switches each time the ELEMENT key is presse
74. Select TYPE1 TYPE2 or TYPE3 TYPES is selectable only on models with the harmonic measurement option Corrected Power Correction of active power as defined by the applicable standard IEC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 and IEC76 1 1993 Phase difference display Select whether to display the phase difference using 180 lead and lag format or 360 format Delta computation Computes other numeric data of the measured circuit from the computed results of the difference of the instantaneous values Applicable only on models with the delta computation option Equation for distortion Set the denominator of factor the equation to the total waveform or fundamental waveform Applicable only on models with the harmonic measurement option Numeric Display Item Specifications Displayed items Displays the measurement functions of section 12 3 and those of the motor evaluation function delta computation and harmonic measurement options as described in the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Display resolution 600000 Number of displayed items Select from 4 8 16 ALL single list dual list Applicable only on models with the harmonic measurement option Scrolling of displayed items Displays up to nine pages of the numeric data of the measurement functions by page scrolling Display reset Resets the display order of the numeric data to default Waveform Display
75. Turning ON OFF the Scale Value and Waveform Label Explanation Turning ON OFF the Scale Value Display You can select whether or not to display ON OFF the upper and lower limits of the vertical axis and the values at the left and right ends of the horizontal axis time axis see section 6 3 of each channel ON Displays the scale values OFF Does not display the scale values Turning ON OFF the Label Display You can select whether to display waveform labels input signal names ON Displays the label name OFF Does not display the label name Upperlimit L E us Waveform label Lower limit Eff 5 54 MUERE aw Time at the right end of the screen Time at the left end of the screen 6 22 IM 760301 01E 6 9 Procedure 5 6 ofz M z z E 5 LJ scauwe merces MOTOR FREQ MEASURE sync SOURCE CURSOR ue mes store MENU STORE SET pr msc Crap MENU To display waveforms set the display mode to Wave Numeric Wave Wave Trend or Wave Bar For the setup procedure see section 6 1 Cursor Measurement DISPLAY numeri WAVE ITEM amp ELEMENT l U I P S 0 1 0 UPDATE RATE HOLD WPiq TIME FU Fl n SINGLE ITEM FORM LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER Femen USER SET O AL
76. User s Manual 1M760301 17E CD ROM 1M760301 51 IM 760301 01E iii Checking the Contents of the Package Optional Accessories Sold Separately The optional accessories below are available for purchase separately Item Model Quantity Note Part No Measurement lead 758917 1 Two leads in one set used with the separately sold 758922 or 758929 adapter length 0 75 m ratings 1000 V Safety terminal adapter set 758923 1 2 pieces in one set Rated voltage 600 V 758931 1 2 pieces in one set Rated voltage 1000 V Alligator clip adapter set 758922 1 Two pieces in one set for the 758917 measurement lead Rated voltage 300 V 758929 1 Two pieces in one set for the 758917 measurement lead Rated voltage 1000 V Fork terminal 758921 1 Two pieces in one set for the 758917 measurement lead Rated voltage 1000 V rated current 25 A adapter set BNC BNC 366924 1 42 V or less length 1 m measurement lead 366925 1 42 V or less length 2 m External sensor cable B9284LK 1 For connecting the current sensor input connector of the WT3000 length 0 5 m Conversion adapter 758924 1 BNC 4 mm socket adapter rated voltage 500 V Serial port adapter 366971 1 9 pin 25 pin adapter 1 EIA 574 Standard 2 EIA 232 Standard RS 232 Measurement lead 758917 Safety terminal adapter set 758923 kp Alligator clip adapter set Fork terminal Safety terminal adapter set 758931 aee Alligator clip adapter set
77. a different firmware ROM version of incompatible data cannot be loaded 9 16 IM 760301 01E 9 6 Specifying the File to Be Displayed Displaying File Properties and Selecting File Attributes the data Procedure on it MOTOR FREQ SET FILTER SYNC SOURCE CURSOR O NULL FILE mcEsave STORE di MENU STORE SET print msc Cre M File Item Setup 7 f Utility CAUTION Do not remove the PC card or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or icon of the PC card is blinking Such acts can damage the PC card or destroy DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT OREMOTE NUMERIC WAVE LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM U I P sans WP q TIME FU FI n USER SET O AL UPDATE RATE HOLD SINGLE CAL LOCAL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 Property Filter tel all Attribute di ii Delete Exec Press FILE to display the File menu Press the Utility soft key The Utility menu and the File List dialog box appear Pre
78. amp Trend C2 X 5 Trend Cursor Setting IM 760301 01E Aejdsig pualy Si 7 8 Cursor Measurement Turning ON OFF Cursor Measurement 3 Press the Trend Cursor soft key to select ON or OFF If ON is selected the result of the cursor measurement is displayed O SUL 3 Trend Cursor pr o jf T1 M TrendC2 Trace T EJ Trend C1 amp Trend C2 X 5 Selecting the Target Trend for Cursor Measurement Selecting the Target Trend for Cursor 4 Press the TrendC1 Trace soft key A box used to select the target trend appears 5 Press the cursor keys to select a value between T1 and T16 6 Press SET to confirm the new target trend Selecting the Target Trend for Cursor x 4 Press the TrendC2 Trace soft key A box used to select the target trend appears 5 Press the cursor keys to select a value between T1 and T16 6 Press SET to confirm the new target trend Moving the Cursors 7 Press the Trend C1 Trend C2 x soft key to set the cursor target to Trend C1 Trend C2 x or both Trend C1 and Trend C2 x f you select Trend C1 the position of cursor can be moved f you select Trend C2 x the position of cursor x can be moved f you select both Trend C1 and Trend C2 x the two cursors can be moved without changing the spacing between the two The value of the digit being specified by Trend C1 changes 8 Press the cursor keys to move the
79. and setting the level at that point as the zero level Zero level compensation must be performed in order to satisfy the specifications of this instrument see chapter 12 Zero level compensation is automatically performed when the measurement range or input filter is changed However if the measurement range and input filter are not changed over an extended time the zero level may change due to the changes in the environment surrounding the instrument In such cases you can manually perform zero level compensation There is also a function that automatically performs zero level compensation during integration NULL Function For procedures see section 10 2 When the NULL function is turned ON the Udc and Idc numeric data of the simple average of the voltage and current during normal measurement are set as NULL values The NULL values are subtracted from the sampled data of voltage and current Hence all measurement functions are affected by the NULL values IM 760301 01E 2 31 uondiosog jeuonouneJ Hu 2 9 Saving and Loading Data and Other Functions Selecting the Sampling Frequency For procedures see section 10 3 The WT3000 has three types of sampling frequencies at approximately 200 kHz to prevent the input waveform from being measured as a DC signal due to aliasing see section 2 7 The sampling frequency can be automatically switched or fixed to one of three types Setting the Display Font For procedures see s
80. and negative ampere hours q positive current hour consumed q negative current hour returned to the power supply WS volt ampere hour WQ var hour Time integration time 111 to n4 efficiency F1 to F20 user defined functions AF1 to F4 delta computation option Speed rotating speed Torque Pm motor output mechanical power SyncSp synchronous speed Slip and the measurement functions of harmonic measurement for details see chapter 7 in the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Displayed on models with the motor version Example The True Rms Value of the Voltage of Element 1 Urmst1 p Element 1 True rms value Voltage Simple Average of the Current of the Elements Combined by Wiring Unit ZA IdczcA pa X function of wiring unit XA Simple average Current Selecting the Display Mode Select the display format of the numeric data from below no data is displayed in places where the measurement function is not selected or where no numeric data is present Displaying the Numeric Data on the Entire Screen Press the NUMERIC key to display the numeric data on the entire screen Displaying Numeric Data by Dividing the Display into Halves Split Display Numeric Wave The numeric data and waveform are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For details on setting the waveform display see section 4 2 and chapter 9 e Numeric4 Trend The numeric data and trend
81. available two three phase three wire systems can be set up elements 1 and 2 and elements 3 and 4 The assignment of elements to the input terminals in the figure varies depending on the number of installed input elements For details see Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems in section 2 3 Measurement Conditions I LOAD n ji R SOURCE O R XU U s uy T SOURCE LOAD T S 2 5 zl Wiring Example of Three Phase Three Wire Three Voltage Three Current System 3P3W 3V3A Input terminal 1 Input terminal 2 If four input elements are available one three phase three wire system three voltage three current system can be set up elements 1 2 and 3 or elements 2 3 and 4 The assignment of elements to the input terminals in the figure varies depending on the number of installed input elements For details see Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems in section 2 3 Measurement Conditions g SOURCE LOAD z in SOURCE o3 O LOAD OFS De H Input terminal 1 Input terminal2 Input terminal 3 Wiring Example of a Three Phase Four Wire System 3P4W If four input elements are available one three phase four wire system can be set up elements 1 2 and 3 or elements 2 3 and 4 The assignment of elements to the input terminals in the fig
82. can be achieved by setting the crest factor to 3 IM 760301 01E 4 17 suonipuo 1ueuianseo y BH 4 7 Setting the Measurement Period Procedure To exit the menu during pem VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE operation press ESC aL A In the procedural explanation below the located above the soft A Ca ro MEASURING m MEASURING phrase press the cursor G Ce JGH MODE AUTO MODE AUTO keys may be used This INPUT INFO phrase refers to the procedures for selecting DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT items and entering values a ow and character strings For numeri wave uu sane vs HOLD ca details on the procedures lt gt see section 3 14 WP q 4 d FU FI n SINGLE CAL ITEM FORM USER een INTEG I LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL A FRI MOTOR EQ SET FILTER LE CURSOR 1 Press SYNC SOURCE to display the Sync Src menu Selecting the Target Element 2 Press ELEMENT to select the target element The selected element is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen if you selected element 1 Sync Src1 are displayed To select all elements press SHIFT ELEMENT ALL Setting the Synchronization Source 3 Press the Item Up Exec or Item Down Exec soft key to set th
83. computing the average by filtering the data of several periods The WT3000 automatically selects the computing method from the two averaging computations above according to the data update interval When the Data Update Rate Is 50 ms 100 ms 5 s 10 s or 20s Computation is performed using ASSP Average for the Synchronous Source Period on the sampled data within the data update interval to calculate the measured value However integrated power Wp as well as integrated current q during DC mode are excluded This method detects the period of the input signal assigned to be the synchronous source using the frequency measurement circuit and sets the measurement period to be an integer multiple of the input signal period Computation including simple average is performed based on the sampled data in this measurement period This method requires that the period of the assigned synchronous source signal be detected accurately Check to see that the frequency of the synchronous source signal is being measured correctly according to the procedures given in sections 5 1 and 5 3 Fora description of the synchronous source see appendix 6 Setting the Measurement Period When the Data Update Rate Is 250 ms 500 ms 1s or 2 s Computation is performed using EAMP Exponential Average for Measuring Period on the sampled data within the data update interval to calculate the measured value The EAMP method sets the measurement period to be the enti
84. connected to the current input terminal Because the current sensor input terminal and the current input terminal are connected internally connecting both terminals simultaneously not only results in measurement errors but also may cause damage to the instrument In addition when the voltage of the circuit under measurement is being applied to the current sensor input terminal do not touch the current input terminals Since these terminals are electrically connected inside the instrument this act is dangerous Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems The selectable wiring systems vary depending on the number of input elements that are installed in the instrument You may be able to select only a single wiring system or two wiring systems For details see Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems in section 2 3 Measurement Conditions IM 760301 01E 3 10 Wiring the Circuit under Measurement When Using the Current Sensor Note After wiring the wiring system must be selected See section 4 1 Selecting the Wiring System The thick lines on the wiring diagrams are the sections where the current flows Use appropriate wires that are suitable for the current To measure the apparent power and power factor more accurately on an unbalanced three phase circuit it is recommended that a three phase three wire system three voltage three current system 3P3W 3V3A be used to make the measuremen
85. current is 0 Average power P zUI 2x ot When the phase difference between voltage and current is Average power P Ulcos Negative power Average power P Ulcos a 0 The positive and negative powers are the same App 17 xipueddy Appendix 4 Power Basics Power Harmonics and RLC of AC Circuits Active Power and Power Factor In alternating electrical current not all of the power calculated by the product of voltage and current Ul is consumed The product Ul is called apparent power S The unit is VA volt ampere The apparent power is used to express the electrical capacity of a device that runs on AC electricity The true power that a device consumes is called active power P or effective power and this corresponds to the aforementioned AC power S UI VA P Ulcoso W coso indicates the ratio of the apparent power that becomes the true power and this is called power factor A Reactive Power If current lags voltage U by 6 current can be broken down into a component in the same direction as voltage U Icos and a perpendicular component Ising Active power P Ulcos is the product of voltage U and current component Icos On the contrary the product of voltage U and current component Ising is called the reactive power Q and the unit is var Q Ulsino var gt C Below is the relationship between the apparent power S active power P and reactive
86. cursor Cursor Cursor Cursor Trend Cursor Trend Cursor Trend Cursor D BF o BU o l M TrendC1 Traca T1 j set I1 T2 Tset T1 3 T3 T4 TrendC1 Trace M TrendC1 Traci T1 M TrendC2 Traci T2 T T8 9 Trend c1 T11 T12 Trend c2 X 5 amp Trend C1 S Trend C1 gt Trend C2 X gt Trend C2 X 5 5 7 16 IM 760301 01E 7 8 Cursor Measurement Explanation ON OFF A cursor can be placed on the displayed trend to measure and display the value at any point It can be used to measure the data on the vertical axis Y axis and horizontal axis X axis of various sections of the trend ON Performs cursor measurement OFF Does not perform cursor measurement Item under Measurement Select the target trend for the cursor measurement from T1 to T16 Moving the Cursor Cursors move on the selected trend Specify the number of points from the left end of the screen to move the cursor with the left and right ends of the screen assumed to be point 0 and 1001 respectively The cursors moves along the data points displayed on the screen one point at a time Measurement Item Y Vertical value of cursor Y axis value Yx Vertical value of cursor x Y axis value AY The difference between the Y axis values of cursor and cursor x e X X axis value of cursor from the left end of the screen Indicates th
87. during Harmonic Measurement Item Specifications Frequency range 10 Hz to 440 Hz Input waveform 50 duty ratio rectangular wave When Used as a Trigger Item Specifications Minimum pulse width 1 us Trigger delay time Within 1 us 1 sample interval 12 8 Storage PC Card Interface Item Specifications Number of slots 1 Type TYPE II flash ATA card 12 12 IM 760301 01E 12 9 GP IB Interface Item Specifications Devices That Can Be Used NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS AT GPIB PCI GPIB and PCI GPIB PCMCIA GPIB and PCMCIA GPIB Driver NI 488 2M Ver 1 60 or later Electrical and mechanical Conforms to IEEE St d 488 1978 JIS C 1901 1987 specifications Functional specifications SH1 AH1 T6 L4 SR1 RL1 PPO DC1 DT1 and CO Protocol Conforms to IEEE St d 488 2 1987 Code used ISO ASCII code Address 0 to 30 Clear remote mode Remote mode can be cleared by pressing LOCAL except during Local Lockout For details on the specifications of the GP IB interface see the Communication Interface User s Manual IM760301 17E 12 10 Safety Terminal Adapter Item Specifications Maximum allowable current 36 A Withstand voltage 1000 V CAT III Contact resistance 10 mQ or less Contact section Nickel plating on brass or bronze Insulator Polyamide Core wire Maximum diameter 1 8 mm Insulation thickness Maximum diameter 3 9 mm
88. error occurs while deleting multiple files the files after the error occurrence are not deleted The number of directories and files that can be displayed in the file list is 2500 If the number of directories and files in a directory exceeds 2500 the file list randomly displays 2500 of the directories and files Files that do not have an archive attribute are not displayed in the File List window Do not remove the archive attribute of the files saved by the WT3000 using your PC Up to 42 characters can be displayed in the path If the path exceeds 42 characters is displayed at the end of the character string 9 22 IM 760301 01E 9 8 Copying Files CAUTION Do not remove the PC card or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or icon of the PC card is blinking Such acts can damage the PC card or destroy the data on it Procedure 4 a C amp Y AVG DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT OREMOTE NUMERIC WAVE es ITEM FORM U I P sans WP q USER ELEMENT UPDATE RATE HOLD SINGLE CAL INTEG LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL LOCAL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above scanna line FER FILTER WOTOR FREQ the soft keys SET FILTER hamser weasure mcs in the procedural e
89. f you change the extension of the file such as on a PC the file can no longer be loaded Files that do not have an archive attribute are not displayed in the File List window Do not remove the archive attribute of the files saved by the WT3000 using your PC Up to 42 characters can be displayed in the path If the path exceeds 42 characters is displayed at the end of the character string File names are not case sensitive Comments are case sensitive In addition the following names cannot be used due to limitations of MS DOS AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK COM1 to COM9 and LPT1 to LPT9 IM 760301 01E 9 13 9 5 Loading Setup Parameters CAUTION Do not remove the PC card or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or icon of the PC card is blinking Such acts can damage the PC card or destroy the data on it Procedure a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT 4 vend WAVE U 1 P sono mE ro Loca Cursor keys C CAL v ITEM FORM USER genere INTEG sur z LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL Y To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above pron E the soft keys hamser measure prne source In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the CURSOR O NULL cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values a
90. harmonic measurement Ifthe trend display target is changed all past trend displays are cleared and the trend display starts from the right end IM 760301 01E 7 7 Aejdsig pualy f 7 4 Setting the Time Axis Procedure ELEMENT To exit the menu during VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE Ersson operation press ESC SENSOR RATIO m m m m zZ MEASURING OO located above the soft OO A CA o In the procedural Cw Cw explanation below the MEASURING phrase press the cursor qo INPUT INFO WIRING AMS uean X oc ues MODE AUTO MODE AUTO keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting a Oo c o o x o lt a v 0 9 items and entering values DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT and character strings For OREMOTE a Si on ho procedures see section 3 14 CAL ITEM FORM _user ELEMENT INTEG sHirr LOWER ITEM OWER FORM USER SET O AL To display trends set the display mode to Trend Numeric Trend Wave Trend or Bar Trend For the setup procedure see section 7 1 Displayed only on models with the harmonic measurement option 1 Press FORM to display the Trend Form menu If the trend display is at the lower section of the screen on the split display press SHIFT FORM LOWER FORM 2 Press the cursor keys to set
91. keyboard and press SET The string is confirmed and the keyboard disappears At the same time the equation is temporarily stored in the internal memory When the equation is not correct and an error message is displayed it is still stored in the memory Upto five equations can be stored After five equations have been stored a new equation overwrites the oldest equation Recalling the Temporarily Stored Equation Select 1 on the keyboard and press SET A window opens and the temporarily stored equation is displayed Select the equation you wish to recall and press SET The selected equation appears in the entry box on the keyboard If there are characters already in the entry box they are overwritten with the recalled equation Correct the recalled equation according to steps 1 to 4 in Entering the equation and temporary storage described above and enter it At this point the equation is temporarily stored in the internal memory The temporary memory is cleared when the power is turned OFF The window displaying the equation that is stored in the memory PACE UCET ORT m INSERT zI3 4 s Ie 7 T8 3 Te 55 p eT z QADAH pem papp Pre pec ee per mper IRMSCE1 IRMSCET IRMS E2 IRMSCE2 RMS E3 DECIR I Select this key to display the window on the right 3 28 IM 760301 01E 3 14 Entering Values and Character Strings Entering the Unit
92. measured power For details see appendix 8 Note If the current input is an external sensor input EXT and the wiring compensation is U I wiring wiring compensation is not performed This is because the instrumental loss of the current measurement is unknown If the current input is an external sensor input EXT efficiency compensation is not performed This is because the instrumental loss of the current measurement is unknown 5 24 IM 760301 01E 5 9 Setting the Equations for Apparent Power Reactive Power and Corrected Power Procedure 4 Cursor keys gt e scauwe meme ave MR FREQ LN RSR NULL mue mese rore MENU STORE SET pr msc Cre MENU DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT m numeri WAVE U LIP s a i HOLD toca WPa TIME FU FI n SINGLE CAL mem FORM USER ELement INTEG sHiFT LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 1 Press MEASURE to display the Measure menu Select
93. measurement circuit is connected to the load side The current measurement circuit measures the sum of current i flowing through the load of the circuit under measurement and the current iy flowing through the voltage measurement circuit Because the current flowing through the circuit under measurement is i iv is the amount of error The input resistance of the voltage measurement circuit of the instrument is approximately 10 MQ If the input is 1000 V iv is approximately 0 1 mA 1000 V 10 MQ If the load current ii is 1 A or more load resistance is 1 kQ or less then the effect of iv on the measurement is 0 01 or less If the input is 100 V and 1 A iv 0 01 mA 100 V 10 MQ then the effect of iv on the measurement accuracy is 0 001 0 01 mA 1 A SOURCE SOURCE d LOAD o gt FG 7 i iL Input terminal IL ELEMENT WT3000 As a reference the relationship of the voltages and currents that produce effects of 0 01 0 001 and 0 0001 are shown in the figure below 0 01 Effect 0 001 Effect 1000 P idm x li 800 600 400 Smaller effect 200 4 0001 Effect 0 A eBeyo0A paunseory Measured current A When the Measurement Current Is Relatively Small Wire so that the current measurement circuit is connected to the load side In this case the voltage measurement circuit measures the sum of the load
94. medium that was selected in step 5 is displayed Function copy Rename MakeDir Format Attribute ess Exec Executing OK Aborting Cancel the Format Operation 7 Press the Format soft key to display the Format menu Format File Name File List PC Card 128352256 128192512 M Function Format g Media Info g Format 8 Press the Format Exec soft key An Alert dialog box appears 9 Press the cursor keys to select OK or Cancel 10 Select OK and press SET to execute the format operation Select Cancel and press SET to abort the initialization Format M Function Format Media Info i Format Format File Name File List Size Space PC Card 128352256 1281353600 m M Function Format Media Info OK Real ly lert AII data in selected device will be erased Do you want to execute LFormat Format Exec IM 760301 01E 9 2 Formatting the PC Card Explanation Storage Medium Information Lists the information about the selected storage medium Media Name Storage medium name Media Size Total size Used Space Size of the used area Vacant Space Size of the free area Partition Size Number of partitions Formatting the PC Card Format the PC card to FAT format N
95. nearest YOKOGAWA dealer IM 760301 01E 11 4 Checking the System Condition a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT RUE J m T numeri WAVE U UP S 0 mm HOLD LOCAL Ea FU FI n SINGLE CAL v ITEM FORM USER even INTEG LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL ry Y Scaune neren NG To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above MO TOR FREQ the soft keys SET FILTER In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the OE ODE cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and FILE imace save STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 print _wisc_ Her MENU 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Press the System Overview soft key to display the System Overview window System Overview Model wr3000 760304 04 Mv Motor Version j Version 1 01 DSP 1 1 1 1 481C 2 3 1 1 D eee ree ae Initialize lt lt lt lt Element Configuration gt gt gt gt Settings Type Calibration Date Element1 1000v 30A 2004 12 03 12 52 32 Element2 1000v 30A 2004 12 03 12 52 46 Remote Element3 1000v 30A 2004712703 12 53 02 Control Element4 1000v 30A 2004 12 03 12 53 18 Motor 20v 20v 2004712703 12 53 34 92928285
96. of rasters and P P compression see section 2 7 IM 760301 01E 7 9 ejdsig pualy E 7 5 Setting the Scale Procedure To exit the menu during ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE operation press ESC eO located above the soft eo A CA revs In the procedural ME Cw Cw explanation below the MEASURING MEASURING phrase press the cursor WIRING RMS MEAN De RMEAN AUTO MODE AUTO keys may be used This wan Mone mone oe procedures for selecting items and entering values DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Orewore and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 ss CAL _user ELEMENT INTEG USER SET O AL FORM LOWER FORM To display trends set the display mode to Trend Numeric Trend Wave Trend or Bar Trend For the setup procedure see section 7 1 Displayed only on models with the harmonic measurement option 1 Press ITEM to display the Trend Items menu If the trend display is at the lower section of the screen on the split display press SHIFT ITEM LOWER ITEM 2 Pressthe Trend Scale soft key to display the Trend Scale menu Trend Scale eT rend Object Trend Items K Trend Display T1 Scaling Trend Items Reti d Manual m 6 Upper Scale Trend Scale 1 000E 0 B Lower Scale gt 1 000E 0 K Frequency Meas Item
97. of the WT3000 operation For a description of each item see the relevant section or chapter In addition to the sections and chapters that are referenced in the figure below this manual also contains safety precautions for handling the instrument and performing wiring work Keep them in mind and make sure to observe them Operation of Operation of Basic Functions Expansion Functions mm Describes the flow of operation of the basic For the operation of expansion mm functions of the instrument from measurement functions see the Expansion EE preparation to measurement execution display Function User s Manual EE of measured results and data acquisition 1M760301 51E Use the expansion functions as necessary for your application Measurement Preparation Install the instrument b Section 3 2 Connect the power supply and Sections 3 3 and 3 4 turning ON OFF the power switch 4 Select the measurement method gt Section 3 8 Wire the circuit under b Sections 3 9 to 3 11 measurement Connect the wires after reading and understanding thoroughly the precautions given in sections 3 5 and 3 7 As necessary assemble the input terminal adapter see section 3 6 that is to be connected to the voltage input terminal in advance Set the measurement conditions Chapter 4 Display the Measured Calculated Results Harmonic measurement gt bar graph gt Sections 5 1 to 5 10 Harmonic measurement
98. on the horizontal axis X axis ON Performs cursor measurement OFF Does not perform cursor measurement tem under Measurement Select the target waveform for the cursor measurement from below The selectable items vary depending on the installed elements U1 11 U2 I2 U3 I3 U4 I4 Speed and Torque Applicable only to products with the motor evaluation function motor version Measured items e Y Vertical value of cursor Y axis value e Yx Vertical value of cursor x Y axis value AY The difference between the Y axis values of cursor and cursor x e X X axis value of cursor from the left end of the screen e Xx X axis value of cursor x from the left end of the screen AX The difference between the X axis values of cursor and cursor x 1 AX Reciprocal of the difference between the X axis values of cursor and cursor X Movement Path of the Cursor Since the WT3000 P P compresses the sampled data see section 2 7 two data points maximum and minimum values are displayed at the same time axis position This specifies where the cursor is to move Max Moves along the maximum values on the time axis and measures the value at each point Min Moves along the minimum values on the time axis and measures the value at each point Mid Moves along the middle of the maximum and minimum values on the time axis and measures the value at each point Moving the Cursor Cursors move on the selec
99. screen on the split display press SHIFT ITEM LOWER ITEM 2 Press the Wave Display soft key to display the Wave Display dialog box Wave Displa Wave Display 6 all on all OFF ul 11 V Zoom amp u2 12 Position u3 13 u4 14 Speed Torque g Frequency Meas Item Aejdsiq u0JoAeA Hu IM 760301 01E 6 3 6 2 Selecting the Waveform to Be Displayed Explanation Turning ON OFF the Display the Input Signal Waveforms Collectively Displaying the Waveforms Collectively 3 Press the cursor keys to select All ON 4 Press SET All the buttons to the left of the input signal are highlighted and all the waveforms are displayed Hiding the Waveforms Collectively 3 Pressthe cursor keys to select All OFF 4 Press SET The highlighting of all the buttons to the left of the signal is cleared and the waveforms are no longer displayed Turning ON OFF the Input Signal Waveforms One at a Time 3 Press the cursor keys to select the input signal you wish to set 4 Press SET The button to the left of the selected input signal is highlighted and the corresponding waveform is displayed If the highlighting of the button is cleared the waveform of that input signal is no longer displayed Only the input signals corresponding to the installed elements are displayed The waveform display can be turned ON OFF for those input signals For models with the motor evaluation function motor version the waveform d
100. soft oro CA Ca keys In the procedural is Cw explanation below the MEASURING MEASURING phrase press the cursor vens Auro COED move AUTO keys may be used This INPUT INFO phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 Aejdsig pualy E IM 760301 01E 7 1 Trend Display Explanation A display example is shown below The horizontal axis is expressed in terms of time as shown below Displayed trend target measurement function upper limit Displayed trend target measurement function lower limit The trend value in the hold condition see section 4 11 is the same as the numeric data when HOLD is pressed When hold is released the trend that was held is displayed YOKOGAWA 4 Trend For TT vet 15 4 M Format Single Trend T7div 30s div Clear Trend Exec Ti wet 103 8 100 00 00 lt e 1002 pe gt gt 00 05 00 Time at the right end of the screen Time at the left end of the screen time span of the screen fixed too s Number of data points displayed in the range from the left to the right end of the screen When P P is displayed trend is displayed using P P compression see sections 2 7 and 2 8 Selecting the Display Mode Select the trend display format from the choices below Displaying the trend on the entire screen Press the Trend soft ke
101. ssesesseees 9 27 10 1 Zero Level Compensation esssssseeeneeeneennenneee nennen nennen nnns 10 1 1022 NULLE FUNCION essing a aaa iea aA 10 2 10 3 Selecting the Sampling Frequency eccceceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeesseeseaeeseeeeeaeeseeeeeeeteaeeeaeereas 10 3 10 4 Selecting the Display Font 00 0 cecceeceseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeseeseaeeeeeesaeeseeeeeeeenaeeeneeteas 10 5 10 5 Selecting the Screen Brightness sssssssseeeeeeeneee nennen 10 7 10 6 Setting the Display Color sessssseeeeeeneeneennnen nennen nennen enne 10 8 10 7 Setting the Key Lock and Shift Lock Function esee 10 11 10 8 Help FUNCION c ESEE 10 13 10 9 Master Slave Synchronization Measurement sse 10 14 Troubleshooting Maintenance and Inspection tit TDro bleshootlng notre Eton ee tete pied atte 11 1 11 2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions ssssssseseeenenenenenenenne 11 2 EESTI M 11 5 11 4 Checking the System Condition ssseeeneneenenennen nennen 11 7 11 5 Replacing the Power Fuse ccessceeescceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseaeeeseeaeeeeeaeeseeeeeetesenenenteneass 11 8 11 6 Recommended Replacement Parts esssseeeneeneen nennen 11 9 12 1 np t Sectioh ic emere sade pe cp teed geass eua EE ERE Ce Ee deed hates 12 1 1227 DIsplay Ee Bets ede ea aes wed ee es 12 2 12 3 Measurement Fun
102. supply rer rne terit rnt riens 3 4 power switch turning ON OFF of eee 3 5 Preset1 TERRIER 8 7 unprs 2 30 ca rccse 9 18 Property 8 15 9 18 protective grounding eese 3 4 R Continuous RNO issiria cinia eoa kk va cra Fo LE ha Ceo AR RR FERAE ERR ERR ATA rack mount EE E rated supply voltage eene rated supply voltage frequency reactive DOWSer eeeseeeeeeeeneeeennennnen nennen reactive power equation for sseeeseeeeeeee Real Time a Reali Time Control cocco teneret tie eei rra eterne real time integration mode eese real time normal integration mode aes real time repetitive integration mode 5 32 joar panal cesteciccestecsnscsdasteasdchstesbocadstseasccadseasssasds iaetesscaeaac as 1 1 Recall recall rectified mean value sssssssesirssrrriesrrsrreresrrusenss 5 9 App 1 rectified mean value calibrated to the fms value iere nire ttn App 1 IM 760301 01E Index 3 Index rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value 5 9 RENAME 1 teet tte e Crede coo re eee 9 28 repetitive integration mode ssssse 5 30 5 31 reservation time eessssssssesseseeeeeeneen enne Reset Items Exec resistance rir
103. tes e werd EE ie siad ds ene utn e a ieee pe ems O ei G 34 D 2 Input terminal 1 Input terminal 2 Wiring Example of a Three Phase Three Wire System Three Voltage Three Current System 3P3W 3V3A Using VT and CT R SOURCE LOAD S T rA A l f rA F rA a p Loo Lod ICT i IN JN BUDE i i e O i I 088 1 O Ol 1 O Ovi 1 P 1 O Ovi 0 Ol 1 O qui Eel es ecl ds s per x aped E zl E i n ca 0 4 G 4 34 D zt I 2 NT Input terminal 1 Input terminal 2 Input terminal 3 Wiring Example of a Three Phase Four Wire System 3P4W Using VT and CT SOURCE LOAD zion 0 O D O QD His d O O Input terminal 1 Input terminal 2 Input terminal 3 Note For the relationship between the wiring systems and the method of determining the measured values or computed values see Appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions 3 22 IM 760301 01E 3 12 Setting the Date Time Procedure ITEM amp ELEMENT OneuoTE eye n ca ursor Keys gt l LE FU FI n SINGLE CAL DE v e ITEM FORM USER even INTEG d v LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL To exit the menu du
104. the amplitude on the rising slope or falling slope within the data update period and the last point where the synchronization source crosses the level zero point center of the amplitude on the rising slope or falling slope within the update period If there is one or no zero crossing in the data update interval the measurement period is set equal to the data update interval For details see appendix 6 Data update interval Data update interval Data update intervalData update interval a Measurement period x Measurement period Measurement period A When the data update rate is 250 ms 500 ms 1s or2s The measurement period is equal to the data update interval Nolg e e a M The measurement period for the numeric data of the maximum value Peak for voltage and current is the entire span within the data update period regardless of the settings above Therefore the measurement period for the measurement functions U pk U pk pk I pk CfU Cfl FfU and Ffl that are determined from the maximum value of the voltage and current is also the entire span within the data update period The measured value may fluctuate or may not be correct if the synchronization source is not Set correctly Refer to appendix 6 when setting the synchronization source 4 20 IM 760301 01E 4 8 Procedure A o v P Y
105. the frequency measurement add on option the fU and fl of all elements can be measured simultaneously Maximum voltage U pk V The maximum u n for every data update interval Minimum voltage U pk V Maximum current I pk A The minimum u n for every data update interval The maximum i n for every data update interval Minimum current I pk A The minimum i n for every data update interval Voltage crest factor CfU z ZUpK Current crest factor Cfl Ip Urms Irms Voltage crest factor CfU Upk IU pkl or IU pkl whichever is greater Ipk Il pkl or II pkl whichever is greater Current crest factor Cfl Displays when the voltage mode Displays when the current mode is not RMS is not RMS IEC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 IEC76 1 1993 P 2 Corrected Power Pc W P1 P2 p 4 Umn Urms Umn Umn Coefficients defined in the applicable standard Displays when the voltage mode is not RMS or MEAN Continues to the next page IM 760301 01E App 1 xipueddy Appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions Table 2 2 Measurement Functions Method of Determination Equation during Normal For details on the symbols in th ti the Not App 3 Measurement or details on the symbols in the equation see the Note on page App 3 Integration time Time f
106. the integration operation The data update rate cannot be changed while the integration is in progress Ifthe integration is stopped while the display is held the display and communication output values do not change from the held values When the hold function is released OFF or a single measurement by pressing SINGLE is made the integration result at the point when integration is stopped is displayed or output via communications ON HOLD SINGLE Single measurement T 1 ae f Display value Dotted line is the integration value Integration time i START STOP RESET Sample Rate and Valid Frequency Range for Integration The sample rate is approximately 200 kHz The voltage current signal frequencies that are valid for the integration are as follows Integrated Item Valid Frequency Range for Integration Active power DC to 100 kHz Current When integrating Irms DC lower limit of frequency determined by the data update rate to 100 kHz When integrating Imn DC lower limit of frequency determined by the data update rate to 100 kHz When integrating Idc DC to 100 kHz When integrating Irmn DC lower limit of frequency determined by the data update rate to 100 kHz 5 40 IM 760301 01E 5 14 Performing Integration Start Stop and Reset Display Resolution The maximum display resolution of the integration value is 999999 When the integrated value re
107. the medium X Press the cursor keys to select the save destination directory indicated by lt 2 4 gt S 10 ess SET to confirm the directory O 4 e selected storage medium directory is displayed in Path located above and 4 to the left of the File List dialog box GY Ox select gt and press SELECT to return to a higher level directory et pert Henory File List E EN Q K Path SC4 008UTIGO0DA File List L Space 2138112000 byte eca File Name Size Date Attributi 4 f Store to 4 IFDO 1 i File Mane I3C4 001 File Name lehgry File ty Q SC4 61 INDO 1 4 gt 2001 08 24 06 27 RW Store etting Convert Property Memory Initialize Menory Exec Con Q Menory Exec Q Convert 2x Memory Exec Setting the File Name and C ment Le 11 Press the File Name soft k y The Qv iaf Yox ope 12 Press the cursor keys to selectAuto N amp priag o5 13 Press SET to select ON or OFF C O 14 Press the cursor keys to select File Name Q PF 15 Press SET A keyboard appears i e 16 Use the keyboard to set the file name Q For keyboard operations see section 3 14 Entering Values and vA 17 Enterthe Comment in a similar fashion 18 Press ESC to close the Save dialog box convert Henuru convert Memory O M d Save File Nane Fil T futo Naming File Name Comment deo
108. the procedural lanation below the exp MEASURING MEASURING phrase press the cursor wee RIS itean C oc ues MODE AUTO MODE AUTO keys may be used This INPUT INFO phrase refers to the procedures for selecting A DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT gase TER eas valos and character strings For A numeri WAVE U 1 P s a ale E HOLD toca details on the procedures see section 3 14 gt Wd run SINGLE CAL v ITEM l FORM USER ELEMENT INTEG SHIFT i Y LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL 1 Press UPDATE RATE to display the Update Rate menu 2 Press the Update Rate Up Exec or Update Rate Down Exec soft key to change the data update rate The specified data update rate is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen Pressing the Update Rate Up Exec soft key increases data update rate Pressing the Update Rate Down Exec soft key decreases data update rate H Update Rate Down Exec 4 26 IM 760301 01E 4 10 Selecting the Data Update Rate Explanation For details see section 2 3 The data update rate defines the interval by which the data is sampled for determining the measurement functions Excluding the cases when the screen is set to the displays listed below this interval is used pass the numeric data to the D A output and communication output a
109. the soft keys corresponding to the displayed element to select the Element 2 Element 3 Element 4 6 12 IM 760301 01E 6 5 Zooming Vertically and Moving the Vertical Position Zooming in on the Voltage Waveform 5 Press the U V Zoom soft key 6 Press the cursor keys to set the zoom rate Moving the Voltage Waveform Position 5 Pressthe U Position soft key 6 Ifthe crest factor is set to 3 or 6 press the cursor keys to set the position in terms of a percentage with the value equal to measurement range x 3 or measurement range x 6 respectively taken to be 10096 Zooming in on the Current Waveform 5 Pressthe I V Zoom soft key 6 Press the cursor keys to set the zoom rate Moving the Current Waveform Position 5 Pressthe I Position soft key 6 Ifthe crest factor is set to 3 or 6 press the cursor keys to set the position in terms of a percentage with the value equal to measurement range x 3 or measurement range x 6 respectively taken to be 10096 V Zoom amp Pos Element Element 1 EU v zoom U Position 0 00 7 IM 760301 01E ejdsig u0JoAeA Hu 6 5 Zooming Vertically and Moving the Vertical Position Explanation Selecting the Target Element to Be Specified Only the installed elements are displayed The Element menu is displayed according to the element configuration of the product Zoom Vertical Direction Only You can expand
110. the storage medium are cleared when the storage medium is formatted Be sure to back up important data beforehand DISPLAY numeri WAVE ITEM amp ELEMENT U I P seno UPDATE RATE HOLD WPIg TIME l FU Fl n SINGLE ITEM FORM LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER Eeen USER SET O AL CAL INTEG OREMOTE zy co To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 Function f Delete T Delete Set Reset 4 Property Filter ted an Attribute 5 Exec Press FILE to display the File menu Press the Utility soft key The Utility menu and the File List dialog box appear Press the Function soft key to display the Function menu 9 2 IM 760301 01E 9 2 Formatting the PC Card Selecting the Storage Medium to Be Formatted 4 Press the Format soft key A storage media list is displayed in the File List dialog box 5 Press the cursor keys to select the storage medium to be formatted Viewing the Storage Media Information 6 Press the Media Info soft key The information about the storage
111. to BMP in step 3 and the color mode is set to Color Reverse or Gray in step 4 5 Press the Compression Color soft key to select ON or OFF For BMP Image Save Image Save Image Save m Format K Format M Format TIFF TIFF BHP WE colorc Ed color i BNP Color OFF Compression FF ON gt Comment Post Script Comment PNG T a File List JPEG File List 4 4 File Nate File Nate File Name IM 760301 01E 9 4 Saving the Screen Image Data Setting Comments 6 Press the Comment soft key A keyboard appears 7 Use the keyboard to enter the comment For keyboard operations see section 3 14 Entering Values and Strings M Format TIFF i Comment p File List LJ File Name Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory Image Save CAPS Bs EDDEEE 8 Pressthe File List soft key to display the File List dialog box 9 Same as the procedures given in Selecting the Storage Medium and Selecting the Save Destination Directory in section 9 3 10 Press ESC to close the File List dialog box Image Save File List Path PC Card Space 0 hyte File Name Size Date Attribute ja Format IPC card 1 TIFF Coler OFF x Comment v File Name g File List a
112. turned ON the synchronization source of each input element in the X wiring unit can be set independently Data update interval Measurement period e gt Synchronization source Input signal U1 Input signal U2 Input signal U3 gt Synchronization source setup example Input element 1 Input element 2 U1 or I1 Input element 3 IM 760301 01E App 27 xipueddy Appendix 6 Setting the Measurement Period Setting the Synchronization Period When Measuring the Efficiency of a Power Conversion Device Power Transformer with Single Phase Input and Single Phase Output If a device that converts single phase AC power to single phase DC power is measured with input elements 1 and 2 set the synchronization source of input elements 1 and 2 to the voltage or current on the AC power end In the example shown in the figure below set the synchronization source of input element 1 and 2 to U1 or I1 In effect the measurement periods of input element 1 input end and input element 2 output end match and the power conversion efficiency of the device can be measured more accurately Input AC power U1 and l1 Output DC power U2 and 12 Power transformer Synchronization source setup example Input element 1 U1 or I1 Input element 2 Likewise if a device that converts single phase DC power to single phase AC power is measure
113. update rate of the WT3000 to 250 ms 500 ms 1 s or 2 s Because the measured value is computed from the Exponential Average for Measuring Period method described on the next page the period of the input signal does not need to be detected Note The measurement period for the numeric data of the maximum value Peak for voltage and current is the entire span within the data update period regardless of the measurement period specified above Therefore the measurement period for the measurement functions U pk U pk I pk I pk CfU and Cfl that are determined from the maximum value of the voltage and current is also the entire span within the data update period The measurement period of measurement functions of harmonic measurement is from the beginning of the data update interval to 9000 points at the harmonic sampling frequency regardless of the measurement period specified above IM 760301 01E App 29 xipueddy Appendix 6 Setting the Measurement Period When the Data Update Rate Is Set to 250 ms 500 ms 1s or 2 s The measurement period is set equal to the data update interval The measured values are determined by computing the average of all the sampled data in the data update interval through digital filtering This computing method is called Exponential Average for Measuring Period EAMP In this method the measurement period is not affected by the input signal period or the synchronization source setting Therefore t
114. waveforms are displayed In this mode the sampled data is automatically updated for each interval In this case the trigger function for waveform display does not work Therefore the start position of the waveform display the signal level at the left end of the screen may not be stable In addition the measurement period of the numeric data and that of the waveform data may not be synchronized 6 2 IM 760301 01E 6 2 Selecting the Waveform to Be Displayed Procedure To exit the menu during ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE operation press ESC eO located above the soft C A CA res In the procedural ME explanation below the MEASURING MEASURING phrase press the cursor wang AUTO Gae H move AUTO keys may be used This INPUT INFO phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Orewore and character strings For details on the procedures Dp E CAI L USER ELEMENT INTEG USER SET O ALL r o 9 gt r FORM SHIFT OWER FORM To display waveforms set the display mode to Wave Numeric Wave Wave Trend or Wave Bar For the setup procedure see section 6 1 Displayed only on models with the harmonic measurement option 1 Press ITEM to display the Wave Items menu If the waveform display is at the lower section of the
115. when it is wired to the input terminal the conductive parts bare wires do not protrude from the terminal Also make sure to fasten the input terminal screws securely so that the cable does not come loose Use cables with safety terminals that cover the conductive parts for connecting to the voltage input terminals Using a terminal with bare conductive parts such as a banana plug is dangerous if the terminal comes loose Use cables with safety terminals that cover the conductive parts for connecting to the current sensor input terminals Using a terminal with bare conductive parts is dangerous if the terminal comes loose When the voltage of the circuit under measurement is being applied to the current input terminals do not touch the current sensor input terminals Since these terminals are electrically connected inside the instrument this act is dangerous When connecting measurement cables from an external current sensor to the current sensor input connector remove the cables connected to the current input terminals In addition when the voltage of the circuit under measurement is being applied to the current sensor input terminal do not touch the current input terminals Since these terminals are electrically connected inside the instrument this act is dangerous When using the external voltage transformer VT or current transformer CT make sure it has enough withstand voltage with respect to the voltage U being measured 2U 10
116. windows in order from T1 through T16 Display Interpolation Graticule and Label Display For procedures see sections 6 6 and 6 7 The settings specified for waveform display are used Bar Graph Display of Harmonic Data See the Expansion Function User s Manual 1M760301 51E On models with the harmonic measurement option the amplitude of each harmonic can be displayed on the bar graph The horizontal axis represents harmonic order and the vertical axis represents the amplitude of each harmonic Vector Display of Harmonics See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E During harmonic measurement on models with the harmonic measurement option vectors can be displayed to show the relationship between the phase difference and amplitude rms value of the fundamental signals U 1 and I 1 of each element that is assigned to the selected wiring unit 2 28 IM 760301 01E 2 9 Saving and Loading Data and Other Functions Storing and Recalling For procedures see chapter 8 The numeric data and waveform display data can be stored in the internal memory The data is stored at the data update rate or a specified time interval to the internal memory Data stored to the internal memory can be saved on a PC card The data that is saved to the PC card cannot be recalled This function cannot be used on the current version of the WT3000 The information given here may change in the future Saving and Loading from
117. you select a file and press the All Set soft key asterisk marks are placed by the directory containing the selected file and all the files in the directory f you select a directory and press the All Set soft key asterisk marks are placed by the selected directory and all the files in the directory f you select a storage medium and press the All Set soft key asterisk marks are placed by all the directories and files in the selected storage medium Note You cannot copy files if files with the same file name exist at the copy destination You cannot copy the same files to another directory after copying the files Select the files to be copied again and copy them If an error occurs while copying multiple files the files after the error occurrence are not copied The number of directories and files that can be displayed in the file list is 2500 If the number of directories and files in a directory exceeds 2500 the file list randomly displays 2500 of the directories and files Files that do not have an archive attribute are not displayed in the File List window Do not remove the archive attribute of the files saved by the WT3000 using your PC Up to 42 characters can be displayed in the path If the path exceeds 42 characters is displayed at the end of the character string 9 26 IM 760301 01E 9 9 Directories Renaming Files or Directories and Creating CAUTION Do not remove the PC card or turn
118. 0 2 of range 100 kHz lt f lt 500 kHz 0 009 x f of reading 0 5 of range 500 kHz lt f lt 1 MHz 0 022 x f 7 of reading 1 of range The unit of f in the read error equation is KHz Add 3 of range reference value to the above accuracy figure for the accuracy of the waveform display data Upk and Ipk However for external sensor input add 3 of range 5 mV reference value The effective input range is within 300 of the range within 600 of the range if the crest factor is set to 6 For temperature changes after zero level compensation or range change add 50 ppm of range C to the DC accuracy of the voltage For temperature changes after zero level compensation or range change add 0 2mA C to the DC accuracy of the current For temperature changes after zero level compensation or range change on the external current sensor input add 0 02 mV C to the DC accuracy of the external current sensor input For self generated heat caused by current input on an AC input signal add 0 00002 x I 96 of reading to the current accuracy For self generated heat caused by current input on an DC input signal add 0 00002 x I of reading 0 003 x I mA to the current accuracy is the current reading A The influence from self generated heat continues until the temperature of the shunt resistor inside the WT3000 lowers even if the current input changes to a small value When the data update interval is 50 ms
119. 0 W 0 75000 kW 1 50000 kW 3 00000 kW 5 00000 kW 10 0000 150 000 W 300 000 W 600 000 W 1 00000 kW 1 50000 kW 3 00000 kW 6 00000 kW 10 0000 kW 20 0000 300 000 W 600 000 W 1 20000 kW 2 00000 kW 3 00000 kW 6 00000 kW 12 0000 kW 20 0000 kW 30 0000 450 000 W 0 90000 kW 1 80000 kW 3 00000 kW 4 50000 kW 9 0000 kW 18 0000 kW 30 0000 kW Active Power Range of the Wiring Unit with 1P3W 3P3W or 3P3W 3V3A Wiring System Current Voltage Range V Range A 15 0000 30 0000 60 0000 100 000 150 000 300 000 600 000 1000 00 500 000m 15 0000 W 30 0000 W 60 0000 W 100 0000 W 150 000 W 300 000 W 600 000 W 1000 000 W 1 00000 30 0000 W 60 0000 W 120 0000 W 200 000 W 300 000 W 600 000 W 1200 000 W 2 00000 kW 2 00000 60 0000 W 120 0000 W 240 000 W 400 000 W 600 000 W 1200 000 W 2 40000 kW 4 00000 kw 5 00000 150 000 W 300 000 W 600 000 W 1000 000 W 1 50000 kW 3 00000 kW 6 00000 kW 10 00000 kw 10 0000 300 000 W 600 000 W 1200 000 W 2 00000 kW 3 00000 kW 6 00000 kW 12 00000 kW 20 0000 kw 20 0000 600 000 W 1200 000 W 2 40000 kW 4 00000 kW 6 00000 kW 12 00000 kW 24 0000 kW 40 0000 kW 30 0000 900 000 W 1 80000 kW 3 60000 kW 6 00000 kW 9 00000 kW 18 0000 kW 36 0000 kW 60 0000 kw Active Power Range of the Wiring Unit with 3P4W Wiring System irent Voltage Range V Voltage Range V Range A 15 0000 30 0000 60 0000 100 000 150 000 300 000 600 000 1000 00 500 000m 22 5000 W 45 0
120. 00 V recommended Also make sure that the secondary side of the CT does not become an open circuit while the power is being applied If this happens high voltage will appear at the secondary side of the CT making it extremely dangerous When using an external current sensor make sure to use a sensor that comes in a case The conductive parts and the case should be insulated and the sensor should have enough withstand voltage with respect to the voltage being measured Using a bare sensor is dangerous because you might accidentally come in contact with it When using a shunt type current sensor as an external current sensor turn OFF the circuit under measurement Connecting or removing a sensor while the power is ON is dangerous When using a clamp type current sensor as an external current sensor have a good understanding of the voltage of the circuit under measurement and the specifications and handling of the clamp type sensor Then confirm that there are no shock hazards For safety reasons when using the instrument on a rack mount furnish a switch for turning OFF the circuit under measurement from the front side of the rack After connecting the measurement cable attach the current input protection cover using the screws provided for your safety Make sure that the conductive parts are not exposed from the protection cover IM 760301 01E sjuswainseayy Bunes e40Jog BH 3 5 Wiring Precautions AN To make the protective funct
121. 000 W 90 0000 W 150 0000 W 225 000 W 450 000 W 900 000 W 1500 000 W 1 00000 45 0000 W 90 0000 W 180 0000 W 300 000 W 450 000 W 900 000 W 1800 000 W 3 00000 kw 2 00000 90 0000 W 180 0000 W 360 000 W 600 000 W 900 000 W 1800 000 W 3 60000 kW 6 00000 kw 5 00000 225 000 W 450 000 W 900 000 W 1500 000 W 2 25000 kW 4 50000 kW 9 00000 kW 15 00000 kw 10 0000 450 000 W 900 000 W 1800 000 W 3 00000 kW 4 50000 kW 9 00000 kW 18 00000 kW 30 0000 kw 20 0000 900 000 W 1800 000 W 3 60000 kW 6 00000 kW 9 00000 kW 18 00000 kW 36 0000 kW 60 0000 kw 30 0000 1350 000 W 2 70000 kW 5 40000 kW 9 00000 kW 13 50000 kW 27 0000 kW 54 0000 kW 90 0000 kW IM 760301 01E 4 9 o o o c o 3 o 23 Oo o 2 a o 2 o 4 3 Setting the Measurement Range for Direct Input When the crest factor is set to 6 Active Power Range of Each Element Voltage Range V Current Range A 7 5000 15 0000 30 0000 50 0000 75 000 150 000 300 000 500 000 250 000m 1 87500W 3 75000 W 7 5000W 12 5000W 18 7500W 37 5000W 75 000W 125 000W 500 000m 3 75000 W 7 5000 W 15 0000W 25 0000W 37 5000 W 75 000 W 150 000W 250 000 W 1 00000 7 5000 W 15 0000W 30 0000W 50 0000 W 75 000 W 150 000W 300 000W 500 000 W 2 50000 18 7500 W 37
122. 0000E gt O m sec 4 E 2001 06 30 amp 07 03 03 U4 l4 1002 1002 1 0000000E 00 1 0000000E 00 IM 760301 01E App 11 Appendix 3 ASCII Header File Format VOffset VDataType VUnit VPlusOverData VMinusOverData s BlockSize VResolution VOffset VDataType VUnit VPlusOverData VMinusOverData VillegalData VMaxData VMinData HResolution HOffset HUnit Date Time Privatelnfo Mode ModelVersion Note The header file is a common file used by YOKOGAWA s measuring instr that is not required by the WT3000 0s is also included 0 0000000E 00 FS4 V 3 000000e 03 3 000000e 03 2 0000000E 05 0 0000000E 00 sec 2001 06 30 3 000000e 03 3 000000e 03 2 0000000E 05 0 0000000E 00 sec 2001 08 30 07 03 03 Wave Normal 1 01 0 0000000E 00 FS4 A 1 500000e 01 1 500000e 01 2 0000000E 05 0 0000000E 00 sec 2001 06 30 07 03 03 sec 2001 08 30 07 03 03 0 0000000E 00 FS4 V 3 000000e 03 3 000000e 03 2 0000000E 05 0 0000000E 00 sec 2001 06 30 07 03 03 U6 1002 1 0000000E 00 0 0000000E 00 FS4 ents wrt Na 0 0000000E 00 FS4 A 1 500000e 01 1 500000e 01 2 0000000E 05 0 0000000E 00 sec 2001 06 30 07 03 03 l6 1002 1 0000000E 00 0 0000000E 00 FS4 A 1 500000e 02 1 500000e 02 2 0000000E 05 0 0000000E 00 Sec 2001 08 30 03 03 E IM 760301 01E Appendix
123. 000W 37 5000W 56 2500W 112 5000W 225 000W 375 000 W 500 000m 11 25000 W 22 5000 W 45 0000W 75 0000W 112 5000 W 225 000W 450 000W 750 000 W 1 00000 22 5000 W 45 0000W 90 0000 W 150 0000W 225 000W 450 000W 900 000 W 1500 000 W 2 50000 56 2500 W 112 5000 W 225 000W 375 000W 562 500W 1125 000W 2 25000 kW 3 75000 kW 5 00000 112 5000 W 225 000W 450 000W 750 000 W 1125 000 W 2 25000 kW 4 50000 kW 7 50000 kw 10 0000 225 000 W 450 000W 900 000 W 1500 000 W 2 25000 kW 4 50000 kW 9 00000 kW 15 00000 kw 15 0000 337 500 W 675 000 W 1350 000 W 2 25000 kW 3 37500 kW 6 75000 kW 13 50000 kW 22 5000 kw 4 10 IM 760301 01E 4 4 Setting the Measurement Range When Using the External Current Sensor Procedure ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE To exit the menu during operation press ESC SENSOR RATIO CURRENT RANGE located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the MEASURING phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the MEASURING EKRE DISPLAY procedures for selecting items and entering values Owmwr and character strings For ITEM amp ELEMENT numeric WAVE OTHERS ITEM details on the procedures see section 3 14 U I P S Q A 9 WP q TIME rue FORM USER ELEMENT UPDA
124. 10 B IM 760301 01E 10 1 10 2 NULL Function Procedure a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT pee 4 UPDATE Cursor keys Ee SAEI RT RATE Fo Loca WPi lt gt TIME FU FI n SINGLE CAL l ITEM Form USER evewenr INTEG sarr m LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL a Y Scatna ine FILTER NG To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above WOTOR FREQ the soft keys SET FILTER ow In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the s cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and FILE mace save STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 print msc Cre MENU Activating the NULL Function 1 Press SHIFT SYNC SOURCE NULL The NULL indicator to the lower left of the key illuminates when the NULL function operates and the measured values are updated Clearing the NULL Function 2 Press SHIFT SYNC SOURCE NULL when the NULL function is activated The NULL indicator turns OFF and the NULL function is released Explanation The NULL function can be used to subtract the DC offset while the external sensor or measurement cable is connected Execute
125. 2nf and f is the frequency of the sinusoidal alternating current The thermal action of this alternating current is proportional to i and varies as shown in the figure below The phenomenon in which electric energy is converted to heat energy due to the current flowing through the resistor i Imsinot The rms value effective vale is the DC value that generates the same thermal action as the alternating current If we denote the DC value of the same thermal action as we get a2 I y The average ofi over one cycle Because this value corresponds to the root mean square of the instantaneous values over 1 period normally the effective value is denoted using the abbreviation rms App 14 IM 760301 01E Appendix 4 Power Basics Power Harmonics and RLC of AC Circuits In the case of the mean value simply taking the average over 1 period of the sine wave results in zero Therefore the average is taken over 1 period of absolute values As with the rms value if we denote the average value of the current of instantaneous values i Imsinwt as Imn we obtain 2n 1 2 Imn i The average of i over one cycle lildot Im 0 These relationships also apply to a sinusoidal voltage The maximum value rms value and average value of a sinusoidal alternating current are related as shown below Crest factor and form factor are used to define the tendency of the AC waveform Maximum value
126. 3 ASCII Header File Format e PublicInfo Common Information FormatVersion Header file version No common to YOKOGAWA s header files Model Model name Endian Endian mode when saving data Big DataFormat Storage format of the binary waveform display data Trace GroupNumber The number of Group s indicated below TraceTotalNumber Total number of target waveforms DataOffset Start position of the binary waveform display data e Group1 Group Information TraceNumber Number of waveforms in this group BlockNumber Number of blocks in this group TraceName Name of each waveform BlockSize Number of data points in a single block of each waveform HBl soluiiont each waveform 7 HOffset Value of coe cde axis sonversion equation of each waveform ModelVersiont Version No of the instrument 1 Endian mode when saving data Big Motorola 68000 family data 2 Storage format of the binary waveform display data Trace Format in which each block contains a waveform 3 Start position of the binary waveform display data Offset from the beginning of the file Always 4096 on the WT3000 4 Maximum number of blocks in the group Maximum number of blocks when the number of blocks varies for each waveform ays 1 on the WT3000 5 Y axis conversion equation for each waveform Y axis value VResolution x raw data VOffset 6 Data type ISn n byte signed integer IUn n byte unsigned integer FSn n byte signed
127. 32 64 128 and 256 Measurement Functions of Harmonic Measurement When averaging is turned ON averaging is performed on the measurement functions of harmonic measurement when exponential averaging above is specified If averaging is set to moving average averaging is performed only on the measurement functions of normal measurement and not the measurement functions of harmonic measurement 2 12 IM 760301 01E 2 3 Measurement Conditions Data Update Interval For the procedure see section 4 10 This is the interval by which the data is sampled for determining the measurement functions You can elect the value from 50 ms 100 ms 250 ms 500 ms 1 s 2 s 5 s 10 s and 20 s The numeric data is updated at the selected interval You can increase the data update rate to acquire relatively fast load fluctuations in the power system or decrease the rate to acquire sampling data for several periods even for relatively long synchronization signals AC signals are waveforms that repetitively fluctuate when viewed instantaneously The power of AC signals can be measured by computing the average at intervals corresponding to the repeating period or computing the average by filtering the data of several periods The WT3000 automatically selects the computing method from the two averaging computations above according to the data update rate When the Data Update Rate Is 50 ms 100 ms 5 s 10 s or 20s Computation is performed using A
128. 6 Selecting the Copy Source Files One at a Time 9 10 Press the cursor keys to select the file Press the Set Reset soft key If an asterisk is displayed to the left of the file name in the File List dialog box the file will be copied If the asterisk to the left of the file name disappears the file will not be copied Proceed to step 12 Copy File List M Function Path PC_Card pct Space 123592704 byte Copy File Name Size pate Attribute i IPc card Set Reset lt 2004 05 21 17 46 27309 2004 05 21 17 53 R AIT Set Property E Filter Item Ai Attribute K Dest Dir Selecting the Copy Source Files at Once 9 10 11 M Function File List M Function Path PC_CardNpc1 Copy Space 123389952 byte Copy File Name Size Date Attribute Press the cursor keys to select a file directory or storage medium Press the All Set soft key Asterisks appear to the left of the directory containing the selected file and all the files in the directory the selected directory and all the files in the directory or all the directories and files in the selected storage medium The corresponding items will be copied At the same time the All Set soft key changes to the All Reset soft key Press the All Reset soft key Asterisks to the left of the directory containing the selected file and all the files in the directory the se
129. 6 7 5 V 15 V 30 V 50 V 75 V 150 V 300 V and 500 V Current Direct input When the crest factor is set to 3 500 mA 1 A 2 A 5 A 10 A 20 A and 30A When the crest factor is set to 6 250 mA 500 mA 1A 2 5 A 5 A 10 A and 15A External sensor input When the crest factor is set to 3 50 mV 100 mV 200 mV 500 mV 1 V 2V 5 V and 10 V When the crest factor is set to 6 25 mV 50 mV 100 mV 250 mV 500 mV 1 V 2 5 V and5 V Input impedance Voltage Input resistance Approx 10 MQ input capacitance Approx 5 pF Current e Direct input Approx 5 5 mQ approx 0 03 uH External sensor input Input resistance Approx 1 MO input capacitance Approx 40 pF Instantaneous maximum Voltage allowable input Peak value of 2500 V or RMS value of 1500 V whichever is less 1s or less Current Direct input Peak value of 150 A or RMS value of 50 A whichever is less External sensor input Peak value less than or equal to 10 times the measurement range Continuous maximum Voltage allowable input Peak value of 1600 V or RMS value of 1100 V whichever is less Current Direct input Peak value of 90 A or RMS value of 33 A whichever is less External sensor input Peak value less than or equal to 5 times the measurement range Continuous maximum 1000 Vrms common mode voltage 50 60 Hz Influence from common When 1000 Vrms is applied with the voltage input terminals shorted and current input terminals open
130. Asterisks appear to the left of the directory containing the selected file and all the files in the directory the selected directory and all the files in the directory or all the directories and files in the selected storage medium The corresponding items will be deleted At the same time the All Set key changes to the All Reset soft key Press the All Reset soft key Asterisks to the left of the directory containing the selected file and all the files in the directory the selected directory and all the files in the directory or all the directories and files in the selected storage medium disappear The corresponding items will not be deleted At the same time the All Reset soft key changes to the All Set soft key a Set Reset IPc card 1 Set Reset gt 2004 05 21 17 46 0001 27309 2004 05 21 17 33 R 0000 27309 2004 05721 17 50 R All Set All Reset Q4 M Attribute Attribute HE Delete Exec Delete Exec HE 9 21 9 7 Deleting Files Explanation Executing the Delete Operation 12 Press the Delete Exec soft key All files with asterisk marks are deleted Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory Same as the explanation given in Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory in section 9 3 Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box Same as the explanation given in Spec
131. C21 2004705722 02 37 0003 2004 05 22 00 54 PC21 0000 2004 05722 00 53 CAPS m INSERT i12 aq5 Te SI 0 WEEE er K eo Tera BIC ToTETETe TH TTM iJ Property EE ABAC FA C EA E ES Ci CH TS EA Ed FA A Pr ESTE ETSISTZTSETOD Te Dol Filter F Item All Item Attribute At CIBIEIBIEIG m z 5 IM 760301 01E 9 29 9 9 Renaming Files or Directories and Creating Directories Explanation Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory Same as the explanation given in Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory in section 9 3 Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box Same as the explanation given in Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box in section 9 6 Properties Same as the explanation given in Properties in section 9 6 Selecting the File Attribute Same as the explanation given in Selecting the File Attribute in section 9 6 Renaming a Directory or File The method for setting the name when renaming a directory or file is the same as the explanation given in File Name and Comment in section 9 3 Creating Directories You can create a new directory on the storage medium The method for setting the name when creating a directory is the same as the explanation given in File Name and Comment in section 9 3 Note You cannot change a directory attribute Ifa file with the same na
132. Cac NULL To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys LINE FILTER FREQ FILTER MEASURE SYNC SOURCE In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the ad cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and FILE IMAGE SAVE STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 pr msc me MENU 1 Press SCALING to display the Scaling menu Turning ON OFF the Scaling Function 2 Press the Scaling soft key to select ON or OFF The SCALING key illuminates when ON is selected Setting the VT Ratio 3 Press the Scaling Item soft key to select VT Selecting the Target Element 4 Press one of the soft keys corresponding to the displayed element to select the target element 5 Press the cursor keys to set the VT ratio 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set the VT ratio for all elements Element 2 1 0009 Element 3 1 0009 Element 4 1 0000 4 14 IM 760301 01E 4 5 Setting the Scaling Function When Using VT CT Setting the CT Ratio 3 Pressthe Scaling Item soft key to select CT Selecting the Target Element 4 Press one of the soft keys correspo
133. Crest factor crest factor Ane value Rms value Form factor form factor erges IM 760301 01E App 15 xipueddy Appendix 4 Power Basics Power Harmonics and RLC of AC Circuits Vector Display of Alternating Current In general the instantaneous value of voltage and current is expressed with the following equations Voltage u Umsinat Current i Imsin at The time offset between the voltage and current is called a phase difference and is called a phase angle This time difference is mainly caused by the load to which the power is supplied In general the phase difference is zero when the load consists of only resistance If the load consists of inductance coiled object the current lags the voltage If the load consists of capacitance the current leads the voltage When the current lags the voltage When the current leads the voltage Vector display is used to easily convey the size and phase relationships between the voltage and current The upward direction on the vertical axis is the reference and a positive phase angle is represented by an angle in the counterclockwise direction Normally a dot is placed above the symbol representing the quantity when explicitly indicating that it is a vector The size of the vector represents the rms value When the current lags the voltage When the current leads the voltage 0 ba ES Below is a vector representation of the relationship between a t
134. D screen is very vulnerable and can be easily scratched do not allow any sharp objects near it Also do not apply vibration or shock to it Unplug during Extended Non Use Turn OFF the power to the circuit under measurement and the instrument and remove the power cord from the outlet Carry the Instrument Properly First turn OFF the circuit under measurement and remove the measurement cables Then turn OFF the instrument and remove power and other cables When moving the instrument hold the handle on each side of the instrument as shown below When Wiping off Dirt When cleaning the case or the operation panel first turn OFF the circuit under measurement and the instrument and remove the instrument s power cord from the outlet Do not use volatile chemicals since this might cause discoloring and deformation IM 760301 01E sjueuienseojy Bunes o40Jog BH 3 2 Installing the Instrument Installation Conditions Install the instrument indoors that meets the following conditions Storage Location Flat Even Surface If the instrument is not installed on a stable horizontal surface the printer s recording quality may degrade and precise measurements may be impeded Well Ventilated Location Inlet Vent holes are located on the top and bottom of the instrument To prevent internal overheating allow at least 20 mm of space around the inlet and vent holes When connecting measurement wires and other various cables or when openin
135. ENT INTEG OWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL r o 9 gt r Cp SHIFT To display trends set the display mode to Trend Numeric Trend Wave Trend or Bar Trend For the setup procedure see section 7 1 Displayed only on models with the harmonic measurement option 1 Press ITEM to display the Trend Items menu If the trend display is at the lower section of the screen on the split display press SHIFT ITEM LOWER ITEM 2 Pressthe Trend Display soft key to display the Trend Display dialog box Aejdsig pualy E reni ems Trend Displa Trend Display 5 A11 on S all OFF ert er r3 ra grs gre Trend Items Trend Scale e r ires T9 9r 0 9 T11 9 r12 113 114 3 T15 9 116 i Frequency Meas Item IM 760301 01E 7 2 Selecting the Trend Data to Be Displayed Turning ON OFF the Trend Display Collectively Displaying the Trends Collectively 3 Press the cursor keys to select All ON 4 Press SET All the buttons to the left of the trend symbols are highlighted and all the trend are displayed Hiding the Trends Collectively 3 Press the cursor keys to select All OFF 4 Press SET The highlighting of all the buttons to the left of the trend symbols is cleared and the trends are no longer displayed Turning ON OFF the Trend One at a Time 3 Press the cursor keys to select the trend symbol you wish to set 4 Press
136. EQ the soft keys SET FILTER HRM SET MEASURE siicsouRce CURSOR NULL ue maes store MENU STORE SET 3 14 pr usc Crap Numeric Display 1 Press NUMERIC to display numeric values e Waveform Display 1 Press WAVE to display the waveforms USER Een USER SET O AL Trend Bar Graph Vector and Split Displays 1 Press OTHERS to display the Others menu 2 Select the display using the soft key Others Others Wave Bar Trend Wave Trend Bar Trend Vector ad Numeric Wave Numer ic Bar AECL Numeric Trend Next Next 17 N 27 IN CAL INTEG OREMOTE LOCAL SHIFT sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 el To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section IM 760301 01E 3 31 3 15 Switching the Display Explanation The display can be selected on the WT3000 Display Types Normal measurement mode Without the harmonic With the harmonic measurement option measurement option Power measurement U rms1 1 06 1 83 y numeric display SURE 566 992 mA For the operating procedure see chapter 5 55 8659 w 2
137. ET 27309 byte RAW 2004705721 17 53 BHE These functions cannot be used on the current version of the WT3000 that you are Delete M Function Delete Set Reset All Set Property Item BIT Attribute Delete Exec 10 Press the cursor keys to select the file 11 Press the Attribute soft key The attribute of the selected file changes to R or Delete File List M Function Path PC_Card pct Space 124030976 byte Delete File Name Size Date Attribute LE Ipc card 1 gt 0001 27309 2004705721 17 53 R 0000 27309 2004 05721 17 50 R 2004705721 17 46 Set Reset All Set EE d Property Filter Em Attribute E Delete Exec 9 18 IM 760301 01E 9 6 Specifying the File to Be Displayed Displaying File Properties and Selecting File Attributes Explanation Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory Same as the explanation given in Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory in section 9 3 Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box You can specify the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box Item The list of files corresponding to the file type Setup Wave or Numeric that is specified for File Item in the File menu in the selected directory is displayed All The list of all the files in the selected directory is displayed
138. ET the order of the displayed items are not reset Element Z Tert id Really Element 1 Numeric Items will be initialized Do you want to execute Reset Items Exec i Frequency Meas Item Explanation A display example is shown below Displayed when the The color changes from green to red when the input signal level exceeds displayed item can be approx three or six times the specified measurement range when the changed using the crest factor is set to 3 or 6 respectively The first and second lines function select key correspond to voltage and current respectively The conditions of the The item to be input signals of elements 1 to 4 are displayed in order from the left changed is highlighted Displayed only on models with the motor evaluation function motor version The color changes from green to red when the analog revolution torque signal level exceeds approx 150 of the specified measurement range For pulse revolution signal the color changes from green to red when approx 5 V is exceeded The first and second lines correspond to the conditions of rotating Speed and torque respectively oo Normal Mode Uover een Spdi ul 1000Vrms YoKocnwa 4 Mitchie 5 0 0o a e feet Page bar a PAGE _ Element1 1 c S 4 uw 1000vrms The current page is highlighted 2 Urms1 0 10639 w 5 q m If page scrolling is possible g Irm
139. F the power when the access indicator or icon of the PC card is blinking Such acts can damage the PC card or destroy the data on it a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT es AM NUMERIC WAVE U I P sans peo HOLD LOCAL 4 OTHERS Wed rur SINGLE C ic quss v ITEM FORM USER evemenr INTEG m sur i kd Y LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL j we 1 To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above Mon E the soft keys hamser wes mcs in the procedural explanation below the phrase press the fee ee cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and face save Y STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORESET 3 14 MENU 1 Press SHIFT IMAGE SAVE MENU to display the Image Save menu Selecting the Data Format 2 Press the Format soft key to display the Format menu 3 Press any soft key from TIFF BMP Post Script PNG and JPEG to select the data format Selecting the Color Mode Selectable only when the data format is set to TIFF BMP PNG or JPEG in step 3 4 Press the cursor keys to select Color Reverse white background Gray grayscale or OFF Turning ON OFF the Data Compression Selectable only when the data format is set
140. FFFE The number of directories and files that can be displayed in the file list is 2500 If the number of directories and files in a directory exceeds 2500 the file list randomly displays 2500 of the directories and files If you change the extension of the file such as on a PC the file can no longer be loaded Files that do not have an archive attribute are not displayed in the File List window Do not ove the archive attribute of the files saved by the WT3000 using your PC Up te 42 characters can be displayed in the path If the path exceeds 42 characters is IM 760301 01E 8 19 eea paJ01S eui Burnes pue ejeg Burjjeoeg pue Bunos Ile 8 6 Recalling the Stored Data Procedure a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Did A NUMERIC WAVE U LIP sene uo HOLD Loca 4 gt onens Weil ruin swave v ITEM FORM USER esee INTEG 6m Puer LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys s na mere ave Emso In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the g om cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14
141. HIFT SYNC SOURCE NULL Key See section 10 2 When the SHIFT SYNC SOURCE NULL key is pressed and the NULL indicator illuminates the NULL function which subtracts the DC component of the measurement circuit from the sampled data is activated Pressing the SHIFT SYNC SOURCE NULL key again turns OFF the NULL indicator and the NULL function is deactivated MISC Key See section 3 12 3 13 3 17 4 6 10 4 to 10 7 11 3 and 11 4 For details on the D A output RS 232 communication and Ethernet communication see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Displays a menu for setting the date time initializing setup parameters selecting the message language selecting the menu language selecting the crest factor selecting the display font selecting the display brightness setting the display color setting key lock and shift lock setting the self test function checking the system status setting the D A output option setting the remote control function through the communication protocol of GP IB RS 232 option Ethernet option using communication commands setting the Ethernet communication LAN function option etc HELP key See section 10 8 Displays a help window that provides information about the setup menu that is displayed LOCAL Key See the Communication Interface User s Manual IM760301 17E CD ROM Switches the WT3000 from remote mode REMOTE indicator illuminated to local mode enable front panel key ope
142. II Pollution degree 24 12 14 IM 760301 01E 12 11 General Specifica tions Item Specifications Emission Complying standard EN61326 Class A EN61000 3 2 EN61000 3 3 AS NZS CISPR 11 This product is a Class A for commercial environment product Operation of this product in a residential area may cause radio interference in which case the user is required to correct the interference Cable condition External sensor input terminal Use the B9284LK External Sensor Cable e EXT CLK MEAS START TORQUE motor version SPEED motor version terminal Use a BNC cable GP IB interface connector Use a shielded GP IB cable RS 232 interface option connector Use a shielded RS 232 cable D A OUTPUT option connector Use a shielded cable 5 RGB VIDEO OUT option connector Use a 15 pin D sub shielded VGA cable Devices that are easily affected by noise may be affected by the conducted interference generated from the cables used for measurements that are connected to the WT3000 In such case the user is required to correct the interference Immunity Complying standard EN61326 Annex A Influence in the immunity environment Signal input Within 20 of range within 40 of range if the crest factor is set to D A output Within 20 of FS when FS 5V Cable condition Same as the cable condition for emission above 6 1 Applies to products with CE marks For all other products contact y
143. ISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Onenote A fumer WAVE U I P suns um HOLD LOCAL 4 gt oTHeRs Wd Fun smaue mE CAL GE ITEM FORM USER ELEMENT INTEG SHIFT amp 0 amp ec Em ese e c Scatna ine FER NG To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above WOTOR FREQ the soft keys SET FILTER al In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the 2 cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and FILE mace save STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 print msc HELP MENU 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Pressthe Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu System Overview Initialize Settings Remote Control Date Time Setting the Graphic Color Selecting Default or User 3 Press the Graph Color soft key to display the Graph Color menu 4 Press the cursor keys to select Default or User R h LTS Jd Mode i Graph Color Default User Color K D A Output Items 10 8 IM 760301 01E 10 6 Setting the Display Color Setting User Colors Press the User Color soft key to display the Graph Color dialog box
144. MEASURING MEASURING phrase press the cursor vens mone auro MODE om UE INPUT INFO a o c o o x o lt a v ID Explanation eO procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 DISPLAY ITEM LOWER ITEM ITEM amp ELEMENT USER USER SET QOREMOTE ie 00 toca ss CAL INTEG FORM LOWER FORM ELEMENT O AL Eq Holding the Numeric Data Display 1 Press HOLD The HOLD key illuminates and the numeric data display is held Performing a Single Measurement 2 Press SINGLE The measurement is performed once and the instrument enters the hold condition Releasing the Hold Operation 3 Press HOLD while the values are held The HOLD key turns OFF and the numeric data display is updated Hold This function aborts the measurement and display operations that are performed at the data update rate and holds the data display of various functions The D A output the numeric data list that the built in printer prints the communication output and other values are set to the held numeric data Single Measurement While in the hold condition the measurement is performed once at the specified data update rate and enters the hold condition If you press the SINGLE key when not in hold condition measurement is restarted from that point Note F
145. NG Menu Language Crest Factor LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL OREMOTE LOCAL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 Press MISC to display the Misc menu Press the Config soft key to display the Config menu Press the Font soft key to display the Font menu Press the Gothic or Roman soft key to select the display font Config Message Language ENG Menu Language Key Lock EARS ON PFF ON Shift Lock Shift Lock ON PFF ON Crest Factor CF6 EF3 cr IM 760301 01E 10 5 suonoung 19410 10 4 Selecting the Display Font Explanation The font used to display characters and numbers can be selected Gothic A font with constant line width Roman A font in which the vertical lines are thicker than horizontal lines with emphasis at the beginning and end of the stroke Note Both the Gothic and Roman fonts used on the WT3000 are original fonts designed by YOKOGAWA Therefore the details of each font may differ from that of other devices 10 6 IM 760301 01E 10 5 Selecting the Screen Brightness Procedure Explanation
146. NT U I P S 0 1 0 UPDATE RATE HOLD OREMOTE LOCAL WPiq TIME FU Fl n SINGLE CAL ITEM FORM LOWERITEM LOWER FORM USER ELEMENT USERSET O ALL INTEG SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Press the Selftest soft key to display the Selftest menu 3 Pressthe Test Item soft key to display the Test Item menu 4 Press the Memory or Key Board soft key to select the test item If you select Memory proceed to Testing the Memory on the next page If you select Key Board proceed to Testing the Keys and the Keyboard on the next page System Overview Remote Control Date Time Note The time display at the lower right corner of the screen may not be updated during the self test Test Exec Test Exec IM 760301 01E B uonoedsu pue e ueuejure y bunoouso qno4 11 3 Self Test Explanation Testing the Memory 5 Press the Test Exec soft key to execute the memory test Selftest M Test Item Memory 2T Test Exec
147. OR RATIO CA Cv MEASURING DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT E Furm RATE SINGLE ITEM LOWER ITEM FORM LOWER FORM USER USER SET ELEMENT O AL CAL INTEG OREMOTE s Turning ON OFF the Independent Setting 1 Press WIRING to display the Wiring menu 2 Press the Element Independent soft key to select ON or OFF Wiring Setting 9 Formula Compensation Element Independent pr oN 4 Measure Selecting Independent Setting of Input To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures See section 3 14 4 4 IM 760301 01E 4 2 Selecting Independent Setting of Input Elements Explanation In the wiring system settings you can select whether to set the measurement range or synchronization source of input elements in the same wiring unit collectively or independently Turning ON OFF the Independent Setting of Input Elements For example assume that the wiring system on a model with three input elements is set as follows Input elements 1 to 3 Three phase four wire system 3P4W Input elements 1 to 3 are assigned to a single wiring unit ON T
148. RRENT RANGE MEASURING MODE SENSOR RATIO ooi AUTO EN DISPLAY numeri WAVE ITEM amp ELEMENT U I P S 0 1 0 UPDATE RATE HOLD OREMOTE LOCAL p WPiq TIME run SINGLE ITEM LOWER ITEM FORM LOWER FORM USER USER SET ELEMENT O AL SHIFT Performing Integration in the Manual Integration Mode 1 Check that the integration mode is set to normal integration See section 5 11 2 Check that the integration timer is set to 00000 00 00 See section 5 11 A W Starting the Integration Press INTEG to display the Integ menu Press the START soft key The START indicator to the right of the INTEG key illuminates and the integration is started a Holding the Integration Press HOLD The HOLD key illuminates and the numeric data display is held Integration continues inside the WT3000 D numeric data display is updated Releasing the Hold Operation Press HOLD while the values are held The HOLD key turns OFF and the In the hold condition the display can be To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on
149. SET The button to the left of the selected trend symbol is highlighted and the corresponding trend is displayed If the highlighting of the button is cleared the trend is no longer displayed Explanation You can turn ON OFF the trend display from trend 1 T1 through trend 16 T16 You can assign measurement functions for which the trend is to be displayed to trend T1 to trend T16 by selecting the trend display target see section 7 3 7 4 IM 760301 01E 7 3 Selecting the Trend Display Target Procedure To exit the menu during ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE operation press ESC eO located above the soft oo A CA ress In the procedural ae Cv Cv explanation below the MEASURING MEASURING phrase press the cursor wane AUTO GEEH move AUTO keys may be used This TPUTINFO phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT orme and character strings For NuMERIc wave up s a UPDATE Holp toca details on the procedures un MN une wave une EE suo uoc details on the pro C E CAL v mem FoRM USER ELEMENT INTEG srr OWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL D 8 To display trends set the display mode to Trend Numeric Trend Wave Trend or Bar Trend For the setup procedure see section 7 1
150. SHIFT ELEMENT ALL Setting the Voltage Range 2 Press the voltage range selection key UP A and DOWN V keys to set the voltage range The specified range is displayed with the voltage range indicator to the left of the select keys and on the upper right corner of the screen where the element is displayed Press the voltage range UP key to increase the voltage range Press the voltage range DOWN key to decrease the voltage range Press AUTO to specify auto range The AUTO key illuminates Setting the Current Range Selecting the Current Input Terminal 3 Check that the EXT SENSOR key is not illuminated If it is press EXT SENSOR The EXT SENSOR key turns OFF Setting the Current Range 4 Press the current range selection key UP A and DOWN keys to set the current range The specified range is displayed with the current range indicator to the left of the select keys and on the upper right corner of the screen where the element is displayed Pressthe current range UP key to increase the current range Press the current range DOWN key to decrease the current range Press AUTO to specify auto range The AUTO key illuminates Repeat steps 1 and 4 to set the measurement range of all elements IM 760301 01E 4 3 Setting the Measurement Range for Direct Input Explanation Display Position of the Target Element and Specified Range When a voltage or current range selection key is pressed the
151. SSP Average for the Synchronous Source Period on the sampled data within the data update interval to calculate the measured value However integrated power WP as well as integrated current q during DC mode are excluded This method detects the period of the input signal assigned to be the synchronous source using the frequency measurement circuit and sets the measurement period to be an integer multiple of the input signal period Computation including simple averaging is performed based on the sampled data in this measurement period This method requires the period of the assigned synchronous source signal to be detected accurately Check to see that the frequency of the synchronous source signal is being measured correctly according to the procedures given in sections 5 1 and 5 3 Fora description of the synchronous source see appendix 6 Setting the Measurement Period When the Data Update Rate Is 250 ms 500 ms 1s or 2 s Computation is performed using EAMP Exponential Average for Measuring Period on the sampled data within the data update interval to calculate the measured value The EAMP method sets the measurement period to be the entire data update interval Computation including exponential averaging is performed through digital filtering on the sampled data in this measurement period This method does not require the input signal period to be detected accurately Hold For procedures see section 4 11 The data display o
152. Settings d d amp c amp c amp l gl Relation Table of D A Output Channels and Measurement Functions Page 4 Displayed only on models with the D A output option D A Output Settings 3 34 IM 760301 01E 3 17 Selecting the Message Language Procedure a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Sia A numeri WAVE UILIP 0 8 HOLD Ca gt WE FU F n SINGLE e aha ITEM FORM USER Femen INTEG LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL To exit the men rin ration pr E l V Scc ERE nm o exit the menu during operation press ESC located above TUTOR FET the soft keys SET FILTER HRM SET MEASURE In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the CURSOR o M cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and FILE IMAGE SAVE STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 1 4 print msc J ve MENU d 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Pressthe Config soft key to display the Config menu sjuswainseayy Bunes o40Jog Selecting the Message Language 3 Press the Message Language soft key to display t
153. TE POAT HOLD Erg CAL INTEG r o eo gt r SHIFT LOWER FORM USER SET O AL Selecting the Target Element 1 Press ELEMENT to select the target element The corresponding element indicator above of the key illuminates To select all elements press SHIFT ELEMENT ALL Selecting the External Current Sensor Input Connector 2 Press EXT SENSOR to turn ON the EXT SENSOR key If itis already illuminated proceed to step 3 Setting the External Current Sensor Range 3 Press the current range selection key UP and DOWN keys to set the external current sensor range The specified range is displayed with the current range indicator to the left of the keys and on the upper right corner of the screen where the elements are displayed Press the current range UP key to increase the external current sensor range Pressthe current range DOWN key to decrease the external current sensor range Press AUTO to specify auto range The AUTO key illuminates Repeat steps 1 and 3 to set the external current sensor range of all elements IM 760301 01E suonipuo 1ueuiaunseo y BH 4 4 Setting the Measurement Range When Using the External Current Sensor Setting the External Current Sensor Transformation Ratio 1 Press SHIFT EXT SENSOR SENSOR RATIO to display the Sensor Ratio menu Only the installed elements are displayed Selecting the Target Element 2 Press one of the
154. V Page V Zoom amp Position seesssseseeeeenenennnn 6 12 value entry of 9 27 var hour sa D6 vectors 2 28 vent holes 9 2 Mc m ii vertical axis 2 22 VGA iiie 2 31 volt ampere hour 5 6 VoOllage cien notet nns sa 9 6 voltage and current determination of 2 6 voltage input terminal 9 13 voltage mode 245 0 voltage range setting of ssssseeeeee 4 6 AV i lle errr E 4 14 W 1 5 1 Prag warm up time eese enne nennen 12 14 warranty items not covered by ssseeeeee 11 9 warranty scope of 2s CURE lic aatalanetied Wave C1 Wave C T TEA6O iisc ctn iere tette tcc ie Wave G2 Trae m Wave C2x Eel S Riaki Wave Display siitin sirana ranas Wave Mapping T Wave Trae EE Si waveform ssssssseseeseeeeeeennneneen nennen nennen nennen nnns waveform mapping 7 13 waveform ZOOMING of ssssssssssesseeeneneene 2 25 weight 12 14 lilicm 4 1 wiring compensation eeeeeeenn 5 22 wiring precautions 9 7 3 8 Wiring Setting saie asensin eee oi AE AERAR 4 1 wiring system 2 8 4 1 wiring unit 2 6 4 2 le 5 6 Wp 5 6 Wp
155. WT3000 Manual Vol 1 3 VV T 3000 Precision Power Analyzer USER S MANUAL YOROGANA e Yokogawa Electric Cor IM 760301 01E Product Registration Thank you for purchasing YOKOGAWA products YOKOGAWA provides registered users with a variety of information and services Please allow us to serve you best by completing the product registration form accessible from our homepage http www yokogawa com tm PIM 103 01E Note Trademarks Revisions 1st Edition December 2004 YK Thank you for purchasing the WT3000 Precision Power Analyzer The WT3000 is an instrument capable of measuring parameters such as voltage current and power with high precision This user s manual contains useful information about the instrument s functions and operating procedures and lists the handling precautions of the WT3000 To ensure correct use please read this manual thoroughly before beginning operation After reading the manual keep it in a convenient location for quick reference whenever a question arises during operation Three manuals including this one are provided as manuals for the WT3000 Please read all of them Manual Title Manual No Description WT3000 Precision Power Analyzer IM 760301 01E This manual Explains all functions and User s Manual procedures of the WT3000 excluding Vol 1 3 the expansion functions and communication functions WT3000 Precision Power Analyzer IM 760301 17E Explains the functi
156. When there are less than 500 points of sampled data on the time axis the area between the display points rasters is no longer continuous This function interpolates between the points to display the waveforms You can select the measurement range from the following No interpolation is performed When the area is not an interpolation area When the area is an interpolation area e Linearly interpolates between two points When the area is not an interpolation area Connects the dots vertically When the area is an interpolation area IM 760301 01E Aejdsiq u0JoAeA H 6 7 Selecting the Display Interpolation and Graticule Changing the Graticule Select the grid or cross scale to display on the screen from the choices below Grid display E No grid or cross scale display EH Cross scale display 6 20 IM 760301 01E 6 8 Waveform Label Procedure ELEMENT OO VOLTAGE RANGE OO ALL CURRENT RANGE WIRING INPUT INFO MEASURING MEASURING en oc ues MODE SENSOR RATIO 0 D gt UTO Cursor keys A A Ce A UC Y DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT QOREMOTE numeri WAVE OTHERS ITEM FORM wie S 0 1 0 UPDATE PDA HOLD SINGLE
157. YPE2 SX QX 8 TYPE3 Q1 Q2 Q1 Q2 Q3 g Pc W Pci Pc2 Pc1 Pc2 Pc3 z WP WP1 WP2 WP1 WP2 WP3 WPX Wh WP z WP 1 WP 2 WP 1 WP 2 WP 3 WP gt WP 1 WP 2 WP 1 WP 2 WP 3 qx qi q2 qi q2 q3 q Ah qeX q 1 q 2 q 1 q 2 q 3 q q 1 q 2 q 1 q 2 q 3 N 1 N Y SX n Time WS VAh n 1 S X n is the nth apparent power function N is the number of data updates N E Qx n Time WQ varh nzi Q n is the nth reactive power X function N is the number of data updates Pz oy 1 PX AL SS ox COS App 2 IM 760301 01E Appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions u n denotes the instantaneous voltage sampled data of the voltage signal i n denotes the instantaneous current sampled data of the current signal AVGI computes the average on the sampled data in the brackets over the measurement period There are two ways of computing the average and either one is selected depending on the data update interval For details on the measurement period and the averaging method see appendix 7 Data Update Rate and Computing Equation PXA and PB denote the active power of the wiring units XA and XB respectively The assignment of input elements to wiring units XA and XB is determined by the number of input elements that are installed in the WT3000 and the selected wiring system pattern For details see section 2 3 The numbers 1 2 and 3 in the equati
158. able and protective grounding cannot be furnished do not use the instrument Connecting the Power Cord 1 Check that the power switch is OFF 2 Connect the power cord plug to the power connector on the rear panel Use the power cord that comes with the package 3 Connect the plug on the other end of the power cord to the outlet that meets the conditions below The AC outlet must be of a three prong type with a protective earth ground terminal Item Specifications Rated supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC Permitted supply voltage range 90 to 264 VAC Rated power supply frequency 50 60 Hz Permitted supply voltage frequency range 48 to 63 Hz Maximum power consumption when using the printer 150 VA The instrument can use a 100 V or a 200 V system for the power supply Check that the voltage supplied to the instrument is less than or equal to the maximum rated voltage of the provided power cord see page iii before using it Power cord included in the package IM 760301 01E 3 4 Turning ON OFF the Power Switch Items to Be Checked before Turning ON the Power Check that the instrument is installed properly see section 3 2 Installing the Instrument Check that the power cord is connected properly see section 3 3 Connecting the Power Supply Location of the Power Switch The power switch is located in the lower left corner of the front panel Turning the Power Switch ON OFF The power s
159. aches 1000000 counts the decimal point shifts automatically For example if 0 001 mWh is added to 999 999 mWh the display shows 1 00000 Wh Display When Integration Overflow Occurs When the integration time reaches its maximum 10000 hours or the integration value reaches its maximum or minimum 999999 MWh or 999999 MAh the integration is stopped and the integration time and integration value at that point are held Integration When MAX Hold Function Is Enabled The integration value is determined and displayed by summing the value that is measured at every display update rate irrespective of the MAX hold function section 5 5 Integration When the Measured Value Exceeds the Measurement Limit If the instantaneous voltage or current of the sampled data exceeds 300 of the measurement range when the crest factor is set to 3 the value is considered to be the value corresponding to 300 for the purpose of integration If the instantaneous voltage or current of the sampled data exceeds 600 of the measurement range when the crest factor is set to 6 the value is considered to be the value corresponding to 600 for the purpose of integration Integration When Current Input Is Small If Irms with respect to the measurement range is as follows current integration is performed assuming a current of zero f Crest Factor Is 3 If Irms is less than or equal to 0 3 or Imn or Irmn is less than or equal to 2 f Crest Factor Is 6 If Irms i
160. achment holes on each side of the instrument near the front Places seals over the feet and handle attachment holes Attach the rack mount kit Mount the instrument on the rack When rack mounting the instrument allow at least 20 mm of space around the inlet and vent holes to prevent internal overheating Make sure to provide adequate support from the bottom of the instrument But do not block the inlet or vent holes in the process IM 760301 01E 3 3 sjuowainseayy Bunes e40Jog BH 3 3 Connecting the Power Supply Before Connecting the Power Supply To prevent the possibility of electric shock and damage to the instrument follow the warnings below AN WARNING Connect the power cord only after confirming that the voltage of the power supply matches the rated electric power voltage for the instrument Connect the power cord after checking that the power switch of the instrument is turned OFF To prevent electric shock or fire always use the power cord supplied by YOKOGAWA Make sure to perform protective grounding to prevent the possibility of electric shock Connect the power cord to a three prong power outlet with a protective earth terminal Do not use an extension cord without protective earth ground Otherwise the protection function will be compromised Use an AC outlet that complies with the power cord provided and securely connect the protective grounding If such an AC outlet is unavail
161. add 0 196 of reading to all accuracy figures When the data update interval is 100 ms add 0 05 of reading to all accuracy figures All accuracy figures for 0 1 to 10 Hz are reference values The voltage accuracy figures for 30 kHz to 100 kHz when the voltage exceeds 750 V are reference values The voltage accuracy figures for 100 kHz to 1 MHz when the voltage V exceeds 2 2 x 10 f KHz are reference values The current accuracy figures for DC 10 Hz to 45 Hz and 400 Hz to 200 kHz when the current exceeds 20 A are reference values The current accuracy figures for 200 kHz to 500 kHz when the current exceeds 10 A are reference values The current accuracy figures for 500 kHz to 1 MHz when the current exceeds 5 A are reference values IM 760301 01E 12 5 suoneoiyi2ods H 12 4 Accuracy Item Specifications Effective input range 0 to 130 of the measurement range for Udc and Idc 1 to 130 of the measurement range for Urms and Irms 2 to 130 if the crest factor is set to 6 10 to 130 of the measurement range for Umn and Imn 10 to 130 of the measurement range for Urmn and Irmn However if the data update interval is 50 ms 100 ms 5 s 10 s or 20 s the signal level of the synchronization source must satisfy the input signal level of frequency measurement see section 12 5 11096 for the maximum range of direct voltage and current inputs The accuracy for 110 to 130 of the measurement
162. ady in the entry box they are overwritten with the recalled string Correct the recalled equation according to steps 1 to 4 in Entering the File Name and Comment and Temporarily Storing Them described above and enter it The string is temporarily stored in the internal memory Moves the cursor upward Entry box Moves the cursor downward ei LL s Switches between upper case and lower case m INSERT m a Deletes the character before the entry position Switches between insert and overwrite mode Recalls the temporarily stored string AAEL m z Z Enters the string IM 760301 01E 3 29 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 el 3 14 Entering Values and Character Strings Keys Other Than the Character Keys BS Deletes the character before the entry position INS Switches between insert and overwrite mode During insert mode the INSERT indicator on the keyboard illuminates When a new character is entered in insert mode the new character is placed at the entry position and all following characters are moved backward CLR Clears all displayed characters On the keyboard used to enter the file name and comment RESET on the front panel can also be used to achieve the same result CAPS Switches between uppercase and lowercase SPACE Enters a space ENT Enters the displayed characters Number of Characters and Types That Can Be Used Item Nu
163. ally updated when the timeout time elapses When the trigger signal period is greater than or equal to 100 ms the two conditions above are met alternately and the display is updated In this happens use normal mode Normal Enables normal mode The display is updated when the trigger occurs The display is not updated if the trigger does not occur Selecting the Trigger Source Select the target to which the trigger condition is applied trigger source from below The selectable items vary depending on the installed elements U1 11 U2 I2 U3 I3 U4 I4 and Ext Clk external clock If the trigger source is set to Ext Clk apply a signal according to the following specifications If the trigger source is set to Ext Clk the trigger level settings are void When Setting the Trigger Source to Ext CIk Apply a trigger signal to the external clock input connector EXT CLK on the rear panel according to the following specifications EXT CLK A Item Specifications Connector type BNC connector Input level TTL Minimum pulse width 1 us Trigger delay time Within 1 us 1 sample interval CAUTION Applying a voltage outside the range of 0 to 5 V to the external clock input connector EXT CLK can damage the instrument IM 760301 01E Aejdsiq u0JoAeA Hu 6 4 Setting the Trigger Input Circuit for the External Trigger Signal and Time Chart 5 V EXT CLK 499 External trigger WA 2
164. and symbols do not accompany their respective trademark names or registered trademark names Other company and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders e 1stEdition December 2004 All Rights Reserved Copyright 2004 Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM 760301 01E Checking the Contents of the Package WT3000 Unpack the box and check the contents before operating the instrument If some of the contents are not correct or missing or if there is physical damage contact the dealer from which you purchased them Check that the model name and suffix code given on the name plate on the side panel match those on your order MODEL S SUFFIX Po ep YOKOGAMA 4 Made in Japan MODEL and SUFFIX Codes Model Item Suffix Code Description 760301 Number of installed input elements 1 760302 Number of installed input elements 2 760303 Number of installed input elements 3 760304 Number of installed input elements 4 The power supply specifications are 100 to 240 VAC on all of the above models Element configuration 01 Specify this suffix code when 760301 is selected 02 Specify this suffix code when 760302 is selected 03 Specify this suffix code when 760303 is selected 04 Specify this suffix code when 760304 is selected Version SV Standard version MV Motor version Power cord D UL CSA standard power cord F VDE standard power cord Q BS standar
165. and Imn cannot be measured simultaneously One symbol from E1 to E4 can be entered in the parentheses for FU to CFI functions No symbols need to be entered in the parentheses for ETA1 to ETA4 PM TORQUE SPEED SLIP and SYNCSP However do not omit the parenthesis Enter one of the element symbols from E1 to E4 in TI The substituted value does not change regardless of which element symbol is entered No symbols need to be entered in the parentheses for the delta computation DELTA1 to DELTA4 1 Displayed only on models with the delta computation option The measurement functions 11 to n4 efficiency 2 are displayed as percentages as indicated by the equations given in appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions However measurement functions ETA1 and ETA4 described in this section are displayed as ratios Example n1 80 96 ETA1 0 8 One symbol from E1 to E4 can be entered in the parentheses for PHI to FI E5 or E6 can be entered in the parentheses for PHIU1U2 to PHIU113 The U1 of PHIU1U2 represents the voltage signal of the element whose element number is the smallest in the wiring unit ZA or XB For example if input elements 2 3 and 4 are assigned to wiring unit XA PHIU1U2 is the phase difference between the voltage signal of input element 2 and that of input element 3 For operands that do not have a comma inside the parentheses no harmonic order needs to be speci
166. and the integration time Auto stop Reset y Abort Reset Abort Restart Start Integration value Restart Time specified for the timer Integration time START STOP START STOP RESET START RESET IM 760301 01E 5 39 1ueulioJnseoe u JOMOd E 5 14 Performing Integration Start Stop and Reset Holding Starting and Stopping the Integration When the display is held the display of the integration result and communication output are held The integration operation continues regardless of whether the hold function is ON or OFF The relationship between the hold function and the start and stop operations is as follows Ifthe integration is started while the display is held the display and communication output do not change When the hold function is released OFF or a single measurement by pressing SINGLE is made the integration result at that point is displayed or output via communications ON HOLD OFF Display value Dotted line is the integration value Integration time i i START STOP RESET Note Thereservation time section 5 12 allows up to 31 days to be specified for February If an erroneous date is specified an error message is displayed at the time of execution of the integration operation Reset the reservation time in this case Leap years are recognized at the time of execution of
167. ansmitted Saving and Loading from an FTP Server on the Network FTP Client Function The numeric data waveform display data screen image data and setup parameters can be saved to an FTP server on the network in the same fashion as the PC card The saved setup parameters can also be loaded as necessary PCor workstation on which the FTP server function is running Printing on a Network Printer LPR Client Function The screen image can be printed on a network printer in the same fashion as the built in printer Printer Sending Mail SMTP Client Function The information of the WT3000 can be transmitted periodically to a specified mail address 2 30 IM 760301 01E 2 9 Saving and Loading Data and Other Functions GP IB Serial Communication See the Communication Interface User s Manual IM760301 11E The measured data can be transferred via the GP IB interface standard equipped or the serial interface conforming to EIA 574 9 pin EIA 232 RS 232 option to a PC for analysis or an external controller can be used to control the instrument for making measurements PC AA Communicat
168. ard IEC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 IEC76 1 1993 Integration Time Integration time WP Sum of positive and negative watt hours WP Sum of positive P consumed watt hour WP Sum of negative P watt hour returned to the power supply q Sum of positive and negative ampere hours q Sum of positive ampere hour q Sum of negative ampere hour WS Volt ampere hour WQ Var hour However the ampere hour is integrated by selecting Irms Imn Idc or Irmn through the current mode setting IM 760301 01E 12 3 suoleoioeds H 12 3 Measurement Functions Measurement Items Related to Normal Measurement Measurement Functions X Functions Determined for Each Wiring Unit ZA and B For details on the determination and equations of X functions see appendix 1 Item Symbol and Meaning Voltage V Urmsz true rms value Umn rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value Udc simple average Urmnz rectified mean value Current A IrmsX true rms value Imn rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value Idcx simple average IrmnZ rectified mean value Active power W PX Apparent power VA Sx Reactive power var QZ Power factor AS Phase difference oS Corrected Power W Pcd Applicable standard IEC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 IEC76 1 1993 Integration Time Integration time WPX Sum of positive and negative watt hours WP z Sum of positive P c
169. are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For details on setting the trend display see section 4 5 and chapter 10 Numeric4 Bar Selectable on models with the harmonic measurement option The numeric data and bar graph of harmonics are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For details on how to set the bar graph display see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E 5 6 IM 760301 01E 5 1 Displaying Numeric Data and Changing the Displayed Items Selecting the Number of Displayed Items Select the number of numeric data items that are displayed simultaneously from the choices below 4 Items When the display format is Numeric four numeric data values are displayed in one column 8 Items When the display format is Numeric eight numeric data values are displayed in one column When the display format is not Numeric eight numeric data values are displayed in two columns 16 Items When the display format is Numeric 16 numeric data values are displayed in two columns All Items A table is displayed indicating the numeric data of items with measurement functions listed vertically and symbols indicating elements and wiring units listed horizontally The number of displayed items varies depending on the number of installed elements The displayed item cannot be changed independently using the ITEM key Switch the display by page scrolling Single List 1 When the display format is
170. are selected A or B is appended to the symbols that were defined in the earlier section Measurement Functions of the Average or Sum of Input Elements X Functions so that the correspondence between the numeric data and the wiring unit can be seen For example UrmsXA represents the true rms value of the average of the voltage of the input elements that are assigned to wiring unit ZA 2 6 IM 760301 01E 2 2 Measurement Function and Measurement Period Measurement Period Synchronization source Input signal U1 Input signal U2 Input signal U3 Measurement Functions of Normal Measurement The numeric data is measured or computed using the sampled data in the measurement period that is determined according to the following principle When the Data Update Rate Is 50 ms 100 ms 5 s 10 s or20 s Data update interval TEMP Data update interval i Data update interval The measurement period is set between the first point where the reference input signal synchronization source crosses the level zero point center of the amplitude on the rising slope or falling slope within the data update interval and the last point where the synchronization source crosses the level zero point center of the amplitude on the rising slope or falling slope within the data update interval The rising or falling edge is automatically selected for the one that allows the interval to be longer If the number of rising s
171. asurement mode is the element number Ru Input resistance 10 MO of the voltage input terminal Ri Input resistance 5 5 mQ of the current input terminal sf Scaling factor for power is the element number Example PXA n Pp where XA Element 1 and 2 XB Element 3 and 4 The efficiency compensation for above PZA PEB U1 x U1 Ry x sf1 11xI1 x Rix sf1 U2 x U2 Ry x sf2 12 x I2 ct2 ct2 x R x sf2 Compensation for the Two Wattmeter Method The computation below is performed on the element or wiring unit wired to 3P3W 8V3A Example When elements 1 2 and 3 are set to 3P3W 3V3A Computation step 1 Calculation of compensation values Power Compensation SP The average of u n 1 u n 2 3 x i n 1 i n 2 i n 3 e Watt hour total Compensation SWP WP of u n 1 u n 2 3 x i n 1 i n 2 i n 3 Watt hour Compensation SWP WP of u n 1 u n 2 3 x i n 1 i n 2 i n 3 Watt hour Compensation SWP WP of u n 1 u n 2 3 x i n 1 i n 2 i n 3 u n and i n are instantaneous voltage and current sampled data of voltage and current signals respectively Computation step 2 Add the compensation value to the measured value e SP SP SPxsf e SWP SWP SWP xsf SWP SWP SWP xsf e SWP SWP SWP xsf xipueddy sf Scaling factor of the first element in the wirin
172. at is automatically added and the data size are indicated below Data Format Extension Data Size Reference Value Unit Bytes OFF Color Color data compression TIFF TIF Approx 40 K Approx 310K BMP BMP Approx 40 K Approx 310 K Approx 30K Post Script PS Approx 80 K PNG PNG Approx 5 K Approx 10 K JPEG JPG Approx 40 K Approx 50 K Color Mode The color mode can be selected when the data format is TIFF BMP PNG or JPG Color Color 256 colors Reverse White background black text color waveforms Gray 16 gray levels OFF Black and white Turning ON OFF Data Compression The data compression can be turned ON OFF when the data format is BMP and the color mode is Color Reverse or Gray OFF Do not compress the data ON Compress the data with RLE File Name and Comment Same as the explanation given in File Name and Comment in section 9 3 However only the first 20 characters of the comment appears on the screen Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory Same as the explanation given in Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory in section 9 3 Auto Naming Function Same as the explanation in Auto Naming Function in section 9 3 Note ___ LLL The number of directories and files that can be displayed in the file list is 2500 If the number of directories and files in a directory exceeds 2500 the file list randomly displays 2500 of the directories and files
173. at of the phase difference of the voltage and current can be selected from below This is valid during the normal measurement mode 180 Lead Lag With the positive vertical axis set to zero degrees this format displays using 180 notation with a lead D indicated by the counterclockwise direction and a lag G by the clockwise direction The phase difference of harmonic order 1 to 100 of the voltage and current on the harmonic measurement option is displayed using a 180 format no sign for lead and negative sign for lag 360 Degrees With the positive vertical axis set to zero degrees this format displays using 360 in the clockwise direction Note If the measured value of the voltage or current input is zero Error is displayed When both the voltage and current are sinusoids and the ratio of the voltage and current inputs do not differ greatly with respect to the measurement range the phase difference p of lead and lag are detected and displayed correctly If the computation result of power factor X exceeds 1 is displayed as follows Ifthe power factor A is greater than 1 and less than equal to 2 displays zero Ifthe power factor A is greater than 2 displays and error IM 760301 01E 5 29 1ueulioJnseoe u JOMOd E 5 11 Setting the Normal Integration Mode and the Integration Timer Procedure To exit the menu during ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE En
174. at the lower section of the screen on the split display press SHIFT FORM LOWER FORM 2 Press the Format soft key to display the Format menu 3 Press any of the keys from Single to Quad to select the number of windows Format Single 7 12 IM 760301 01E 7 6 Displaying Trends on Divided Windows Explanation The screen can be evenly divided and the trends can be assigned to the divided windows Selecting the Number of Screen Divisions Select the number of divisions of the screen from the choices below This is the same as with the waveform display section 6 6 Single No division Dual 2 divisions Triad 3 divisions Quad 4 divisions The number of displayed points in the vertical direction of one divided window varies depending on the number of divisions as follows Single 432 points Dual 216 points Triad 144 points Quad 108 points Waveform Mapping The trends that are turned ON see section 7 2 are assigned in order according to the trend number T1 to T16 to the divided windows This corresponds to the Auto setting for the waveform display IM 760301 01E 7 13 ejdsig pualy E T f Procedure Restarting the Trend ELEMENT eG VOLTAGE RANGE To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft Bee RATIO CURRENT RANGE OO m m m m zZ S MEASURING keys In the procedural explanation b
175. byte Q ile Name STDATA Seaain pate tine P ip 99 STD coent S PP sTpeee CSU e gt 7 Filter Jh ftem au Convert Menory Exec IM 760301 01E 8 15 eea paJ01S y Burnes pue ejeg Burjjeoeg pue Bunos Ile 8 5 Saving the Stored Data When Saving Data through a Store and Save Operation Sequence 4 Press the File setting soft key to display the File setting menu Selecting the Data Type for Saving the Data 5 Same as step 5 under Selecting the Data Type for Saving the Data on page 8 14 Selecting the Storage Medium 6 Same as steps 6 to 8 under Selecting the Storage Medium on page 8 14 Selecting the Save Destination Directory 7 Same as steps 9 to 8 under Selecting the Save Destination Directory on page 10 14 Setting the File Name and Comment twice to return to the Store Set menu itialize Memory Exec soft key An Alert dialog box appears o dhs ig cursor keys to select OK or Cancel 12 lect nd press SET to clear the data in the internal memory Select qe SE to cancel the clearing of the data in the internal memory Starting amp ry 13 ess ST age Operation starts see section 8 4 according to various conditio A pic on the store mode see section 8 1 Stopping the Store O ion m Savingthe Data 14 If the store op eration f pro i ss ing STORE again stops the operation Then the storeddata eps 15 T
176. c measurement option menu no data is stored for harmonic orders without data IM 760301 01E 8 9 eea paJ01S eui Burnes pue ejeg Burjjeoeg pue Bunos Ile 8 4 Procedure Storing Data ry Y s na mere ave R FREQ FILTER SYNC SOURCE RR NULL 1 save Rerore NU Press th curso i tose Select OK and pres SBT to Setting Convert Memory Initialize Menory Exec ing the FT4STORE ode 0ft key to select Store e to sof i 2 3 4 Pressxhe Initiaji 5 6 stare set 7 Note ne Store to DISPLAY NUMERIC WAVE ITEM amp ELEMENT U I P sene OREMOTE UPDATE PDAT HOLD LOCAL oers n ruin SINGLE CAL mem FORM USER ELEMENT INTEG surr LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL 3 To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 ternal Memory ORE SET to display the Store Set menu M da SET nce learinQvof t
177. close the box Measure User Defined Function M S Q Formula Type 1 P a Pc Formula i c Formula c Formula L Pc Formula Pc Formula W Pc Formula Pc Formula iEc76 1C1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 c a lEC76 101976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 ECTS items IEEE C57 12 90 1993 1EC76 11993 Frequency 1EC76 161993 1EC76 1 1993 Auto P1 0 5000_ 0 500 P1 0 5000 e p2 0 5000 0 5000 T p2 0 5000 g Phase 180 Lead Lag Sync Measure aster Slave 5 26 IM 760301 01E 5 9 Setting the Equations for Apparent Power Reactive Power and Corrected Power Explanation Selecting the Equations for Apparent Power and Reactive Power The equations for apparent power and reactive power can be selected from three types For details see section 2 5 TYPE 1 Method Used by Normal Mode of Conventional WT Series Power Meters Active power for three phase four wire system PX P1 P2 P3 Apparent power for three phase four wire system SX S1 S2 S3 U1xl1 U2xl2 U3xI3 Reactive power for three phase four wire system Q Q1 Q2 Q3 TYPE2 Active power for three phase four wire system PX P1 P2 P3 Apparent power for three phase four wire system S S1 S2 S3 U1xl1 U2xl2 U3xI3 Reactive power for three phase four wire system QJ Sy Px TYPE 3 Method Used by Har
178. conductive cross sectional area of approx 1 mm between the sensor and the instrument to reduce the effects of common mode voltage Take safety and error reduction into consideration when constructing an external sensor cable v Voltage input Ot termihal P LOAD External current sensor Input connector 9 Shunt type current sensor When the circuit under measurement is not grounded and the signal is high in frequency or large in power the effects of the inductance of the connection cable for the shunt type current sensor become large In this case use an isolation sensor CT DC CT or clamp Clamp type current sensor G Tov l Voltage input Ot terminal p LOAD ONG External current sensor Input connector IM 760301 01E sjuswainseayy Bunes o40Jog BH 3 10 Wiring the Circuit under Measurement When Using the Current Sensor The following wiring examples are for connecting shunt type current sensors When connecting a clamp type current sensor that outputs voltage substitute the shunt type current sensor with the clamp type In addition the assignment of elements to the input terminals in the following figure varies depending on the number of installed input elements For details see Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems in section 2 3 Measurement Conditions Wiring Example of a Single Pha
179. consider the case when one side of the power source and the outer case are grounded In this case two current flows can be considered load current iL and the current that flows through the stray capacitance ics iL flows through the current measurement circuit then through the load and returns to the power source shown with a dotted line ics flows through the current measurement source through the stray capacitance and then through the earth ground of the outer case and returns to the power source shown with a dot dash line Therefore the current measurement circuit ends up measuring the sum of ij and ics even though it wants to measure only iL ics is the amount of error in this case If the voltage applied to Cs is Vcs common mode voltage then ics can be found using the following equation Because the phase of ics is ahead of the voltage by 90 the effects of ics on the measurement accuracy increases as the power factor gets smaller ics Vcs x 2nf x Cs LOAD When measuring high frequencies as in this instrument this error ics cannot be ignored By connecting the current input terminal of the instrument to the side that is close to the earth potential of the power source SOURCE Vcs becomes approximately zero and very little ics flows IM 760301 01E App 23 xipueddy Appendix 6 Setting the Measurement Period The measurement period must be set properly to mak
180. ctions Measurement Items Related to Normal Measurement 12 3 1E NES P 12 5 12 5 Sea S r 12 8 12 6 Input Output of the Master Slave Synchronization Signal sess 12 12 12 7 External Clock Input sesssessssseeeeeeeeeneenenennnen nennen nennt nennen nnne nnne nnne 12 12 12 84 SIolagB idiot once b leto tiae tate a a a ee bene tetecscuazcnzaas 12 12 12 9 GP IB Interface nece nece ete te ee die nara ee t a ieaiaia annuae 12 13 12 10 Safety Terminal Adapter sssssssssseeeeeeeenee nennt 12 13 12 11 General Specifications 2 iet i ee ele 12 14 12 12 External Dimensions esses nennen nennen nnne nnne nnn nennen 12 16 xi Contents Appendix Index Appendix 1 Appendix 2 Appendix 3 Appendix 4 Appendix 5 Appendix 6 Appendix 7 Appendix 8 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions App 1 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numeric Data App 4 ASCII Header File Format eese App 11 Power Basics Power Harmonics and RLC of AC Circuits App 14 For Making Accurate Measurements ses App 22 Setting the Measurement Period ssseeneee App 24 Data Update Rate and Computing Equation
181. cuit option gt e O O A D e Line O filter zero cross Isolator detection Peak detection Motor A DSP e o o e AID F4 e Line O filter zero cross Isolator detection Peak detection Input Signal Flow and Process 8 4 inch LCD RGB output option Keys GP IB PC card RS 232 option Built in printer option Isolator D A option The input circuits Elements 1 through 4 consist of a voltage input circuit and a current input circuit The input circuits are mutually isolated They are also isolated from the case The voltage signal that is applied to the voltage input terminal U is normalized using the voltage divider of the voltage input circuit and an operational amplifier OP AMP It is then input to a voltage A D converter The current input circuit is equipped with two types of input terminals a current input terminal I and a current sensor input connector EXT Either one can be used at any given time The voltage signal from the current sensor that is received at the current sensor input connector is normalized using the voltage divider and an operational amplifier OP AMP It is then input to a current A D converter The current signal that is applied to the current input terminal is converted to a voltage Then it is input to the curr
182. cute Control K Cancel iu Date Time d Config Selftest IM 760301 01E 3 25 3 13 Initializing the Settings Explanation The values specified by the panel keys can be reset to the factory default values This is useful when you wish to clear previous settings or start the settings from scratch For details on the initial settings see appendix 2 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numeric Data Settings That Cannot Be Initialized Date Time settings Designation of file to be displayed Filter File utility operation Function Settings related to the GP IB communication RS 232 communication option and Ethernet communication option planned to be released Initializing at Power Up If the power switch is turned ON while holding down RESET the WT3000 powers up using initial settings In this case Settings That Cannot Be Initialized as indicated above excluding the date and time are also initialized A message indicating that settings have been initialized is shown on the screen 3 26 IM 760301 01E 3 14 Entering Values and Character Strings Entering Values After selecting the setup parameter with the SET key and soft keys the value can be changed using the cursor keys Use the left and right cursor keys to move along the digits and the up and down cursor keys to set the value of that digit Integ Set Mode Scaling Normal prr ON Timer S
183. d Input elements that are assigned to the same wiring unit in the wiring system selection are selected simultaneously SHIFT ELEMENT ALL Key See section 4 1 and 4 2 Collectively sets the voltage range or current range of all installed input elements Pressing only the ELEMENT key again enables individual input elements to be configured A Key and W Key See section 4 3 and 4 4 Selects the voltage range the current range or the current sensor range The selected range is enabled when the AUTO key is not turned ON manual range function AUTO Key See section 4 3 and 4 4 When the AUTO key is pressed and the AUTO indicator illuminates the auto range function is enabled The voltage range current range and current sensor range are automatically switched according to the amplitude of the input electric signal Pressing the AUTO key again turns OFF the AUTO indicator and enables the manual range function EXT SENSOR Key See section 4 4 When the EXT SENSOR key is pressed and the EXT SENSOR indicator illuminates the current sensor range for measuring the current sensor output on the WT3000 can be selected using the or W key in the CURRENT RANGE section Pressing the EXT SENSOR key again turns OFF the EXT SENSOR indicator and enables the selection of the current range for direct input SHIFT EXT SENSOR SENSOR RATIO Key See section 4 4 Displays a menu for setting the current sensor transformation ratio for each input el
184. d PC card File Name and Comment Afile name must be assigned Comments are optional You cannot save data to a file name that already exists in the same directory overwriting not allowed Number and Types of Characters That Can Be Used Number of Characters Characters That Can Be Used 1 to 8 characters 0 9 A Z parentheses minus sign Q to 25 characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard and spaces o ernal Memory ge op tation e executed only when the internal memory is cleared Ifyou are p UN fir storage operation after turning ON the power switch there is no need to oleae in memo Oo Fs 3e Displayed ino Lis Specify the type of files to be disp PC ad tem Oy Ly Displays only the numeric data and warom dapoy data files in the selected directory 7 O All C 4 O Displays all the files in the selected direct Specifying the File to Dialog Box 8 18 IM 760301 01E 8 5 Saving the Stored Data Properties Displays the following information about the selected file filename extension the file size the date the file was saved the attribute the comment etc Nole The following data is stored in the places where numeric data does not exist when saving the stored numeric data For ASCII files Characters NAN INF INF or ERROR For Float files Ox7FC00000 0x7F800000 OxFF800000 or OXFFFF
185. d points number Of 0 0 0 eee cece eee eee eeeeeee 2 23 distorted Wayve eren nnt entente App 19 distortion distortion factor Dr Dual List E Page EAMB 15 e ueste ree ees App 31 CMICIOMCY REN 5 20 Efficiency Compensation nee 5 23 efficiency equation for 5 20 element 3 il aii een ET 2 6 Element Independent eseseseeesssseseesseeseseessseseneessaeees 4 4 elements independent setting of uesssusss 4 4 error messages ou eee eee eee 11 2 ISI M 2 30 expendable items eee 11 9 Exponential Average for Measuring Period App 31 ue cpm 4 19 EXT SENSOR 1 utere ERREUR ERI bien ee 4 11 OXTONSION reet utente ieee 8 17 9 8 external current sensor input connector 3 16 external current sensor range external current sensor transformation ratio 4 12 external dimensions seesssss 12 14 12 16 external trigger signal esee 6 10 F Page falling zero crossing eeen App 25 FAT format file attributes FIG ELSTON of c EEEE Er nente re than 9 20 File bist croire cien eee eei eet tot File Name x flO NAME ceo eer o ne aee as ott file properties necne remercie 9 17 file specifying of sess
186. d power cord R AS standard power cord H GB standard power cord CCC compatible Options G5 Harmonic measurement B5 Built in printer DT Delta computation FQ Frequency measurement add on simultaneous measurement on all input elements possible DA 20 channel D A output IN1 VGA output C2 RS 232 communications C7 Ethernet communications to be released in the near future Suffix Code Example Number of installed input elements 2 motor version UL CSA standard power cord built in printer option and 20 channel D A output option 760302 02 MV D B5 DA No Instrument Number When contacting the dealer from which you purchased the instrument please give them the instrument number IM 760301 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Standard Accessories The standard accessories below are supplied with the instrument Item Model Quantity Note Part No Power cord One of the following power cords is included according to the suffix code on the previous page A1006WD 1 UL CSA standard power cord Maximum rated voltage 125 V Maximum rated current 7 A A1009WD 1 VDE standard power cord Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 10 A A1054WD 1 BS standard power cord Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 10 A A1024WD 1 AS standard power cord Maximum rated voltage 240 V Maximum rated current 10 A A1064WD 1 GB standard power cord CCC compatible Maximum rate
187. d voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 10 A Power fuse A1463EF 1 250 V 6 3 A time lag Attached to the fuse holder Rubber feet A9088ZM 2 Two pieces in one set Two sets provided Current input B9318FX 1 With four attachment screws protective cover Safety terminal 758931 See Same number as the number of installed input elements adapter set right 760301 1 set with 1 hexagonal socket wrench 760302 2 sets with 1 hexagonal socket wrench 760303 3 sets with 1 hexagonal socket wrench 760304 4 sets with 1 hexagonal socket wrench Printer roll B9316FX 2 For the built in printer paper Provided only with option B5 36 pin A1005JD 1 For D A output connector Provided only with option DA User s Manual IM760301 01E 1 This manual Vol 1 3 Communication IM760301 17E 1 CD ROM Interface User s Manual CD ROM part number B9318ZZ Vol 2 3 Printed manuals can be purchased separately Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Expansion Function IM760301 51E 1 Provided on models with User s Manual suffix code G5 B5 DT DA or V1 Vol 3 3 Power cord One of the following power cords is included according to the suffix code Power fuse N A1463EF A1024WD c Rubber feet Current input protective Safety terminal Printer roll paper 36 pin connector A9088ZM cover adapter set B9316FX A1005JD B9318FX 758931 BDO BSE LS Su User s Manual this manual Communication Interface Expansion Function 1M760301 01E User s Manual
188. d with input elements 1 DC end and 2 AC end set the synchronization source of input elements 1 and 2 to the voltage or current on the AC power end input element 2 In the example shown in the figure below set the synchronization source of input element 1 and 2 to U2 or 12 Input DC power U1 and I1 Output AC power U2 and I2 Power transformer Synchronization source setup example Input element 1 U2 or I2 Input element 2 Power Transformer with Single Phase DC Input and Three Phase AC Output If the device that converts single phase DC power to three phase AC power is connected and measured as shown on the next page set the synchronization source of all input elements to the same voltage and current of element 2 and 3 on the AC power end In this example set the synchronization source of input elements 1 2 and 3 to U2 or I2 U3 or I3 In effect the measurement periods of the input signal and all output signals match and the power conversion efficiency of the power conversion device can be measured more accurately Single phase DC power Connect to input element 1 Three phase AC power Connect to input elements 2 and 3 using three phase three wire system App 28 IM 760301 01E Appendix 6 Setting the Measurement Period AC power U2 and I2 DC power U1 and I1 AC power U3 and I3 Power transformer Synchronization source setup example Input element 1 Inpu
189. defined function F1 to F20 is a portion of the measurement function symbol It is not related to the element number Changing the Element Wiring Unit You can select the element wiring unit from the choices below The selectable items vary depending on the installed elements Elementi Element2 Element3 Element4 XA and B If there are no elements that are assigned to the selected wiring unit there is no numeric data Thus no data is displayed in this case For example if elements are assigned to XA and no elements are assigned to XB then the measurement function for XB shows no data Urms1 0 10496 w Urms1 0 10513 w Irms1 1 6946 a Change the measurement rms1 1 6929 P1 0 1650 w function of the third item gt 0 92791 1 0 1779 ia 1 0 1780 iva Urms1 0 10476 w Change the element Irms1 1 7020 of the third item P2 0 0000 1 0 1783 iva Resetting the Order of Display Items You can reset the displayed order of numeric data to a preset order For details on the reset items see appendix 2 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numeric Data Note For the meanings of the measurement function symbols that are displayed see section 2 2 Measurement Functions and Measurement Periods 2 5 Computation 2 6 Integration appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions and chapter 6 Delta Computation in the Expansion Funct
190. e Fi Auto Naming 1 Filename CAPS Comment iu Property 2 m a DERE Filter item 4l Save Exec Sal ENT E 9 6 IM 760301 01E 9 3 Saving Setup Parameters Executing the Save Operation 16 Press the Save Exec soft key The data is saved to the directory indicated by Pathe At the same time the Save Exec soft key changes to the Abort soft key Aborting the Save Operation 17 Press the Abort soft key The save operation is aborted At the same time the Abort soft key changes to the Save Exec soft key Save Menu Save Menu 4 4 File Name File Name j gt Property Property Filter Filter item al tem all Save Exec Abort Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box Same as the procedure given in Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box in section 9 6 Viewing the Properties Same as the procedure given in Viewing the Properties in section 9 6 IM 760301 01E 9 3 Saving Setup Parameters Explanation The setup parameters can be saved Saving Setup Parameters Setup Parameters That Are Saved The setup parameter of each key existing at the time of the save operation can be saved However the following setup parameters are not saved Se
191. e When AUTO is pressed the AUTO key illuminates and auto range is enabled The range switches automatically depending on the magnitude of the input signal as described below The different ranges used in the auto range are the same as those available for fixed range IM 760301 01E suonipuo 1ueuaunseo y BH 4 3 Setting the Measurement Range for Direct Input Note Range Increase When the voltage current mode is RMS the measurement range is increased if the data of measurement function Urms or Irms exceeds 110 of the current measurement range If the peak value of the input signal exceeds 330 or 660 of the current measurement range when the crest factor is set to 3 or 6 respectively the range is increased If all the installed input elements are selected all the element indicators are illuminated the measurement range is increased on all input elements when the range increase condition above of any input element is met When a wiring unit is configured the measurement range is increased on all input elements in the wiring unit when the range increase condition above of any input element in the wiring unit is met Range Decrease When the voltage current mode is RMS the range is decreased if the data of the measurement function Urms or Irms is less than or equal to 30 of the measurement range and Upk and Ipk is less than or equal to 300 or 600 of the next lower range when the crest factor is set to 3 or 6
192. e Displayed in the File List Dialog Box 6 Same as the procedure given in Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box in section 9 6 Viewing the Properties 7 Same as the procedure given in Viewing the Properties in section 9 6 Selecting the File Attribute 8 Same as the procedure given in Selecting the File Attribute in section 9 6 Selecting the File to Be Deleted One at a Time 9 10 Press the cursor keys to select the file Press the Set Reset soft key If an asterisk is displayed to the left of the file name in the File List window the file will be deleted If the asterisk to the left of the file name disappears the file will not be deleted Proceed to step 12 Delete Path PC CardNPC1 Space 123836416 byte File Name Size Date Attribute File List M Function Delete IPc card 1 0001 0000 Set Reset gt 2004705721 17 46 27309 2004 05721 17 53 R 27309 2004 05 21 17 50 R yy E AIT Set il Property Filter Item AJ Attribute Delete Exec HE Selecting the Files to Be Deleted at Once 9 10 11 Delete Delete M Function File List M Function Path PC_CardNpct Delete Space 123797504 byte Delete File Name Size Date Attribute Press the cursor keys to select a file directory or storage medium Press the All Set soft key
193. e able to select only a single wiring system or two or three wiring systems You can select one of the following five wiring systems 1P2W single phase two wire 1P3W single phase three wire 3P3W three phase three wire 3P4W three phase four wire and 3P3W 3V3A three voltage three current The input element assignment to wiring units XA and XB is determined from the wiring system pattern This allows X functions of voltage current active power apparent power reactive power power factor phase difference and other parameters to be determined For the relationship between the wiring system and the determination of the X function see appendix 1 The following table shows the relationship between the number of installed elements the selectable wiring system patterns and the assignment of input elements to wiring units XA or XB Installed input elements 1 Wiring system Pattern 1 1P2W Installed input elements 1 2 Wiring system Pattern 1 1P2W 1P2W Wiring system Pattern 2 Installed input elements 1P3W or 3P3W XA 1 2 3 Wiring system Pattern 1 1P2W 1P2W 1P2W Wiring system Pattern 2 1P3W or 3P3W 3V3A ZA 1P2W Wiring system Pattern 3 1P2W 1P3W or 3P3 W 3V3A XA Wiring system Pattern 4 Installed input elements Wiring system Pattern 1 3P4W 1P2W 1P2W or 3P3W 3V3A XA 1P2W Wiring system Pattern 2 1P3W or 3P3W XA
194. e correct measurements on this instrument There are two cases for setting of the measurement period depending on the data update rate When the data update rate is set to 50 ms 100 ms 5s 10s or 20s The measurement period must be set When the data update rate is set to 250 ms 500 ms 1s or2s The measurement period does not have to be set Details of each case are given below When the Data Update Rate Is Set to 50 ms 100 ms 5 s 10 s or20 s The WT3000 detects the period of the selected input signal using the frequency measurement circuit see section 2 1 The measurement period is the integer multiple of this period The WT3000 determines the measured values by taking the average of the sampled data in the measurement period The selected input signal for defining the measurement period is called synchronization source Thus the measurement period is automatically set inside the WT3000 by specifying the synchronization source This computation method is referred to as Average for the Synchronous Source Period ASSP This method is effective for short data update rates and for efficient measurement of low frequency signals Select the signal to be the synchronization source from the choices below U1 11 U2 I2 U3 I3 U4 I4 Ext Clk external clock or None The selectable items vary depending on the installed elements For the specifications of the Ext CIk external clock see section 12 7 For example if the synchroniza
195. e equation of each type see section 2 3 Exp Performs exponential averaging Lin Performs moving averaging Setting the Attenuation Constant or Average Count If the averaging type is Exp exponential averaging set the attenuation constant If the averaging type is Lin moving averaging set the average count For Exp Select the attenuation constant from 2 4 8 16 32 and 64 ForLin Select the average count from 8 16 32 64 128 and 256 Measurement Functions That Are Averaged The measurement functions that are directly averaged are indicated below Other functions that use these functions in their computation are also affected by the averaging For details regarding the determination of each measurement function see appendix 1 ULP S andQ AF1 to 4 models with the delta computation function Torque speed and Pm models with the delta computation function Cf Cfl Pc q q q WS WQ n1 to n4 are computed from the averaged P and Q Slip is computed from the averaged speed 4 24 IM 760301 01E 4 9 Selecting the Averaging Function Measurement Functions of Harmonic Measurement Option Turning ON OFF Averaging e If averaging is turned ON and the averaging type is Exp exponential averaging averaging is performed on the measurement functions of harmonic measurement option e If averaging is turned ON but the averaging type is Lin moving averaging averaging is not performed
196. e new settings are not reflected on the display Misc System Overview Initialize Settings K Remote a Display Date zoa pyy oa Time 20 37 31 Win Set Selftest Next 12 IM 760301 01E 3 23 3 12 Setting the Date Time Explanation Turning ON OFF the Date Time display You can select whether or not to display the date and time in the lower right corner of the screen OFF Do not display the date and time ON Display the date and time Setting the Date Time Setting the Date You can set the date in the form YY MM DD year month day Set the lower two digits of the year Setting the Time You can set the time in the form HH MM SS hour minute second The hour is set using a 24 hour clock Confirming the Settings When the date time is turned ON OFF it is immediately reflected on the screen However if you are changing the date and time you must confirm the new settings If you do not abort the operation the new settings will not take effect Note The date and time information is backed up with the lithium battery when the power is turned OFF The instrument contains leap year information The instrument determines the leap year calendar when the new settings are confirmed If you enter 2 29 on a non leap year an error message will be displayed 3 24 IM 760301 01E 3 13 Initializing the Settings
197. e range 5 to 18 C or 28 to 40 C One year accuracy reading error of the accuracy at 6 months after calibration x 1 5 Accuracy when the crest factor is set to 6 Same as the accuracy when the crest factor is 3 after doubling the measurement range Power Accuracy Item Specifications Accuracy accuracy at 6 months Conditions Same as the conditions for voltage and current Frequency Accuracy reading error measurement range error DC 0 05 of reading 0 196 of range 0 1 Hz lt f lt 30 Hz 30 Hz lt f lt 45 Hz 45 Hz lt f lt 66 Hz 66 Hz lt f lt 1kHz 1 kHz lt f lt 10 kHz 10 kHz lt f lt 50 kHz 50 kHz lt f lt 100 kHz 100 kHz lt f lt 500 kHz 500 kHz lt f lt 1 MHz 0 2 of reading 0 3 of range 0 05 of reading 0 05 of range 0 02 of reading 0 04 of range 0 05 of reading 0 05 of range 0 15 of reading 0 1 of range 0 3 of reading 0 2 of range 0 014 x f of reading 0 3 of range 0 012 x f of reading 1 of range 0 048 x f 19 of reading 2 of range The unit of f in the read error equation is kHz For temperature changes after zero level compensation or range change add voltage influence x current influence to the DC accuracy For details on voltage and current influence see page 12 5 For self generated heat caused by current input on an AC input signal add 0 00002 x I 96 of readin
198. e relative time of cursor from the left end of the screen with the left end of the screen taken to be 0 s Xx X axis value of cursor x from the left end of the screen Indicates the relative time of cursor x from the left end of the screen with the left end taken to be 0 s AX The difference between the X axis values of cursor and cursor x D Date and time at the cursor position Indicates the date and time year month date hour minute second of measurement Dx Date and time at the cursor x position Indicates the date and time year month date hour minute second of measurement Aejdsig pualy p Note ode ifimmeasurable data exists is displayed in the measured value display area AY is measured even if the unit is different The result has no unit in this case IM 760301 01E Chapter 8 Storing and Recalling Data and Saving the Stored Data 8 1 Setting the Store Mode Procedure a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT A women WAVE UIP sono UPDATE HOLD toca C P weg rein SINGLE v ITEM FORM USER Eeen INTEG su LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for sel
199. e removed by YOKOGAWA s qualified personnel only Opening the cover is dangerous because some areas inside the instrument have high voltages Ground the Instrument before Making External Connections Securely connect the protective grounding before connecting to the item under measurement or to an external control unit If you are going to touch the circuit make sure to turn OFF the circuit and check that no voltage is present EEEEEEINIIIIIIIIIIIIIIUIUIIIIIIULIIIIIITITGILLEIC OL U OxLLA L L LO AEeIOA LA IALLAE OA ACACAGAOA AA OUO AA ALLLL LL CAC AGUL Ln IL D O AIALLLUuLLLAAAA CB vi IM 760301 01E Conventions Used in This Manual Safety Markings Subheadings Unit The following markings are used in this manual to the instrument This symbol appears on the instrument to indicate that the user must refer to the user s manual for special instructions The same symbol appears in the corresponding place in the user s manual to identify those instructions In the manual the symbol is used in conjunction with the word WARNING or CAUTION WARNING Calls attention to actions or conditions that could cause serious or fatal injury to the user and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences j Improper handling or use can lead to injury to the user or damage CAUTION Calls attentions to actions or conditions that could cause light injury 7 to the user or damage to the instrument or use
200. e synchronization source The specified synchronization source is displayed by the element displayed in the upper right corner of the screen Element Object Element 1 Item Up Exec Item Down Exec dd 4 18 IM 760301 01E 4 7 Setting the Measurement Period Explanation For relationship details on the measurement period data update rate and synchronization source see appendix 6 During normal measurement the numeric data is measured computed from the data sampled over the measurement period Display Position of the Target Element and Synchronization Source The target element and the synchronization source are displayed in the upper right corner of the screen when SYNC SOURCE is pressed Target element displayed as 1 4 when all elements are selected collectively Synchronization source example in which the current of Element 1 is specified Sync Src1 11 YOKOGAWA 4 Element1 U1 1000vrms 11 30Arms Element2 u2 1000vrms Selecting the Target Element to Be Specified Only the indicators of installed elements illuminate sequentially When the independent setting of input elements is OFF the element switches according to the wiring system All elements can also be selected collectively suonipuo 1ueuaunseo y BH Setting the Synchronization Source You can select which input signal will be the synchronization source synchronized to the zero crossing point of the input signal for each elem
201. e vertical display range corresponds to 3 or 6 times the measurement range when the crest factor see section 4 6 is set to 3 or 6 respectively For details on waveform display see section 2 7 Waveform Display Fixed Range Select each range from a number of choices The selected range does not switch even if the amplitude of the input signal changes For voltage the maximum and minimum selectable ranges are 1000 V and 15 V respectively when the crest factor is set to 3 When the crest factor is set to 6 the maximum and minimum selectable ranges are 500 V and 7 5 V respectively Auto Range The measurement range switches automatically depending on the amplitude of the input signal The different ranges used in the auto range are the same as those available for fixed range Range Increase When the data of measurement function Urms or Irms exceeds 110 of the current measurement range the measurement range is increased When the peak value of the input signal exceeds 330 or 660 of the current measurement range when the crest factor is set to 3 or 6 respectively the range is increased Range Decrease When the data of the measurement function Urms or Irms is less than or equal to 30 of the measurement range and Upk and Ipk is less than or equal to 300 or 60096 of the next lower range when the crest factor is set to 3 or 6 respectively the range is decreased Power Range The measurement ranges power ranges o
202. easured Thus the Frequency Meas Item soft key does not appear even when ITEM is pressed Note If the frequency measurement is not stable such as due to noise try using the frequency filter as explained in section 4 8 Frequency cannot be detected if the AC amplitude is small For details on the detection level for frequency measurement see section 12 5 IM 760301 01E 1ueulioJnseoe u JOMOd E 5 4 Setting the User Defined Function a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT cim A enc WAVE U LIP sun us HOLD toca 4 gt OTHERS wegl FU FU srce 0 omens TIME i ITEM FORM USER ELEMENT INTEG SHIFT amp 0 cem Ete Scauna ner AG To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above VOOR FREQ the soft keys p B 39 amp In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the ou cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and FILE mace save STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 print msc Cre MENU 1 Press MEASURE to display the Measure menu 2 Press the User Defined Function soft key to display the User Defined Function menu 3 Press any of the soft key
203. ecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 tore a softkey to display the Store Setting menu e so to display the Mode menu Store Setting Convert Memory Initialize Memory Exec Initialize Memory Exec IM 760301 01E 8 1 eea paJ01S y Burnes pue ejeg Burjjeoeg pue Buros Ile 8 1 Setting the Store Mode Explanation To store data parameters such as the store mode the store count the store interval and the store reservation time must be specified before executing the operation This section explains the store mode For the procedure on how to set the store count the store interval and the store reservation time see section 8 2 for the procedure on how to start the storage operation see section 8 4 Store Mode You can select the timing used to start or end the storage operation from the choices below Manual This is the manual mode When you press STORE the numeric data or waveform display data can be stored at the specified store interval for the specified store IM 760301 01E 8 2 Setting the Store Count the Store Interval and the Store Reservation Time a amp Lave SYNC SOURCE NULL FILE 4 JAGE SAVE NU Setting the St
204. ection 10 4 The text font that is displayed can be selected from two types of fonts Setting the Brightness of the Screen For procedures see section 10 5 The brightness of the LCD monitor can be adjusted Setting the Display Colors For procedures see section 10 6 The colors for graphical elements such as the waveform background scale and cursor and text elements such as the menu and the menu background can be selected Set the color using a ratio of red R green G and blue B Setting the Key Lock or Shift Lock For procedures see section 10 7 Key lock can be used to prevent inadvertent operation errors Shift lock can be used to reduce the number of times you press the Shift key Help Function For the procedure see section 10 8 A brief explanation on operation or function can be viewed Master Slave Synchronized Measurement For procedures see section 10 9 With the master instrument outputting a measurement start signal and the slave instrument receiving the signal synchronized measurement on two instruments can be achieved Self Test Function For procedures see section 11 3 A self test can be performed to check whether the instrument is operating properly Components such as the internal memory ROM and RAM and the operation keys can be tested 2 32 IM 760301 01E Chapter 3 Before Starting Measurements Handling Precautions 3 1 Read the Safety Precautions Safety Precautions
205. ection 3 9 Direct input is not possible Shunt type Shunt type current current sensor See section 3 10 sensors cannot be used Clamp type current sensor voltage output type Voltage wiring See section 3 10 Clamp type sensor current output type See section 3 11 CT See section 3 11 Notes when Replacing Other Power Meters with the WT3000 In three phase three wire systems the wiring system may be different between the WT3000 and another product another digital power meter due to the differences in the wired input element To achieve correct measurements check the wiring system WT3000 WT2000 WT1600 WT1000 PZ4000 The wiring system of three phase wT230 three wire system differs WT130 2533 2532 etc For example if you replace the WT2000 used in a three phase three wire system with the WT3000 and leave the wiring unchanged the measured power of each element is different between the WT2000 and the WT3000 Refer to this manual and wire the system correctly 3 12 IM 760301 01E 3 9 Wiring the Circuit under Measurement for Direct Input The measurement cable is wired directly from the circuit under measurement to the voltage current input terminal To prevent the possibility of electric shock and damage to the instrument follow the precautions given in section 3 5 Wiring Precautions Connecting to the Input Terminal Voltage Input Terminal The termina
206. ectories and files that can be displayed in the file list is 2500 If the number of directories and files in a directory exceeds 2500 the file list randomly displays 2500 of the directories and files f you change the extension of the file such as on a PC the file can no longer be loaded Files that do not have an archive attribute are not displayed in the File List window Do not remove the archive attribute of the files saved by the WT3000 using your PC Up to 42 characters can be displayed in the path If the path exceeds 42 characters is displayed at the end of the character string File names are not case sensitive Comments are case sensitive In addition the following names cannot be used due to limitations of MS DOS AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK COM1 to COM9 and LPT1 to LPT9 fthe setup parameters that are saved to a file are loaded the key settings are changed to the loaded information and cannot be undone It is recommended that you first save the current setup parameters and then load the setup parameters from a file Setup parameters such as the date and time and communications are not saved Therefore loading setup parameters from a file will not change these settings Setup parameters that have been saved on products with firmware version having incompatible data cannot be loaded Setup parameters saved on models with a different product version element configuration or options as well as models with
207. ed ON IM 760301 01E 2 11 uondiosog jeuonouneJ H 2 3 Measurement Conditions Averaging For procedures see section 4 9 The averaging function is effective when reading of the numeric display is difficult due to fluctuations This occurs when the fluctuation of the power supply or the load is large or when the input signal frequency is low Measurement Functions of Normal Measurement Two types exponential average and moving average are available Exponential Average The numeric data can be exponentially averaged using a specified attenuation constant Averaging is performed according to the following equation Mn Dn 1 K Dn Dn 1 Dn Displayed value that has been exponentially averaged n times The displayed value Dj at the first time is M1 Dn 1 Displayed value that has been exponentially averaged n 1 times Mn Measured data at the n time K Attenuation constant select from 2 4 8 16 32 and 64 Moving Average The numeric data can be linearly averaged using a specified average count Averaging is performed according to the following equation Mn m 1 sbses Mn 2 Mn 1 Mn Dn m Dn Displayed value obtained by linearly averaging m points of numeric data from the n m 1 to n time Mn m 1 Measured data at the n m 1 time Mn 2 Measured data at the n 2 time Mn 4 Measured data at the n 1 time Mn Measured data at the n time m Average count select from 8 16
208. ed Scaling Item Canam Loa Timer Setting sita T AW cr sr Element 1 1 0009 Element 2 1 0000 Auto Cal PFF ON Element 3 1 0000 Element 4 1 0000 D A Output if 1 Rated Time Note Some of the parameters that can be changed using the cursor keys are reset to their initial values when the RESET key is pressed 4 Entering Character Strings The equation for the user defined function units file names and comments can be entered using the keyboard that is displayed on the screen The cursor keys and SET are used to operate the keyboard to enter the character strings IM 760301 01E 3 27 sjuswainseayy Bunes o40Jog BH 3 14 Entering Values and Character Strings Entering the Equation for the User Defined Function The figure below shows the keyboard that appears when setting the equation for the user defined function Long equations can be temporarily held in the internal memory so that it can be used in other equations 1 Entering the Equation and Temporarily Storing It Press the A and W cursor keys to select the desired character Long function names can be selected by pressing one key Press SET to enter characters in the entry box If there are characters already in the entry box use the and gt cursor keys to select the entry position Repeat steps 1 and 2 to enter all the characters After entering all the characters select ENT on the
209. edural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 To display waveforms set the display mode to Wave Numeric Wave Wave Trend or Wave Bar 1 Press FORM to display the Wave Form menu If the waveform display is at the lower section of the screen on the split display press SHIFT FORM LOWER FORM For the setup procedure see section 6 1 Displayed only on models with the harmonic measurement option 2 Press the Display Setting soft key to display the Disp Setting menu Selecting Whether to Interpolate the Display 3 Press the Interpolate soft key to select or Wave For Format Single Ed Time div Display Settings g Wave Mapping Wave Form M Format Single S Time div Sms i Trigger E wee w 6 18 IM 760301 01E 6 7 Selecting the Display Interpolation and Graticule Changing the Graticule 3 Pressthe Graticule soft key to select Lal OF Wave Form Format Single S Time div Sms q Trigger LDisp Settings Interpolate a fl Explanation For functional details see section 2 7 Selecting Whether to Interpolate the Display
210. eeeeeenenen 5 35 Performing Integration Start Stop and Reset sssssseee 5 36 Chapter 6 Waveform Display 6 1 6 2 6 3 A 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 Waveltorm Displ y 5 2 eme cine ot Em a I xo et ieu ended 6 1 Selecting the Waveform to Be Displayed sssssssseeeeneeneneen 6 3 Setting the Time Axis s ucc t ple t adil cited atte su 6 5 Setting the Trigger een tec ee dede i eletti e ea oe 6 7 Zooming Vertically and Moving the Vertical Position een 6 12 Waveform Display on Divided Windows s e 6 15 Selecting the Display Interpolation and Graticule eee 6 18 Turning ON OFF the Scale Value and Waveform Label sess 6 21 Cursor Measurements it tee Pete m o Ee ei Eben De e Roa 6 23 Chapter 7 Trend Display 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 Trend Display si 5 a e n tef obe ite feptem betur e natin ld 7 1 Selecting the Trend Data to Be Displayed ssssssseeee 7 8 Selecting the Trend Display Target ssssssssseeeeeeneeeen nennen 7 5 Setting the Time AXIS ni eer REOR pie tn d a AERO 7 8 Setting the Scale s nce eee e aec e b e Ee ente quare gue 7 10 Displaying Trends on Divided Windows 7 12 Restartirig the Trend diee enne pente rti n eiue Reve ERE nn eee aaRS 7 14 Cursor Meas rement x ou c RERO o a aaae REED INE 7 15 Chapte
211. een Press the WAVE key to display the waveform on the entire screen Displaying the Waveform by Dividing the Display into Halves Split Display Numeric Wave The numeric data and waveform are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For details on how to set the numeric data display see section 3 15 and chapter 5 Wave Bar The waveform and bar graph are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows Displayed only on models with the harmonic measurement option For details on how to set the bar graph display see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Wave Trend The waveform and trend are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For details on how to set the trend see chapter 7 In addition the measurement period of the numeric data and that of the waveform data may not be synchronized Measurement Mode during Waveform Display When waveforms are displayed the measurement mode indication at the upper left corner of the screen is set to Normal Mode Trg In this mode a measurement is made after a trigger see section 6 3 is detected for each update interval Note Ifthe trigger is not set correctly the start position the signal level at the left end of the screen of the waveform display may be unstable or waveforms may not be displayed While integration is in progress or is suspended the measurement mode indication at the upper left corner of the screen is set to Normal Mode even when
212. elatively Large is used I U When Set to U I The measured voltage is determined by subtracting the voltage applied to the current terminal from the voltage value of each element The voltage applied to the current terminal is derived by the equation the measured current x the input resistance of the current terminal When Set to I U The measured current is determined by subtracting the current that flows through the voltage terminal from the current value of each element The current that flows through the voltage terminal is derived by the equation the measured voltage the input resistance of the voltage terminal When Set to OFF Neither of the above compensation is performed IM 760301 01E 5 23 1ueulioJnseoe u JOMOd E 5 8 Setting the Wiring Efficiency and Two Wattmeter Method Compensations Efficiency Compensation The power measurement on the secondary side of a power transformer such as an inverter includes loss caused by the measurement instrument This loss appears as error in the efficiency computation This function compensates for this loss For details see appendix 8 Compensation for the Two Wattmeter Method In the two power wattmeter method an error results when current flows through the neutral line This function computes the current the flows through the neutral line for measurements using the two wattmeter method with a three phase three wire 3V3A System and adds the compensation value to the
213. element is displayed in the voltage or current range indicator 7 segment LED and at the upper right corner of the screen Example of the display at the upper right corner Element Voltage range Voltage mode Displayed when set to auto range Voltage u1 1000vrms Auto YOKOGAWA 4 Element1 U141000Vrms 11 30Arms Element2 u2 1000vrms Selecting the Target Element to Be Configured Only the indicators of installed elements illuminate sequentially When the independent setting of input elements is OFF the element switches for each wiring unit according to the wiring system Setting the Voltage and Current Ranges There are two types of ranges fixed and auto Fixed Range The range is set in reference to the RMS value of the input signal Voltage Range When the crest factor is set to 3 Select 15 V 30 V 60 V 100 V 150 V 300 V 600 V or 1000 V When the crest factor is set to 6 Select 7 5 V 15 V 30 V 50 V 75 V 150 V 300 V or 500 V Current range When the crest factor is set to 3 Select 500 mA 1 A 2 A 5 A 10 A 20 A or 30 A When the crest factor is set to 6 Select 250 mA 500 mA 1 A 2 5 A 5 A 10 A or 15 A Note Therange is set in reference to the RMS value of the input signal For example if a 100 Vrms sinusoid is to be applied set the range to 100 V Forthe list of the range settings of all input elements see section 3 16 Displaying the Setup Parameter List Auto Rang
214. elow the phrase press the cursor vs Cv MEASURING RMS 0 WIRING INPUT INFO MEAN DC RMEAN H keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting AUTO MODE a Oo c o o x o lt a v 9 Explanation eO items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 DISPLAY ITEM LOWER ITEM ITEM amp ELEMENT USER USER SET OREMOTE se sas CAL INTEG ELEMENT O AL SHIFT FORM OWER FORM To display trends set the display mode to Trend Numeric Trend Wave Trend or Bar Trend For the setup procedure see section 7 1 Displayed only on models with the harmonic measurement option 1 Press FORM to display the Trend Form menu If the trend display is at the lower section of the screen on the split display press SHIFT FORM LOWER FORM 2 Press the Clear Trend Exec soft key to restart the trend 4 Format Single Ed Trend T div iSl Clear Trend Exec When the trend is restarted the trend up to that point is cleared In addition to pressing the Clear Trend Exec soft key the following operations cause the trend to be restarted Changing the trend display target Changing the time axis horizontal axis setting of the trend 7 14 IM 760301 01E 7 8 Procedure 5 6
215. ement These transformation ratios are used to convert the current sensor output to current IM 760301 01E 1 3 syed Jo suonoun pue sowen Ile 1 2 Setup Menu Display Key and Execution Key T Exe e 7 7 C89 C E o a 59 C Ee E m E FREQ FILTER ama o SCALING Key See section 4 5 Displays a menu for setting the VT ratio CT ratio or power coefficient for each input element These coefficients are used to convert the VT CT output or the power derived from measuring the VT and CT outputs to the voltage current and power of the object being measured LINE FILTER Key See section 4 8 Displays a menu for setting the filter that is inserted into the measurement circuit within the WT3000 for each input element SHIFT LINE FILTER FREQ FILTER Key See section 4 8 Displays a menu for setting the filter that is inserted into the frequency measurement circuit within the WT3000 for each input element AVG Key See section 4 9 Displays a menu for setting the function that calculates the average of measured values SYNC SOURCE Key See section 4 7 Displays a menu for setting the synchronization source for each wiring unit The synchronization source defines the period measurement period over which the sample data is acquired for determining the numeric data measured values such as voltage current and power f all ele
216. en AC voltage of instantaneous value u Umsinot is applied to load resistance R Q is expressed by the equation below Im denotes the maximum current Um i sinot Imsinot R If expressed using rms values the equation is U R There is no phase difference between a current flowing through a resistive circuit and the voltage MATO p Inductance Current i when AC voltage of instantaneous value u Umsinot is applied to a coil load of inductance L H is expressed by the equation below ot gt Imsin 2 p ot 2 Um i Sin If expressed using rms values the equation is U Xi X is called inductive reactance and is defined as X L The unit is Q Inductance works to counter current changes increase or decrease and causes the current phase to lag the voltage I L ir U a Capacity Current i when AC voltage of instantaneous value u Umsinwt is applied to a capacitive load C F is expressed by the equation below T ot msin 2 p Um T l pou ot 5 If expressed using rms values the equation is U Xc Xc is called capacitive reactance and is defined as Xc 1 oC The unit is Q When the polarity of the voltage changes the largest charging current of the same polarity as the voltage flows through the capacitor When the voltage decreases discharge current of opposite polarity as the voltage flows Thus the current phase leads the voltage c
217. end WAVE UMP sano RATE HOLD LOCAL c o E CAL v ITEM FORM USER genere INTEG sur i ks Y LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above MOTOR FRE the soft keys E FILTER hamser measure prne source In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the CURSOR O NULL cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and m p character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 MENU Press FILE to display the File menu Press the Utility soft key The Utility menu and the File List dialog box appear Press the Function soft key to display the Function menu Press the Delete soft key to display the Delete menu belete f Function D Function Delete Delete a mee M File Item Setup T Set Reset Copy All Set Rename gt g Property MakeDi r Filter aul Attribute Attribute Delete E Exec e Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory 5 Same as the procedures given in Selecting the Storage Medium and Selecting the Save Destination Directory in section 9 3 Format HE c x 9 20 IM 760301 01E 9 7 Deleting Files Specifying the File to B
218. enm 9 17 TIES COPYING OF 3 enn eee meer n ei 9 23 files renaming of 9 27 Filter 8 15 9 18 filte 2 irme nn eene 2 11 4 22 Float 8 14 8 17 OM oi hie E T 10 5 form factor App 15 Forrmal 1c ta ice eee tpe Latte dae SE eed aep D 9 3 format fa erts 9 2 Format EXEC 5 nani e erp adepto poe He ee EE TEE UA 9 3 FREQ FILTER 4 22 TROQUGMCY oe tn anrea ceo erred reete d boty 5 6 frequency filter essen 4 22 Frequency Meas Item 5 10 frequency measurement eee eee eee eee eeeee tee eeneeeeeeee 5 10 frequency measurement source ssssssss 5 11 front panel ETP client f nctlOn uote cene 2 30 MEME MM Function function select keys eeseeseeeeeeeeeeneennenen fundamental component esses fundamental frequency n fundamental wave sssssseseeeeene fUS9 ie eo ee eg FUSE rating cots ener herren rines G Page Gothic we 10 5 GP IB 2 91 Graph Color etm cere tee atin 10 8 graphic color eeeeeene 10 8 10 10 Graticule graticule H Page handling precautions ssseeen 3 1 harmonic component ssessseeeseeseeeeeneneee App 19 harmonic distortion factor App 19 harmonic measurement l Page iaar pits E a MR 5 6 cp 5 6 Be eI MENTIS 5
219. ent Executes one measurement during the hold condition Zero level compensation Null Performs zero level compensation 12 8 IM 760301 01E 12 5 Functions Frequency measurement Item Specifications Measured item Select up to two of the frequencies of the voltage or current that is input to the input element For models with the frequency measurement add on option the frequencies of all voltages and currents applied to the input element are measured Measurement method Reciprocal method Measurement range Data update rate Measurement range 50 ms 45 Hz lt f lt 1MHz 100 ms 25 Hz lt f lt 1 MHz 250 ms 10 Hz lt f lt 500 kHz 500 ms 5 Hz lt f lt 200 kHz 1s 2 5 Hz f lt 100 kHz 2s 1 5 Hz lt f lt 50 kHz 5s 0 5 Hz lt f lt 20 kHz 10s 0 25 Hz lt f lt 10 kHz 20s 0 15 Hz lt f lt 5 kHz Accuracy 0 05 of reading When the input signal level is greater than or equal to 25 mV external current sensor input or 150 mA direct current input and the signal is greater than or equal to 30 0 1 Hz to 440 Hz with frequency filter ON 10 440 Hz to 500 kHz or 30 500 kHz to 1 MHz of the measurement range Except input greater than or equal to 50 of the measurement range when the frequency is less than or equal twice the lower limit of frequency described above Add 0 05 of reading when the external current sensor input is 50 mV or less Twice these values f
220. ent A D converter in the same fashion as the voltage signal from the current sensor The voltage signal that is input to the voltage A D converter or current A D converter is converted to digital values at an interval of approximately 5 us The digital values are isolated by the pulse transformer and passed to the DSP In the DSP the measured values are derived based on the digital values The measured values are then transmitted to the CPU Various computed values are determined from the measured values These measured values and computed values are displayed as measurement functions of normal measurement output through a D A converter or output through communications The measurement functions of harmonic measurement option are derived in the following manner The voltage signal input to the A D converter is converted to digital values at a sampling frequency that is determined by the PLL source signal The measured value of each item of harmonic measurement is derived by performing an FFT based on the converted digital values using the DSP 2 2 IM 760301 01E 2 2 Measurement Function and Measurement Period Types of Measurement Functions during Normal Measurement The data numeric data of measurement functions is measured or computed from the sampled data described in Measurement Period on page 2 7 1 The WT3000 samples the instantaneous values of the voltage and current signals at a specified sample rate
221. ent or all elements collectively Select the signal to be the synchronization source from the choices below The selectable items vary depending on the installed elements U1 11 U2 I2 U3 I3 U4 I4 Ext Clk external clock and None Note o L If you specify no synchronization source by selecting None the entire sampled data within the data update interval is the data used to determine the numeric data When measuring DC signals this method can be used to prevent errors in the detection of the measurement period caused by noise When Setting the Synchronization Source to Ext CIk Apply a clock signal to the external clock input connector EXT CLK on the rear panel according to the following specifications EXT CLK A Ext Clk Specifications Item Specifications Connector type BNC connector Input level TTL Input waveform 50 duty ratio rectangular wave N CAUTION Applying a voltage outside the range of 0 to 5 V to the external clock input connector EXT CLK can damage the instrument IM 760301 01E 4 19 4 7 Setting the Measurement Period Synchronization source Input signal U1 Input signal U2 Input signal U3 Measurement Period When the data update rate is 50 ms 100 ms 5 s 10 s or 20 s The measurement period is set between the first point where the synchronization Source crosses the level zero point center of
222. er if the data update interval is 50 ms 100 ms 5 s 10 s or 20 s the signal level of the synchronization source must satisfy the input signal level of frequency measurement see section 12 5 110 for the maximum range of direct voltage and current inputs The accuracy for 110 to 13096 of the measurement range is reading error x 1 5 Lower limit of measurement frequency Same as the lower limit of measurement frequency for voltage and current Power factor A influence When A 0 Add apparent power reading x 0 03 in the range of 45 to 66 Hz For other frequency ranges add only the apparent power reading x 0 03 0 05 x f KHz When0 A 1 Add the power reading x tano x influence when A 0 is the phase angle between the voltage and current Line filter influence When the cut off frequency is 500 Hz 45 Hz lt f lt 66 Hz Add 0 3 of reading f lt 45Hz Add 1 of reading When the cut off frequency is 5 5 kHz f lt 66 Hz Add 0 3 of reading 66 Hz f 500 Hz Add 1 of reading When the cut off frequency is 50 kHz f lt 500 Hz Add 0 3 of reading 500 lt f lt 5 kHz Add 1 of reading Temperature coefficient Same as the temperature coefficient for voltage and current One year accuracy reading error of the accuracy at 6 months after calibration x 1 5 Accuracy when the crest factor is set to 6 Accuracy obtained by doubling the measurement range error fo
223. erminal Current Input Terminal When the voltage of the circuit under measurement is being applied to the current input terminals do not touch the current sensor input terminals Since these terminals are electrically connected inside the instrument this act is dangerous When connecting measurement cables from an external current sensor to the current sensor input connector remove the cables connected to the current input terminals In addition when the voltage of the circuit under measurement is being applied to the current sensor input terminal do not touch the current input terminals Since these terminals are electrically connected inside the instrument this act is dangerous The screws used on the terminal binding post are M6 screws Use one of the following methods wind the wire around the screw use the 758921 Fork Terminal Adapter that is sold separately or pass the crimp on lugs through the screw axis Then tighten firmly by holding the terminal knob Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems The selectable wiring systems vary depending on the number of input elements that are installed in the instrument You may be able to select only a single wiring system or two wiring systems For details see Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems in section 2 3 Measurement Conditions General Handling Precautions of the VT and CT Do not short the secondary side of the VT as it may damage the VT
224. et the sum of multiple measurement function symbols in the operand of the equation an equation consisting of up to 4 terms can be created using Udef1 and Udef2 Equation Examples Efficiency of a Single Phase Two Wire Input Single Phase Two Wire Output Device Given Input Power of element 1 P1 and Output Power of element 2 P2 the efficiency can be determined using the following equation Efficiency equation P2 P1 Input power P1 Converter Output power P2 Inverter etc Efficiency of a Single Phase Two Wire Input Three Phase Three Wire Output Device Given Input Power of element 1 P1 and Output X power of elements 2 and 3 PXA the efficiency can be determined using the following equation Efficiency equation PZA P1 Efficiency of a Three Phase Three Wire Input Three Phase Three Wire Output Device Given Input X power of elements 1 and 2 PZA and Output X power of elements 3 and 4 PXB the efficiency can be determined using the following equation Efficiency equation PXB PZA Efficiency of a Single Phase Two Wire Input Motor Given Input Power of element 1 P1 and Output Motor output Pm the efficiency can be determined using the following equation Efficiency equation Pm P1 Efficiency of a Three Phase Three Wire Input Motor Given Input X power of elements 1 and 2 PZA and Output Motor output Pm the efficiency can be determined using the following equation
225. exists 9 3 609 610 Contains invalid characters 9 3 611 Media full Delete unnecessary file s or use another disk 9 2 to 9 7 612 613 File system failure Check using another disk If the same message still appears maintenance service is required 614 File is protected 9 6 615 Physical format error Reformat the medium If the same error occurs 9 2 the instrument is probably unable to execute a format on this medium 616 File system failure Check using another disk If the same message to 620 still appears maintenance service is required 621 File is damaged Check the file 622 File system failure Check using another disk If the same message to 641 still appears maintenance service is required 643 Media failure Check the medium to 653 655 File system failure Check using another disk If the same message to 664 still appears maintenance service is required 665 Cannot load this file format File was stored on other models or other versions 666 File is now being accessed Execute after access is made 671 Save data not found Check for presence of data 9 3 9 4 674 Initializing file system Please wait 9 2 675 Cannot load this file 679 Printer error Maintenance service is required 681 Paper empty Load a roll chart 682 Printer over heat Power off immediately 683 See the Communication Interface User s Manual IM760301 17E IM 760301 01E 11 2 Error Messages and Corrective Act
226. f active power apparent power and reactive power are determined by the wiring method voltage range and current range as shown below For the actual values of the power range see section 4 3 Setting the Measurement Range during Direct Input Wiring System Power Range 1P2W single phase two wire voltage range x current range 1P3W single phase three wire voltage range x current range x 2 3P3W three phase three wire when the voltage and current ranges on the corresponding elements are set to the same range 3P3W 3V3A three voltage three current 3P4W three phase four wire voltage range x current range x 3 when the voltage and current ranges on the corresponding elements are set to the same range IM 760301 01E 2 9 uondiosog jeuonouneJ H 2 3 Measurement Conditions Scaling For procedures see sections 4 4 and 4 5 When applying current signals via an external current sensor or applying voltage or current signals via the external VT voltage transformer or CT current transformer the transformation ratio or coefficient can be specified When Applying Current Signals via an External Current Sensor The output of current sensors that output voltage such as shunts and clamps can be input to the current sensor connector EXT and measured Set how many millivolts the current sensor outputs when 1 A of current flows transformation ratio Then the input signal can be made to correspond to
227. f all the elements and measurement functions are highlighted indicating that all items will be stored Deselecting all items at once during normal measurement only Press the cursor keys to select All OFF Press SET The highlighting of the buttons to the left of all the elements and measurement functions are cleared indicating that all items will not be stored During normal measurement List Item During harmonic measurement List Item 5 Ali ON 6 All OFF Preset 1 o Preset 2 Element 1 o Element 2 c Element 3 c Element 4 Element v Element 5 Element 6 p Z z Element 1 c Element 2 c Element 3 o Element 4 p Element 5 c Element 6 i Urns Unean Udc Uac Function fej P ej S j Inean Tac Tac 9 wu 3 Q A ej S Rs Xs Frequ ej o Others U peak I peak CFI FfI cS E M aud ZEA RS Pc Rp Wp F4 dUac alac we Be 5 ess E Almean Vet nZ are preset during normal measurement only s to s Preset1 or Preset2 Press SET to Items specified in Preset1 List Iten 2 All ON c All OFF c Preset 1 Preset 2 Eienent gi Element i sj Element Z Element 3 sjWlement 4 M o Function Ude Ide q Freq I peak I FFU xs 9 up sg oq Fi 9 5 dUdc 8 dImean s AIde a Press the cursor keys to select the element or measurement f wish to spec
228. f each measurement function can be held The communication output data while the display is held is the held numeric data Single Measurement For procedures see section 4 11 While in the hold condition a measurement is performed once at the specified data update rate and enters the hold condition IM 760301 01E 2 13 uondiosog jeuonouneJ 2 4 Power Measurement When the screen is set to numeric display measured data such as voltage current and power can be displayed The screen can be divided into top and bottom halves so that the numeric data are displayed simultaneously with waveforms see section 2 7 trends see section 2 8 or bar graphs see section 2 8 1 Only on models with the harmonic measurement option Display Resolution The display resolution for voltage current active power apparent power reactive power and so on is 600000 When the range rating rated value of the specified range is applied the X function of voltage current active power apparent power reactive power and so on is set to the decimal point position and unit of the element with the lowest display resolution of the target elements For the display resolution during integration see section 5 13 Numeric Display Related to Power Measurement For procedures see section 5 1 Selecting the Number of Displayed Items The number of items can be selected from 4 8 16 All Single List and Dual List 2 Only on models with the
229. fficiency of the device can be computed by setting the equation n P B PZA x 100 On models with the motor evaluation function motor version the energy conversion efficiency of the motor can be computed by setting the equation n Pm PZA x 100 or Pm PZB x 100 Setting the Efficiency Compensation For procedures see section 5 8 Compensates for the measurement loss that occurs due to the wiring used for measurement or the internal impedance of the power meter There are two functions used to compensate for the loss caused by the measurement instrument For details see appendix 8 Wiring Compensation Compensates for the loss caused by the wiring system of each element Efficiency Compensation The power measurement on the secondary side of a power transformer such as an inverter includes loss caused by the measurement instrument This loss appears as error in the efficiency computation This function compensates for this loss 2 16 IM 760301 01E 2 5 Computation Setting the Compensation for Two Wattmeter Method For procedures see section 5 8 In the two wattmeter method an error results when current flows through the neutral line This function computes the current the flows through the neutral line for measurements using the two wattmeter method with a three phase three wire 3V3A system and adds the compensation value to the measured power For details see appendix 8 J Selecting the Computing E
230. fied The user defined functions allow you to determine physical values other than those of the measurement functions by combining operands The measurement functions that can be assigned to the efficiency equation are fixed to power and motor output However by using the user defined function an equation consisting of measurement functions other than power and motor output can be set up to determine ratios other than efficiency IM 760301 01E 5 15 1ueulioJnseoe u JOMOd I 5 4 Setting the User Defined Function Operators The following operators can be used to create an equation Operator Example Description U E1 OR1 U E2 OR1 Basic arithmetic of the measurement functions ABS ABS P E1 ORT P E2 ORT Absolute value of the measurement function SQR SQR I E1 OR0 Square of the measurement function SQRT SQRT ABS I E1 OR3 Square root of the measurement functions LOG LOG U E1 OR25 Natural log of the measurement functions LOG10 LOG10 U E1 OR25 Common log of the measurement function EXP EXP U E1 OR12 Exponent of the measurement function NEG NEG U E1 OR12 Negation of the measurement function Number and Type of Characters That Can Be Used in the Equation Number of characters 50 characters or less Types of characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard and spaces Equation Examples When determining the rms value of the harmonic components of the voltage signal
231. frame from the top The following figure shows how the waveforms are displayed when all 4 elements are installed with the motor evaluation function motor version the number of division is 4 Quad display of U1 I1 U2 12 U3 13 I4 and Torque is ON and display of U4 and Speed is OFF Auto User I1 I3 Torque The waveforms can be assigned arbitrarily to the divided windows regardless of whether or not the display is turned ON You can select the display position from 0 to 3 The waveforms are assigned in order starting from number 0 from the top divided window User when the screen is divided into three windows with I1 Speed and Torque set to 0 1 and 3 respectively Displayed in order according to the specified number IM 760301 01E Aejdsiq woane M l 6 7 Selecting the Display Interpolation and Graticule Procedure INPUT INFO d VOLTAGE RANGE ae A Ce MEASURING OEE MODE auro CURRENT RANGE SENSOR RATIO CA MEASURING MopE AUTO DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT OREMOTE numeri WAVE OTHERS ITEM FORM U l P 0 1 6 WP q we USER RE oo ss CAL INTEG ELEMENT LOWER ITEM LOWERFORM 7 USER SET O AL LOCAL s To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the proc
232. function on the motor version Scaling Speed 1 0000 Scaling Torque 1 0000 Scaling Pm 1 0000 Unit Speed rpm Unit Torque Nm Unit Pm Ww Analog Auto Range Speed Off Auto Range Torque Off Range Speed 20V Range Torque 20V Line Filter Off Sync Source None Pulse Range Upper Speed 10000 0000 Range Upper Torque 50 0000 Range Lower Speed 0 0000 Range Lower Torque 50 0000 Rated Upper Torque 50 0000 Rated Upper Rated Freq 15000 Hz Rated Lower Torque 50 0000 Rated Lower Rated Freq 5000 Hz Pulse N Speed 60 Sync Speed Pole 2 Source H PRINT MENU applies to models with the built in printer option Print to Built in Print Format Hard Copy D A Output applies to models with the D A output option Item No Function Element S Order Range Mode 1 U Element 1 Fixed 2 Element 1 Fixed 3 P Element 1 Fixed 4 S Element 1 Fixed 5 Q Element 1 Fixed 6 Element 1 Fixed y4 f Element 1 Fixed 8 fU Element 1 Fixed 9 fl Element 1 Fixed 10 to 20 Fixed App 7 xipueddy Appendix 2 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numeric Data Settings That Are Not Initialized through Initialization MISC Initialize Settings Item Setting FILE File Item Setup IMAGE SAVE Format TIFF Color Off AUTO Naming ON MISC Remote Control GP IB Address 1 RS232 displayed on models with the RS232 communication option Band Rate 19200 Format 8 No 1 Rx Tx No No Terminat
233. g or closing the built in printer cover allow extra space for operation Ambient Temperature and Humidity Ambient temperature 5 to 40 C Ambient humidity 20 to 80 RH when the printer is not used 35 to 8096 RH when using the printer No condensation in either case Do not install the instrument in the following places n direct sunlight or near heat sources Where an excessive amount of soot steam dust or corrosive gas is present Near strong magnetic field sources Near high voltage equipment or power lines Where the level of mechanical vibration is high Onanunstable surface Note For the most accurate measurements use the instrument in the following environment Ambient temperature 23 5 C Ambient humidity 30 to 7596 RH no condensation When using the instrument in a place where the ambient temperature is 5 to 18 C or 28 to 40 C add the temperature coefficient to the accuracy as specified in chapter 12 Wheninstalling the instrument in a place where the ambient humidity is 3096 or below take measures to prevent static electricity such as using an anti static mat Condensation may occur if the instrument is moved to another place where the ambient temperature is higher or if the temperature changes rapidly In this case let the instrument adjust to the new environment for at least one hour before using the instrument When storing the instrument avoid the following places e Where the relati
234. g to the power accuracy For self generated heat caused by current input on an DC input signal add 0 00002 x 1 of reading 0 003 x I mA to the power accuracy is the current reading A The influence from self generated heat continues until the temperature of the shunt resistor inside the WT3000 lowers even if the current input changes to a small value 12 6 IM 760301 01E 12 4 Accuracy Item Specifications When the data update interval is 50 ms add 0 1 of reading to all accuracy figures When the data update interval is 100 ms add 0 05 of reading to all accuracy figures All accuracy figures for 0 1 to 10 Hz are reference values The power accuracy figures for 30 kHz to 100 kHz when the voltage exceeds 750 V are reference values The power accuracy figures for 100 kHz to 1 MHz when the voltage V exceeds 2 2 x 10 f KHz are reference values The power accuracy figures for DC 10 Hz to 45 Hz and 400 Hz to 200 kHz when the current exceeds 20 A are reference values The power accuracy figures for 200 kHz to 500 kHz when the current exceeds 10 A are reference values The power accuracy figures for 500 kHz to 1 MHz when the current exceeds 5 A are reference values Effective input range 0 to 130 of the power range see section 5 2 for DC measurement 130 of the power range for current measurement when the voltage and current are in the range of 1 to 13096 of the measurement range Howev
235. g unit element 1 in this example IM 760301 01E App 33 Symbols Page does CU EE E A E NRI ease 5 6 qj Formula nennen tno nitent nen 5 20 ug mesiaeaths 5 6 X functions of normal measurement P Nein MV ZOON 6 13 U POSION s oiii cr rtr cerro cero 6 13 LR ZOOM I M 6 13 180Lead Eag 5 n em eet ta 5 28 360 degrees nnnm ras 5 28 3P3W 3V3A EA Compensation ssssssssss 5 23 rl e 3 9 A Page Abort AC power accessories optional issii iisas pnaka iv accessories standard 0 0 0 eeeeccececeessesteeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeseeeas iii accuracy active POWET eesseseeeseeeeeennennnennnnennnnnnnnene 5 6 App 18 cord 3 9 aliasing 2 7A ULLC USHER cee re coe cene aerei aaae ada cc erstattet ioa EE 5 2 A RESET iriseora ird ias 9 21 9 24 All Set alternating current vector display of App 16 ambient humidity essen ambient temperature angular velocity oii trece tentem berita nis App 14 apparent power eeeeeeeeeeeeeneennernnennnnne 5 6 App 18 apparent power equation for De HN attenuation constant Nido USE EAEE EEEIEE TITTET OR 5 35 auto calibration 5 85 Auto Naming 1
236. gleList or DualList Display Display Page 1 Displayed only on models with the motor evaluation function motor version 2 Displayed only on models with the harmonic measurement option App 10 IM 760301 01E Endian DataFormat GroupNumber Appendix 3 ASCII Header File Format When waveform display data Wave is saved the following two files are automatically created in the directory e e Waveform display data file wvf ASCII header file hdr The ASCII header files explained here cannot be viewed on the WT3000 Use the data TraceTotalNumber DataOffset Group1 TraceNumber BlockNumber TraceName BlockSize VResolution VOffset VDataType VUnit VPlusOverData VMinusOverData VillegalData VMaxData VMinData HResolution HOffset HUnit Date Time Group2 TraceNumber BlockNumber TraceName BlockSize VResolution U1 1002 1 0000000E 00 0 0000000E 00 FS4 V 9 000000e 02 9 000000e 02 2 0000000E 05 0 0000000E 00 sec 2001 06 30 07 03 03 4 1 U3 1002 1 0000000E 00 3 000000e 03 3 000000e 03 2 0000000E 05 0 0000000E 00 sec 2001 06 30 07 03 03 I3 1002 1 0000000E 00 in such cases as when analyzing the waveforms on your PC 12 1002 1 0000000E 00 0 0000000E 00 3 0000086 03 3 000000e 03 2 0000000E 0 1 Signs 02 1 5006098 02 2 000000 0 0000000E 00 0 000
237. gs and Display Order of Numeric Data Item Setting FORM for Bar displayed on models with the harmonic measurement option Format Single Start Order 1 End Order 100 ITEM for Trend Trend Display On T1 to T8 Trend Items Trend Object T1 Function U Element Element1 Order Trend Scale Trend Object T1 Scaling Auto Upper Scale 1 000E 02 Lower Scale 1 000E 02 FORM for Trend Trend Format Single Trend T div 3 s div FORM for Vector displayed on models with the harmonic measurement option Object XA Numeric On U Mag 1 000 Mag 1 000 USER SET Function1 U peak Function2 U pea Function3 l peak Function4 l peak CURSOR for Wave Wave Cursor Off Wave C1 Trace U1 Wave C2 Trace H Cursor Path Max Wave C1 10 0 ms Wave C2x 40 0 ms CURSOR for Bar displayed on models with the harmonic measurement option Bar Cursor Off Bar C1 1 order Bar C2 x 15 order CURSOR for Trend Trend Cursor Off Trend C1 Trace T1 Trend C2 Trace T2 Trend C1 100 Trend C2 x 900 HRM SET PLL Source U1 Min Order 1 Max Order 100 Thd Formula 1 Total STORE Store Status Off IM 760301 01E Appendix 2 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numeric Data Item Setting STORE SET Mode Store Store To Memory Store Settin Mode Manual Count 100 Store Interval 00 00 00 Store Item Numeric List Item Element1 On U On NULL Null Off MOTOR SET displayed on models with the motor evaluation
238. gt signal External trigger Minimum pulse width when set to 1 k Trigger delay time Internal trigger Selecting the Trigger Slope The up and down movement of a signal level is called a slope When the slope is used as one of the trigger conditions it is called a trigger slope You can select the trigger slope from the following 4 The trigger occurs when the trigger source signal rises above the trigger level from a lower level 4 The trigger occurs when the trigger source signal falls below the trigger level from a higher level e t Trigger occurs on both the rising and falling cases Setting the Trigger Level Trigger level refers to the level through which the trigger slope passes When the slope of the trigger source passes through the specified trigger level on a rising or falling edge a trigger occurs The level can be set in the range of 0 0 to 100 096 Half of the total vertical span of the waveform display screen is considered to be 10096 With the vertical center of the screen taken to be the input zero line the upper and lower limits of the waveform display screen are 100 and 100 respectively If the crest factor is set to 3 the upper and lower limits of the waveform display screen correspond to three times the measurement range if scaled the range after scaling of the voltage current that is set for each element Likewise if the crest factor is set to 6 the upper and
239. gt vector Motor evaluation Integration value Sections 5 11 to 5 14 Delta computation eee Expansion Function User s Chapter 6 Manual IM760301 51E Measured power Voltage Current waveform Chapter 7 Trend Print on the built in printer D A output RGB video signal VGA output Data Acqui sition b Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Output data via communication Interface Output via RS 232 communication GP IB User s Manual Communication Interface communication 1M760301 17E CD ROM User s Manual 1M760301 17E CD ROM viii IM 760301 01E Contents Checking the Contents of the Package cceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeteaeeeeeeseaeeseeeseaeesaeeeaeeseaeeeeeeneeeeaes ii Sately Precautions iei on ence andes tec Ee Ve Ten dd eu su d LE ER og e se pa ER e Se cu eatin Aaa Eia V Conventions Used in This Manual ssssseseseeeeeneeeeenene nennen nnne nnne nennen nnne vii FIOW Ee Rev rua viii Chapter 1 Names and Functions of Parts 1 1 1 2 Front Panel Rear Panel and Top Panel ccccccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecnaeeeeeeeseneeeeeeteeeaees 1 1 Setup Menu Display Key and Execution Key sssseeeeeeenene 1 3 Chapter 2 Functional Description 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 System Configuration and Block Diagram ssseeeneennenenene 2 1 Measurement Function and Measurement Period
240. harmonic measurement option Example in Which Eight Items Are Displayed Urms1 0 10639 w Irms1 16741 8 B A 98 P41 0 1651 ls1 0 1781 wa c 0 0 0669 wer fv 0 92688 9i D 22 046 fut 4 1004 wr Example in Which All Items Are Displayed Element and wiring system rarer d Element1 Element2 Element3 Element4 c Voltage l Ted sl awie I Sr Ke partent 500mArms 500mArms 500mArms 500mArms o u 105 715 105 746 105 620 000 c tA 1 569 215m 565 763m 0 000m 1592m 2 P two 55 8692 55 5459 0 0000 0 0000 s Iva 1 60 1748 59 8274 0 0000 0 0000 Q var 22 3526 22 2255 0 0000 0 0000 o A t 1 0 92845 0 92844 Error E C lp 21 806 D 21 808 Error S o fu Hz 1 50 000 50 000 50 000 Error G 5 fl Hz 1 7288k 1 9361k Error Error a g U pklv 1 148 617 148 676 148 509 0 119 o U pklv 1 148 622 148 669 148 506 0 104 I pktA 1 1 04405 1 04036 0 000m 6 537m I pkt 1 1 04668 1 04046 0 000m 5 616m cfu E 1 1 406 1 406 1 406 Error cti E 1 1 839 1 839 4 105 Pc Ww 1 55 9683 55 6440 0 0000 Error 2 14 IM 760301 01E 2 4 Power Measurement Changing the Displayed Items By selecting a displayed item the numeric data value that is displayed at the position can be changed Urms1 0 10496 w Urms1 0 10513 w Irms1 1 6946 Change the measurement rms1 1 6929 P1 0 1650 w function of the third item gt At 0 92791 1 0
241. he Message menu 4 Press the ENG or JPN soft key to select the message language Selecting the Menu Language 3 Press the Menu Language soft key 4 Press the JPN or ENG soft key to select the menu language ga Message Conti M Message Message System Language JPN G Language Overview 3 ENG enu ENG JPN Remote CHN ENG Control Lcp Brightness Brightness CHN 2 2 Key Lock Key Lock Key Lock prr o brr ON PFF ON Shift Lock Shift Lock Shift Lock prr ON prr ON PFF ON Crest Factor Crest Factor Crest Factor CF6 EF3 cr6 EF3 cr6 4 IM 760301 01E 3 35 3 17 Selecting the Message Language Explanation Selecting the Message Language An error message is displayed when an error occurs Select the language to use to display the message and the menu from the choices below The error codes for the error messages are the same For details on the error messages see section 11 2 JPN Japanese ENG English Selecting the Menu Language The language used on the menu can be selected from the following JPN Japanese ENG English 3 36 IM 760301 01E Chapter 4 Measurement Conditions 4 1 Selecting the Wiring System Procedure To exit the menu during ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE operation press ESC eO located above the soft keys GO CA Een Cw In the procedural am explanatio
242. he ambient temperature and humidity are within the 3 2 specifications Check that noise is not affecting the measurement 3 1 3 5 Check the wiring of the measurement cable 3 8 to 3 11 Check the wiring system 3 8 to 3 11 4 1 Check that the line filter is turned OFF 4 8 Check the measurement period settings 4 7 Power cycle the instrument 3 4 Keys do not work Check the REMOTE indicator If the REMOTE indicator is ON press the LOCAL key to turn it OFF Check that key lock is OFF 10 7 Perform a key test If it fails servicing is required 11 3 Triggering does not work Check the trigger conditions 6 4 Check that the trigger source is being applied 6 4 Unable to make harmonic measurements Check the PLL source settings E Check that the PLL source input signal is within the specifications 1 Unable to print The printer head may be damaged or worn out Servicing required Unable to recognize the medium Check the format of the medium If necessary format the medium 9 2 The medium may be damaged Unable to save data to the selected medium If necessary format the storage medium 9 2 Check the free space on the medium Remove unnecessary files as 9 2 necessary or use a new medium Unable to set or control the instrument via the communication interface Check that the GP IB address or the parameter settings of the serial interface satisfy the specifications Check that the interface satisfie
243. he data L Store Set Mode Store tu Recall File D File A TEC iori initialized Store Setting Setting q gt Bancel g Convert 1 Convert Memory Memoru Initialize Menory Exec E itialize 8 10 IM 760301 01E 8 4 Storing Data Starting the Store Operation 7 8 Press STORE The STORE key illuminates The storage operation starts according to the following conditions depending on the store mode see section 8 1 During manual mode Starts the storage operation When STORE is pressed the first storage operation is executed Store Start is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen During real time mode The instrument enters the store ready condition and Store Ready is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen The storage operation starts at the reservation time for starting the operation When the reservation time for starting the storage operation is reached the first storage operation is executed Store Start is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen During integration synchronization mode ke instrument enters the store ready condition and Store Ready is ayed in the upper left corner of the screen When integration starts the in the toragt age o ion auto depending on M e moder The E ORE indicator above and to the left of the The storage operation a Obs speci ed store count of data
244. he data rate is 250 ms 500 ms 1 s or 2 s the measurement period is equal to the data update interval Measurement Functions of Harmonic Measurement The measurement period is the first 9000 points from the beginning of the data update interval at the harmonic sampling frequency IM 760301 01E 2 7 uondiosog jeuonouneJ 2 3 Measurement Conditions Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems For procedures see section 4 1 The selectable patterns of wiring systems vary depending on the number of input elements that are installed in the instrument You may be able to select only a single wiring system or two wiring systems You can select one of the following five wiring systems 1P2W Single phase two wire 1P3W Single phase three wire 3P3W Three phase three wire 3PAW Three phase four wire 3P3W 3V3A Three voltage three current In this manual the symbolic expression 3P3W is used to indicate both three phase three wire system and three voltage three current system To differentiate between the two three voltage three current system is expressed as 3P3W 3V34A The input element assignment to wiring units ZA and XB is determined from the wiring system pattern This allows x functions of voltage current active power apparent power reactive power power factor phase difference and other parameters to be determined For the relationship between the wiring system and the determination of
245. he input signal period does not have to be detected In addition the measurement period always matches between all input elements It is recommended that this method be used when it is difficult to match the measurement period between the input and output signals such as in the aforementioned example of 3 Power Transformer with Single Phase AC Input and Three Phase AC Output In principle this method is superior in obtaining highly stable measured values because factors such as errors in period detection do not exist Exponential Average for Measuring Period Yn Yn 1 L1 Xn n sampled data in the measurement period Yn Output value of the n exponential average in the measurement period Yn 1 Output value of the n 1 exponential average in the measurement period A Constant This equation is stacked several stages to derive the measured value The last value in the measurement period Yn is displayed as the measured value Data Update Rate and Averaging Method Setting the Measurement Period Computing Data update rate mathod Required Not required Required ASSP Average for the Synchronous Source Period EAMP Exponential Average for Measuring Period App 30 IM 760301 01E Appendix 7 Data Update Rate and Computing Equation AC signals fluctuate repetitively when viewed instantaneously The power of AC signals can be measured by taking the average of the repeating periods or
246. he measurement range or synchronization source can be set independently for each input element OFF The measurement range or synchronization source of input elements 1 to 3 is set to the same setting This is convenient in that the settings of the measurement range and synchronization source can be done simultaneously when measuring a three phase device suonipuo 1ueuaunseo y BH Settings That Are Matched between Input Elements When the Independent Setting of Input Elements Is Turned OFF Measurement range including auto range ON OFF Voltage Current mode Synchronization source setting Settings That Can Be Set Independently Even When the Independent Setting of Input Elements Is Turned OFF Scaling value VT ratio CT ratio and power coefficient Input filter line filter and frequency filter These settings can be set independently for each input element regardless of whether the independent setting of input elements is turned ON OFF Ifa wiring unit ZA or 2B is specified and the independent setting of input elements is changed from ON to OFF the measurement range and synchronization source settings of each input element are changed as follows The measurement range is set to the maximum range on all input elements included in the wiring unit The external sensor input range has precedence over the direct input range for the current range The voltage current mode and auto range settings are changed to match the
247. he screen to show the numeric data and trends other than waveforms bar graphs harmonic measurement option or vectors harmonic measurement option Pressing the ITEM key explained later while showing the trends bar graphs or vectors opens a menu for selecting the displayed items corresponding to the respective display type Pressing the FORM key explained later while showing the trends bar graphs or vectors opens a menu for selecting the displayed format corresponding to the respective display type Any two of the display types numeric data waveforms trends or bar graph can be displayed simultaneously on the top and bottom halves of the display IM 760301 01E 1 5 syed Jo suonoun pue sowen Ile 1 2 Setup Menu Display Key and Execution Key DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT vus sano omens werg ruven ITEM FORM USER nd Gam Gro LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL 8 suc menm avs zs mise 7 CURSOR o TEM Key See section 5 1 6 4 6 5 7 2 7 3 and 7 6 For details on bar graphs and vector displays option see the Expansion Function User s Manual 1M760301 51E Displays a menu for selecting the displayed items according to the display type selected with the NUMERIC WAVE or OTHERS key on the previous page SHIFT ITEM LOWER ITEM Key See section 5 1 6 4 6 5 7 2 7 3 a
248. he storage operation staps se conditions depending on th amp store 8 directory indicated by Pathz Automatically Stopping the Stoff p M nd AA R Be Disptayed in a Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the ak Same as step 8 under Specifying the File tB on page 11 15 ile List Qialog Box Viewing the Properties Same as steps 8 to 13 under Viewing Properties on pa Note Memory according to step 3 on page 8 13 and then carrying out the steps on page and 8 15 Because file operation cannot be carried out when integration is in progress do not execute the store and save operation sequence in integration synchronization mode Saving of stored data is also not possible when integration is in progress 8 16 IM 760301 01E 8 5 Saving the Stored Data Explanation Selecting the Data Type Select the data type from below The extension is automatically added ASCII Numeric data or waveform display data is saved in ASCII format The file can be used on your PC for analysis The file cannot be loaded into the WT3000 Float Numeric data or waveform display data is saved in 32 bit floating format The file cannot be loaded into the WT3000 Extension and Data Size of the Numeric Data File During normal measurement Extension Data Size Bytes CSV Approx 7 K condition number of elements 1 all measurement functions 10 storage operati
249. hree phase AC voltage and current Uia App 16 IM 760301 01E Appendix 4 Power Basics Power Harmonics and RLC of AC Circuits AC Power Because there is phase difference between the voltage and current due to the load AC power cannot be determined as easily as DC power If we denote the instantaneous voltage as u Umsinat and the instantaneous current as i Imsin wt the instantaneous power of AC power p is as follows p u xi Unsinat x Imsin t 6 Ulcoso Ulcos 2ot 6 U and I represent the rms voltage and current respectively p is the sum of the time independent term Ulcos and the AC component term of the voltage or current at twice the frequency Ulcos 2ot 9 AC power refers to the average power over 1 period By taking the average over 1 period AC power P becomes P Ulcoso W The power varies even with the same voltage and current depending on the phase difference The section above the horizontal axis in the figure below represents positive power power supplied to the load and the section below the axis represents negative power power fed back from the load The difference between the positive and negative powers is the power consumed by the load As the phase difference between the voltage and current increases the negative power increases At 7 2 the positive and negative powers are equal and the load consumes no power When the phase difference between voltage and
250. i 0 92793 For a functional description see 2 4 Waveform display Trend display For the operating procedure see chapter 6 For a functional description see 2 7 y js ls H f di For the operating procedure see chapter 7 M i For a functional description see 2 8 Ar a a ad Bar graph display See chapter 5 in the WT3000 Bar graph display is not Precision Power Analyzer Expansion possible Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Vector display LL 0D D 185 23 U i241 A PT iz ES See chapter 5 in the WT3000 Vector display is not possible Precision Power Analyzer Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E 0 5607hvar i use c 249 22 seco 22 1 Split Display The display is divided into top and bottom halves and two types of displays can be shown simultaneously 3 32 IM 760301 01E 3 16 Displaying the Setup Parameter List Procedure To exit the menu during ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE operation press ESC OO located above the soft olo a A tos ELEMENT In the procedural AL Cv Cv explanation below the C coupen MEASURING MEASURING phrase press the cursor wang Y GEED MODE AUTO keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting INPUT INFO 7 C items and entering values a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Orewoe and character string
251. ify Press SET When the button to the left of the selected element or measurement function is highlighted the numeric data of the measurement function of the element will be stored When the highlighting of the button is cleared the numeric data of the measurement function of the element will not be stored IM 760301 01E eea paJ01S eui Burnes pue ejeg Burjjeoeg pue Buros 8 3 Setting the Numeric Data and Waveform Display Data to Be Stored Selecting the Waveform Display Data to Be Stored This operation is valid if the stored item was set to Wave or Numeric Wave in step 5 6 Press the Wave Trace soft key to display the Wave Trace dialog box Selecting the items at once 7 Press the cursor keys to select All ON 8 Press SET The buttons to the left of all the signals are highlighted indicating that all items will be stored Deselecting all the items at once Press the cursor keys to select All OFF Press SET The highlighting of the buttons to the left of all the signals are cleared indicating that all items will not be stored ut sighal you wish to set the f the selected input signal is Rgsjore athe highlighting of the button is 8 8 IM 760301 01E 8 3 Setting the Numeric Data and Waveform Display Data to Be Stored Explanation Selecting the Items to Be Stored Select the item to be stored from the following Numeric Numeric data are stored Wave Waveform display da
252. ifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box in section 9 6 Properties Same as the explanation given in Properties in section 9 6 Selecting the File Attribute Same as the explanation given in Selecting the File Attribute in section 9 6 Selecting the Files to Be Deleted By placing asterisk marks to the left of the file names those files can be deleted There are two ways to select the files to be deleted Selecting the files one at a time Press the Set Reset soft key to place an asterisk mark to the left of the files one at a time Selecting the files at once Press the All Set soft key to place asterisk marks to the left of the selected file names at once There are three methods in selecting the files at once f you select a file and press the All Set soft key asterisk marks are placed by the directory containing the selected file and all the files in the directory f you select a directory and press the All Set soft key asterisk marks are placed by the selected directory and all the files in the directory f you select a storage medium and press the All Set soft key asterisk marks are placed by all the directories and files in the selected storage medium Note Data that is deleted cannot be recovered Be sure you erase the correct files Youcan delete directories if there are no files in them fthe file attribute see section 9 6 is R you cannot delete the file If an
253. ighted Changing the Measurement Function 6 Press the U I P S Q A WP q Time or FU FI y function select key to select the displayed measurement function Press the key corresponding to the measurement function you wish to display The display switches each time the key is pressed as follows U gt gt P gt original display Changing the Element Wiring Unit yo Press ELEMENT to select the element wiring unit Changing the Element Wiring Unit Collectively 8 Press SHIFT ELEMENT ALL ALL LED illuminates and the element wiring unit of all the displayed items on the displayed page can be changed collectively This completes the procedure for changing the displayed items using the function select keys Changing Using the Function Select Key USER Key By assigning measurement functions to the USER key up to four measurement functions can be directly displayed Assigning Measurement Functions to the USER Key 9 Press SHIFT USER USER SET to display the User Reserved menu 10 Press any of the soft keys from Function 1 to 4 to select the desired Function The measurement function selection box appears 11 Press the cursor keys to select any of the measurement functions starting with None 12 Press SET The symbol for the selected measurement function is displayed at the highlighted position Changing the Measurement Function with the USER Key 13 Press USER to select the measurement function in the same fashio
254. inal 3 O External current sensor External current sensor External current sensor input connector input connector input connector EXT EXT EXT ote c M IM M For the relationship between the wiring systems and the method of determining the measured values or computed values see Appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions IM 760301 01E 3 19 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 el 3 11 Wiring the Circuit under Measurement When Using the VT CT Connect a measurement cable from an external voltage transformer VT or current transformer CT to the voltage or current input terminal of the input element Wire according to the procedure in this section also when using a clamp type current sensor that outputs current To prevent the possibility of electric shock and damage to the instrument follow the precautions given in section 3 5 Wiring Precautions Anexternal VT can be connected to the voltage input terminal to make measurements when the maximum voltage of the circuit under measurement exceeds 1000 Vrms fthe maximum current of the circuit under measurement exceeds the maximum range of the input element measurement can be made by connecting an external CT or a clamp type current sensor that outputs current to the current input terminal Connecting to the Input Terminal Voltage Input Terminal Insert the safety terminal the conductive parts are not exposed into the voltage input t
255. ing For details see chapter 12 Specifications Input Filter For procedures see section 4 8 There are two types of filters The WT3000 makes measurements by synchronizing to the input signal Therefore the frequency of the input signal must be measured accurately e Line Filter The line filter is inserted into the voltage current and power measurement input circuit and directly affects the voltage current and power measurements see the block diagram in section 2 1 When the line filter is turned ON the measured value does not contain high frequency components Measurement of voltage current and power is possible by eliminating high frequency components from inverter waveforms strain waveforms etc The cutoff frequency is selectable Frequency Filter Because the frequency filter is inserted into the frequency measurement input circuit it affects frequency measurements In addition if the data update rate of the WT3000 is set to 50 ms 100 ms 5 s 10 s or 20 s it affects the detection of the measurement period for voltage current and power measurements see section 4 7 and appendix 6 In this case the filter also acts as a filter for detecting the zero crossing point see section 2 2 or appendix 6 more accurately The frequency filter is not inserted into the voltage current and power measurement input circuit Therefore the measured values include high frequency components even when the frequency filter is turn
256. ing ON OFF the Maximum Hold Function of the Numeric Data Display 1 Press MEASURE to display the Measure menu 2 Pressthe User Defined Function soft key to display the User Defined Function menu 3 Press the Max Hold soft key to select ON or OFF 1ueulioJnseoe u JOMOd User Defined User Defined F1 F5 User Defined F6 F10 g Pc Formula User Defined F11 F15 M Sampling Frequency Auto User Defined F16 F20 Max Held pr o UIT MM d 180 Lead Lag Sync Measure IM 760301 01E 5 17 5 5 Setting MAX hold Explanation Maximum Hold This function enables the maximum value of the numeric data to be held The item to be held at the maximum value is set using the user defined function The operators for the measurement functions are shown below in the form measurement function MAX value equation for defining the MAX hold U UMAX Urms URMSMAX Umn UMNMAX I IMAX P PMAX S SMAX Q QMAX U pk UPPEAKMAX U pk UMPEAKMAX l pk IPPEAKMAX _ I pk IMPEAKMAX To hold the MAX value of U enter UMAX in the equation for the user defined function The maximum value of the data above is held while the MAX hold function is enabled Values are substituted in URMSMAX and UMNMAX only when the voltage mode is RMS and MEAN respectively The D A output the numeric data list that the built in printer prints the co
257. ing measured It should also have proper ratings that are suited to the measurement Example When making measurements on a current of 20 A use copper wires that have a conductive cross sectional area of 4 mm Connecting cables may cause radio interference in which case the user is required to correct the interference Note After wiring the wiring system must be selected See section 4 1 Selecting the Wiring System When measuring large currents voltages or currents that contain high frequency components take special care in dealing with mutual interference and noise when wiring Keep the measurement cables as short as possible to minimize the loss between the circuit under measurement and the instrument The thick lines on the wiring diagrams shown in sections 3 9 to 3 11 are the sections where the current flows Use appropriate wires that are suitable for the current In order to make accurate measurements of the voltage of the circuit under measurement connect the cable to the circuit as closely as possible In order to make correct measurements separate the measurement cables as far away from the earth ground wires and the instrument s case as possible to minimize the static capacitance to earth ground To measure the apparent power and power factor more accurately on an unbalanced three phase circuit it is recommended that a three voltage three current system using three phase three wire 3P3W 3V3A be used
258. ing the Equation for Apparent Power and Reactive Power 2 Pressthe S Q Formula soft key to display the S Q Formula menu 3 Press one of the soft keys from Type1 Type2 Type3 to select the equation for apparent power Displayed only on models with the harmonic measurement option User Defined Function K S Q Formula 1 Type 1 l Pc Formula M Sampling Frequency Auto Phase 180 Lead Lag Sync Measure Measure User Defined AITO Phase 180 Lead Lag Sync Measure aster Slave IM 760301 01E 5 25 1ueulioJnseoe u JOMOd E 5 9 Setting the Equations for Apparent Power Reactive Power and Corrected Power Setting the Equation for Corrected Power 2 Bo o NON 11 12 Press the Pc Formula soft key to display the Pc Formula dialog box Selecting the Applicable Standard Press the cursor keys to select the standard for Pc Formula Press SET to select either IEC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 or IEC76 1 1993 Setting the Coefficient When the applicable standard of the equation is IEC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 Press the cursor keys to select P1 Press SET A box used to set coefficient P1 appears Press the cursor keys to set P1 Press SET or ESC to close the box Press the cursor keys to select P2 Press SET A box used to set coefficient P2 appears Press the cursor keys to set P2 Press SET or ESC to
259. inputting the external current sensor VT or CT output to the instrument Input filter Specify a line filter or a frequency filter See section 12 1 Averaging Measurement Functions of Normal Measurement Select exponential average or moving average Exponential average Select the attenuation constant from 2 4 8 16 32 and 64 Moving average Select the average count from 8 16 32 64 128 and 256 Measurement Functions of Harmonic Measurement Exponential average Select the attenuation constant from 2 4 8 16 32 and 64 Data update rate Select from 50 ms 100 ms 250 ms 500 ms 1 s 2 s 5 s 10 s and 20 s Display update rate Same as the data update rate Exceptions are listed below The display update interval of numeric display 4 8 and 16 items is 250 ms when the data update rate is 50 ms or 100 ms The display update interval of numeric display ALL Single List and Dual List is 500 ms when the data update rate is 50 ms to 250 ms The display update rate of the trend display bar graph display and vector display is 1 s when the data update rate is 50 ms to 500 ms The display update interval of the waveform display is approximately 1 s when the data update rate is 50 ms to 1 s However it may be longer depending on the trigger setting Response time Data update rate x 2 at the maximum Only when displaying numeric values Hold Holds the data display Single measurem
260. internal lithium battery The d Men al memory is lost when the power to the WT3000 is To poil pa d save the data to the storage medium before turning off the power Note be analyzed that is specified in the harmontc meas d Mo mE no data is stored for harmonic orders without data While the storage operation is in progress you cahpot M the P ss th xequation for distortion scaling averaging filter integration mode integration ti store interval If you hold the display by pressing HOLD while the storage operation is in progr D e value that is present when HOLD is pressed is stored fthe store interval is 00 00 00 and you hold the display by pressing operation stops 8 12 IM 760301 01E 8 5 Saving the Stored Data CAUTION Do not remove the PC card or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or icon of the PC card is blinking Such acts can damage the PC card or destroy D the data on it JE Ox DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT D 2 S a women WAVE vu sone UPDATE HOLD LOCAL KS AE S 4 gt OTHERS Weal ruri SINGLE oe CRT A ox e Ce ITEM FORM USER Femen INTEG sur z LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above e soft keys L on Ore th procedural explanation below the phra
261. ion WT3000 interface O E B 4 Z C c3 CJ 7 D A Output Option See the Expansion Function User s Manual 1M760301 51E The numeric data can be output using a 5 V FS DC analog voltage A maximum of 20 items can be set RGB Video Signal VGA Output Option See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E The RGB video signal VGA Video Graphics Array can be output to an external monitor This allows values and waveforms to be displayed on a large screen Initialization For procedures see section 3 13 The settings entered using keys and soft keys can be restored to factory default settings For details on the initial settings see appendix 2 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numeric Data Selecting the Message Language For procedures see section 3 17 The language of the error messages displayed on the screen during operation can be set to English or Japanese Selecting the Menu Language For procedures see section 3 17 The language of the software menus displayed on the screen can be set to English or Japanese Checking the System Conditions For procedures see section 11 4 The instrument configuration such as the model ROM version firmware version input element configuration and installed options can be checked Zero Level Compensation For procedures see section 10 1 Zero level compensation refers to creating a zero input condition inside the WT3000
262. ion Key Integration D A Output Option Motor Evaluation Motor Version and Harmonic Measurement Option fs s oz sz 58 Gee i Eme CD e e ss s Dee sen espe SHIFT a a 7 MOTOR ma 5 57 O INTEG Key See section 5 11 to 5 14 For details on the rated time of integrated D A output option see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Displays a menu for setting the integration mode integration timer reservation time integration auto calibration integration start stop reset and rated time of integrated D A output option SHIFT SCALING MOTOR SET Key See the Expansion Function User s Manual 1M760301 51E Displays a menu for setting the motor evaluation function HRM SET Key See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Displays a menu for setting the harmonic measurement function Storing Recalling Data Saving Loading Data and Printing on the Built in Printer camc necs C C3 Cd E E C esc UU pz MENU STORE SET i MENU STORE Key See section 8 4 Executes the storage operation This function cannot be used on the current version of the WT3000 The information given here may change in the future SHIFT STORE STORE SET Key See section 8 1 to 8 3 8 5 and 8 6 Displays the store and recall setup men
263. ion User s Manual IM760301 51E For the procedure of changing the displayed items of the measurement functions of harmonic measurement see chapter 7 in the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E For details on the wiring units expressed as XA and 2B see section 4 1 Selecting the Wiring System no data is displayed in places where the measurement function is not selected or where no numeric data is present 5 8 IM 760301 01E 5 2 Selecting the Voltage Current Mode RMS MEAN DC or RMEAN Procedure To exit the menu during ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE operation press ESC SENSOR RATIO located above the soft A Ca ros In the procedural explanation below the MEASURING phrase press the cursor Cais een a MODE keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Owmwr and character strings For A numeri WAVE U L P s Q ye une HOLD toca details on the procedures see section 3 14 C OP ES CAL v ITEM FORM usen ELEMENT INTEG srr A LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL Selecting the Target Element 1 Press ELEMENT to select the target element The corresponding element indicator to the left of the key illuminates MEASURING WIRING D wooe
264. ions Code Message Corrective Action Reference Section 684 No built in printer on this model Check the specifications to see whether or not Page ii the optional printer is provided 685 Printer time out Maintenance service is required 705 Can not operate while accessing medium Wait until access has completed 706 Can not operate during hard copy Wait until output has completed 710 File not found Check the file 711 File operation not allowed during hard copy Wait until the hard copy completes 712 Can not compress this hardcopy image Turn off compression switch 9 4 Seethe Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Error in Setting Code Message Corrective Action Reference Section 800 Illegal date time Set the correct date and time 3 12 801 Illegal file name The file name contains characters which are not 9 3 allowed or the file name is not a valid MS DOS file name Enter another file name 808 Cannot change this parameter during B numerical display 809 Cannot change this parameter during vector display 810 Cannot change this parameter during bar graph display 813 Cannot be set while integration is running Reset Integration 5 14 823 Cannot change during CAL Wait until CAL is completed 10 1 827 Illegal math expression Input a correct computing equation 5 4 841 Attempted to start integration afte
265. ions effective check the following items before applying the voltage or current of the circuit under measurement That the power cord provided with the instrument is used to connect to the power supply and the instrument is grounded That the power switch of the instrument is turned ON Thatthe current input protective cover provided with the instrument is being used When the power switch of the instrument is turned ON do not apply a signal that exceeds the following values to the voltage or current input terminals When the instrument is turned OFF turn OFF the circuit under measurement For a description of other input terminals see the specifications of each module in chapter 12 Instantaneous Maximum Allowable Input 1 s or less Voltage Input Peak value of 2500 V or RMS value of 1500 V whichever is less Current Input Direct Input Peak value of 150 A or RMS value of 50 A whichever is less External Sensor Input Peak value less than or equal to 10 times the range Continuous Maximum Allowable Input Voltage Input Peak value of 1600 V or RMS value of 1100 V whichever is less Current Input Direct Input Peak value of 90 A or RMS value of 33 A whichever is less External Sensor Input Peak value less than or equal to 5 times the range CAUTION Use measurement cables that have adequate margins of withstand voltage and current capacity with respect to the voltage or current be
266. iring unit from the choices below The selectable items vary depending on the installed elements Elementi Element2 Element3 Element4 XA and XB fthere are no elements that are assigned to the selected wiring unit there is no numeric data Thus the trend is not displayed For example if elements are assigned to XA and no elements are assigned to B then the trend of the measurement function for XB is not displayed Changing the Harmonic Order Applicable Only on Models with the Harmonic Measurement Option The measured order can be set to normal measured value or from dc Oth order up to 100th order Note Forthe meanings of the measurement function symbols that are displayed see section 2 2 Measurement Functions and Measurement Periods 2 5 Computation 2 6 Integration and appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions e For details on the wiring units expressed as XA and XB see section 4 1 Selecting the Wiring System Thetrend is not displayed where the measurement function is not selected or where no numeric data is present The measured order can be set to normal measured value or from dc Oth order up to 100th order However the numeric data up to the upper limit of the measured order see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E that is automatically determined from the minimum measured order Min Order to the PLL source frequency is the data determined by the
267. irm the new display position i reta Single When Mode is Auto B When Mode is Fixed When Mode is User Wave Mapping Wave Mapping Wave Mapping Mode Trigger Auto__Fixed__ser uto Fixed ser Display Settings Torque Torque g n IM 760301 01E 6 6 Waveform Display on Divided Windows Explanation The screen can be evenly divided and the waveforms can be assigned to the divided windows Selecting the Number of Divisions Select the number of divisions of the screen from the choices below Single No division Dual 2 divisions Triad 3 divisions Quad 4 divisions The number of displayed points in the vertical direction of one divided window varies depending on the number of divisions as follows Single 432 points Dual 216 points Triad 144 points Quad 108 points Waveform Mapping Auto The waveforms that are turned ON see section 6 1 are assigned to the divided windows in order by element numbers in the order voltage U current I then speed and torque Applicable only to products with the motor evaluation function motor version Fixed The waveforms are assigned in order by element number in the order voltage U and current I to the divided windows regardless of whether or not the display is turned ON Speed is displayed in the top frame Torque is displayed in the 2nd
268. is mode consists of the following two types Real time Normal Integration Mode The date time and integration timer time of start and stop of the integration operation are set The integration is stopped at the specified time when the maximum integration time of 10000 hours is exceeded or when the integration value reaches the maximum or minimum integration display value 2999999 MWh or 999999 MAh The integration time and value are held at that point Real time Repetitive Integration Mode Continuous Integration The start and stop of the integration operation are set through date and time and the integration timer time The integration is repeated at the specified timer setting during that time When the time specified by the timer elapses the operation is automatically reset and restarted The integration is stopped at the specified time or when the integration value reaches the maximum or minimum integration display value The integration time and value are held at that point Setting the Integration Timer The description is the same as section 5 10 The time in units of hour minute second can be set in the following range 00000 00 00 to 10000 00 00 Note If you set the integration timer time to 00000 00 00 in real time normal integration mode the integration starts at the specified start date time The integration is stopped at the specified time when the maximum integration time of 10000 hours is exceeded or when the integra
269. is stored or when the data is stored al memory size approx 30 MB oe Stop is display d in MA r s ner of the screen displayed in the upper left corner of the screen Q During integration synchronization mode The storage operation stops when the specified store count K when integration stops or when the data is storedkup to the intern ory of the screen O O size Store Stop is displayed in the upper left corn IM 760301 01E eea paJ01S y Burnes pue ejeg Burjjeoeg pue Bunos p 8 4 Storing Data Explanation To store data parameters such as the store mode the store count the store interval and the store reservation time must be specified before executing the operation This section explains the start and stop operations of storage For the procedure on how to set the store mode see section 8 1 for the procedure on how to set the store count the store interval and the store reservation time see section 8 2 Initializing Clearing the Internal Memory The storage operation can be executed only when the internal memory is cleared f you are performing the first storage operation after turning ON the power switch there is no need to clear the internal memory a e operation stops automatically according to various conditions ey CS the stere mode For details see the procedural explanation etaini be Sube The data prd the dy rnal memory cannot be retained by the
270. isplay color can be specified for each item Back Set the background color within the waveform display frame Grid Set the color of the grid within the waveform display frame and the waveform display frame Cursor Set the display color of the cursor U1 to I4 Speed and Torque Set the display color of the waveform 13 and Speed are set to the same display color The same hold true for U4 and Torque Applicable only to products with the motor evaluation function motor version Setting the Text Color Select from Preset1 to 3 and user setting For user color the display color can be specified for each item Menu Fore Set the color of the text on the menu dialog box window and other screens Menu Back Set the background color of the waveform display frame Select Box Set the background color of the background within the selected menu frame and box Sub Menu Set the display color of the selected dialog box or window Selected Key Set the display color of the selected soft key or item 10 10 IM 760301 01E 10 7 Setting the Key Lock and Shift Lock Function Procedure fa Cursor keys C gt OMV scams meme _ave_ MOTOR FREQ ET FILTER CURSOR NULL ue mes store MI ENU STORE SET print msc er MENU DISPLAY numeri wave ITEM amp ELEMENT wie S 0 1 0 mm RATE
271. isplay for Speed and Torque input signals can be turned ON OFF through this procedure 6 4 IM 760301 01E 6 3 Setting the Time Axis Procedure ELEMENT OO OO VOLTAGE RANGE MEASURING S AUTO CURRENT RANGE MEASURING SENSOR RATIO S DISPLAY ITEM ITEM amp ELEMENT ELEMENT SINGLE LOWER ITEM O ALL OREMOTE son CAL INTEG SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures See section 3 14 To display waveforms set the display mode to Wave Numeric Wave Wave Trend or Wave Bar For the setup procedure see section 6 1 Displayed only on models with the harmonic measurement option 1 Press FORM to display the Wave Form menu If the waveform display is at the lower section of the screen on the split display press SHIFT FORM LOWER FORM 2 Press the cursor keys to set the time axis When the display of scale values is turned ON see section 6 8 the times at the left end fixed to 0 s and the right end of the screen are displayed in the lower left corner and lower right corner of the screen respectively Fo
272. ize Menory Exec Store Item Nuner ic List Item IM 760301 01E eea paJ01S y Burnes pue ejeg Burjjeoeg pue Bunos Ile 8 2 Setting the Store Count the Store Interval and the Store Reservation Time Setting the Store Reservation Time 4 Press the Mode soft key to display the Mode menu 5 Press the Real Time soft key to select the real time mode The store reservation time menu appears 6 Press the Real Time Control soft key to display the Real Time Control dialog box 7 Press the cursor keys to select one of the reservation year month date hour minute and second boxes for specifying when the storage operation will start Store Start 8 Press SET to display the entry box 9 Press the cursor keys to set the year month date hour minute or second that you selected in step 7 Press SET or ESC to close the box Repeat steps 7 to 10 to set the year month date hour minute and second Press the cursor keys to select one of the reservation year month date hour minute and second boxes for specifying when the storage operation will end Store Setting 4 Mode Real Tine E Count 100 A M Interval d Interva Setting M Store Iten Real Time Control Real Tine e Control Store Start al 2001 Dee oo eo store End 2 or Deilhree eo Va Stone item Nuneric Numeric W List
273. l is a 64 mm safety banana jack female Insert the safety terminal the conductive parts are not exposed into the voltage input terminal Current Input Terminal When the voltage of the circuit under measurement is being applied to the current input terminals do not touch the current sensor input terminals Since these terminals are electrically connected inside the instrument this act is dangerous When connecting measurement cables from an external current sensor to the current sensor input connector remove the cables connected to the current input terminals In addition when the voltage of the circuit under measurement is being applied to the current sensor input terminal do not touch the current input terminals Since these terminals are electrically connected inside the instrument this act is dangerous The terminal is a binding post and the screws are M6 Either wind the wire around the screw or pass the crimp on lugs through the screw axis then tighten firmly by holding the terminal knob 2 1 Unit mm Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems The selectable wiring systems vary depending on the number of input elements that are installed in the instrument You may be able to select only a single wiring system or two wiring systems For details see Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems in section 2 3 Measurement Conditions IM 760301 01E 3 13 sjuswainseayy Bunes e40Jog BH
274. lay the Others menu 3 Press any of the soft keys from Numeric Wave Wave Bar and Wave4 Trend to select the display format Displayed only on models with the harmonic measurement option Other s Trend IDE Wave Trend Vector Numer ic Numer ic Bar Nuneric Press the Next1 2 soft key iJ IM 760301 01E 6 1 Aejdsiq u0JoAeA Hu 6 1 Waveform Display Explanation For functional details see section 2 7 A display example is shown below For the procedure to change the displayed items and contents of waveforms see sections 6 2 to 6 8 Normal Mode Trg Uover Spdi U1 100Vrms YOKOGAWA_ Distinction of voltage or current pr es joven mnm Irem teg Reset eee For the element and the upper limit Sinaia of the displayed waveform TESSUV Sms K Trigger K 1 Display Settings Distinction of voltage or current k the element and the lower limit 300 0 Wave Mapping cos Qin ET of the displayed waveform Time at the right end of the screen time span of the screen Number of data points displayed in the range from the left to the right end of the screen When P P is displayed waveform is displayed using P P compression see section 2 7 Time at the left end of the screen fixed to 0 s Selecting the Display Mode Select the waveform display format from the following Displaying the Waveform on the Entire Scr
275. lay update interval See section 12 5 The LCD screen may contain 0 02 defects with respect to the total number of pixels 12 2 IM 760301 01E 12 3 Measurement Functions Measurement Items Related to Normal Measurement Measurement Functions Determined for Each Input Element For details on the determination and equations of measurement functions see appendix 1 Item Symbol and Meaning Voltage V Urms true rms value Umn rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value Udc simple average Urmn rectified mean value Current A Irms true rms value Imn rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value Idc simple average Irmn rectified mean value Active power W P Apparent power VA S Reactive power var Q Power factor X Phase difference o Frequency Hz fU FreqU voltage frequency fl Freql current frequency Two frequencies from the fU and fl of all installed elements can be measured simultaneously On the model with the frequency measurement add on option the fU and fl of all elements can be measured simultaneously The display of signals that are not selected shows no data Voltage max and min V U pk Voltage maximum U pk Voltage minimum Current max and min A I pk Current maximum I pk Current minimum Crest factor CfU Voltage crest factor Cfl Current crest factor Corrected Power W Pc Applicable stand
276. lected directory and all the files in the directory or all the directories and files in the selected storage medium disappear The corresponding items will not be copied At the same time the All Reset soft key changes to the All Set soft key Copy Set Reset m IPC card 1 Set Reset dm gt 2004705721 17 46 2004705421 18 07 SET 200470521 18 07 all Set SET 200470521 18 07 AII Reset a 2004 05721 17 53 L J m eH Property Property Filter Filter Item RTI Item RII Attribute Attribute Dest Dir 9 24 IM 760301 01E 9 8 Copying Files Selecting the Copy Destination 12 Press the Dest Dir soft key The copy execution menu and the copy destination File List dialog box appear co Function ES Copy Set Reset all Set BE Property Filter Item Bil Attribute i Dest Dir B Selecting the Copy Destination Storage Medium or Directory 13 Same as the procedures given in Selecting the Storage Medium and Selecting the Save Destination Directory in section 9 3 Executing the Copy Operation 14 Press the Copy Exec soft key All the copy source files with asterisk marks are copied Copy File List M Function Path PC_Card pci Space 123312128 byte Copy File Name Size Date Attribute IPc card
277. led data in the data update interval is used to determine the measured values Set the synchronization source according to the measurement signal and the measurement objective App 26 IM 760301 01E Appendix 6 Setting the Measurement Period Data update interval Data update interval Measurement period Measurement period Synchronization source setting OFF Unintended zero crossing caused by pulse noise Setting the Synchronization Period When Measuring a Three Phase Device If a three phase device is measured with input elements 1 and 2 using three phase three wire system set the synchronization source of input elements 1 and 2 to the same signal For example set the synchronization source of input element 1 and 2 to U1 or I1 the same synchronization source In effect the measurement periods of input elements 1 and 2 match and the X voltage X current and X power of the three phase device can be measured with high accuracy Likewise if a three phase device is measured with input elements 1 2 and 3 using three phase four wire system set the synchronization source of input elements 1 2 and 3 to the same signal To facilitate this sort of configuration the synchronization source setting on the WT3000 is linked to the X wiring unit of the wiring system when the independent setting of input elements is OFF If the independent setting of input elements see section 4 2 is
278. located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 To display waveforms set the display mode to Wave Numeric Wave Wave Trend or Wave Bar For the setup procedure see section 6 1 Displayed only on models with the harmonic measurement option 1 Press FORM to display the Wave Form menu If the waveform display is at the lower section of the screen on the split display press SHIFT FORM LOWER FORM Selecting the Number of Screen Divisions 2 Press the Format soft key to display the Format menu 3 Press any of the keys from Single to Quad to select the number of windows Trigger Display Settings iu Wave Mapping Wave Mapping IM 760301 01E 6 15 Aejdsiq u0JoAeA Hu 6 6 Waveform Display on Divided Windows Selecting the Waveform Mapping 4 Press the Wave Mapping soft key to display the Wave Mapping dialog box 5 Press SET to set the mode to Auto Fixed or User If you selected User proceed to step 6 6 Press the cursor keys to select the input signal you wish to set 7 Press SET A box used to set the display position number appears 8 Press the cursor keys to select a value between 0 and 3 9 Press SET to conf
279. lope or falling slope is zero or one within the data update interval the measurement period is set to the entire span within the data update interval You can select which input signal will be the synchronization source synchronized to the zero crossing point of the input signal for each element You can set the synchronization source signal to the voltage current or external clock that is input to the element For details see appendix 6 1 For details on the sampled data see the description of the sampled data in Types of Measurement Functions during Normal Measurement on page 2 3 2 The measurement period for determining the numeric data of the peak voltage or peak current is the entire span within the data update interval Therefore the measurement period for the measurement functions U pk U pk I pk I pk CfU and Cfl that are determined from the maximum value of the voltage and current is also the entire span within the data update period 3 Trigger slope refers to the movement of the signal from a low level to a high level rising edge or from a high level to a low level falling edge 4 The data update interval is the interval by which the data is sampled for determining the measurement functions This is equivalent to the value you can specify in Data Update Rate of section 2 3 Measurement period z Measurement period Measurement period lt gt A When t
280. lower limits correspond to six times the measurement range The trigger level setting is void when the trigger source is set to Ext Clk Measurement range 100 Vrms when the crest factor is 3 50 Vrms when the crest factor is 6 Trigger level 25 100 300 Vpk 1 Input zero line Vertical center Trigger level 25 75 V 100 300 Vpk 6 10 IM 760301 01E 6 4 Setting the Trigger Note To prevent erroneous operation caused by noise the trigger function uses approximately 2 hysteresis if the crest factor is set to 3 If the trigger slope is set to for example the trigger does not occur until the input signal level falls approximately 2 below the trigger level The trigger function uses approximately 4 hysteresis if the crest factor is set to 6 The trigger function for waveform display does not work while integration is in progress or is suspended Therefore the start position of the waveform display the signal level at the left end of the screen may not be stable In addition the measurement period of the numeric data and that of the waveform data may not be synchronized IM 760301 01E Aejdsiq u0JoAeA Hu 6 5 Position Procedure ELEMENT eO VOLTAGE RANGE OO ALL A MEASURING INPUT INFO move auro CURRENT RANGE SENSOR RATIO CA MEASURING MopE AUTO Z
281. ly divided and the waveforms can be assigned to the divided windows The screen can be divided into up to four windows This function is useful when there are many waveforms on the screen You can select the method of assignment from the choices below Auto The waveforms that are turned ON are assigned in order according to the element number to the divided windows voltage first and then current Fixed The waveforms are assigned in order by element number in the order voltage and current to the divided windows regardless of whether or not the display is turned ON User The waveforms can be assigned arbitrarily to the divided windows regardless of whether or not the display is turned ON Display Interpolation of the Waveform For procedures see section 6 7 The waveform display data can be connected linearly to display the waveform smoothly Linear Interpolation Linearly interpolates between two points nterpolation OFF No interpolation is performed Only the data points are displayed Graticule For procedures see section 6 7 A grid or cross scale can be displayed on the screen You can also select not to display the grid or cross scale Displaying Scale Values For procedures see section 6 8 The upper and lower limits of the vertical axis and the values at the left and right ends of the horizontal axis time axis of each waveform can be turned ON or OFF 2 26 IM 760301 01E 2 7 Wavef
282. mal Mode Trg 6 2 NULL anres 10 2 NULL function 2 31 10 2 N MERIG riter aei iius 5 1 numeric data display order of sesssess App 4 O Page o M 5 7 o 5 7 one year accuracy 12 6 12 7 operating altitude sesee 12 14 operating conditions eeeeseeeeeeeeenennnnn 12 14 ODOFalo S scite EEE TE ems 5 16 Doi qm ii Jg Aad 5 7 OVOMANGG eee M 5 7 P Page p 5 6 P P compression 2 28 package contents Of iiic ciere eco ii page jumping of 5 4 page scroll rtt erret 5 4 PG ciae c eniti aed CE ERE DELE KDE ERR EEL ERAT ARTE ORE OVE TE Te TE 5 6 domom ER 9 1 PC card formatting of esssssssssseseeee 9 2 phase angle 5 5 tenni App 16 phase difference 2 18 5 6 5 28 App 16 phase difference display format of 5 28 INO ectetuer ee T position PROSE SCMIOL E a p power coefficient setting of power consumption maximum eene 12 14 Meg UE ii power factor POWCRTUSG mM i 11 8 power oss tenerent tret power range d power
283. mately 100 is set for a signal that exceeds 100 of the range Measurement Functions Affected by the NULL Function The NULL value is subtracted from the sampled data Hence all measurement functions are affected by the NULL values 10 2 IM 760301 01E 10 3 Selecting the Sampling Frequency Procedure 5 6 ofz M z E 5 LJ DISPLAY numeri WAVE ITEM amp ELEMENT U 1 P S 0 1 0 UPDATE RATE HOLD WPiq TIME FU Fl n SINGLE ITEM FORM LOWER FORM LOWER ITEM USER ELEMENT USERSET O ALL INTEG OREMOTE o Eq To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section scauwe Une FLTER MOTOR the soft keys SET HRA HRM SET ff MEASURE sinc souRce CURSOR F mes store MENU STORE SET 3 14 pr msc Crap 1 Press MEASURE to display the Measure menu 2 Pressthe Sampling Frequency soft key to display the Sampling Frequency menu 3 Press any of the soft keys from Auto Clock A to C to select the sampling frequency User Defined
284. mber of Characters Characters That Can Be Used Date Time Specified number 0 to 9 Equation 1 to 50 characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard and spaces Unit 1 to 8 characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard and spaces File name 1 to 8 characters 0 9 A Z _ parentheses minus sign Comment 0 to 25 characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard Server name 0 to 40 characters User name 0 to 40 characters Password 0 to 40 characters E mail address 0 to 40 characters and spaces Characters that are displayed on the keyboard and spaces Characters that are displayed on the keyboard and spaces Characters that are displayed on the keyboard and spaces Characters that are displayed on the keyboard and spaces the character cannot be entered consecutively Note File names are not case sensitive Comments are case sensitive In addition the following file names cannot be used due to limitations of MS DOS AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK COM1 to COMS and LPT1 to LPT9 3 30 IM 760301 01E 3 15 Switching the Display Procedure DI a ES ITEM amp ELEMENT U I P S 0 1 0 UPDATE RATE HOLD WPIg TIME FU FI n SINGLE e e FORM LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM a Y scams meme owe MOTOR FR
285. md gt phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT orme and character strings For Cursor keys see section 3 14 Cu QR mar v AGE l ITEM FORM USER ELEMENT sur v LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL CD Press SHIFT SINGLE CAL Zero level compensation is executed Explanation Zero Level Compensation This function is used to create a zero input condition using the internal circuit of the instrument and setting the level at that point to zero level Zero level compensation must be performed to meet the specifications of this instrument see chapter 12 e Pressing CAL executes the zero level compensation Zero level compensation is automatically performed after changing the measurement range or input filter Note Formaking accurate measurements it is recommended that zero level compensation be performed after warming up the instrument for at least 30 minutes In addition the ambient temperature needs to be within the specifications see chapter 12 and stable Ifthe measurement range and input filter are not changed over a long period of time the zero level may change due to the changes in the environment surrounding the instrument It is recommended that zero level compensation be performed in this case There are functions that automatically perform zero level compensation during integration See section 5 13 suonoung Jou
286. me already exists in the same directory the file cannot be renamed Ifa directory with the same name already exists in the same directory the directory cannot be created The number of directories and files that can be displayed in the file list is 2500 If the number of directories and files in a directory exceeds 2500 the file list randomly displays 2500 of the directories and files Files that do not have an archive attribute are not displayed in the File List window Do not remove the archive attribute of the files saved by the WT3000 using your PC Up to 42 characters can be displayed in the path If the path exceeds 42 characters is displayed at the end of the character string Directory names are not case sensitive Comments are case sensitive In addition the following names cannot be used due to limitations of MS DOS AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK COM1 to COMS and LPT1 to LPT9 9 30 IM 760301 01E Chapter 10 Other Functions 10 1 Zero Level Compensation Procedure To exit the menu during ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE operation press ESC eO located above the soft oro CA CA revs ELEMENT In the procedural ms Cw Cw explanation below the MEASURING MEASURING phrase press the cursor RMS Y MEAN DC JAMEN H AUTO iNeAN oc JAMEN H eys may be used is WIRING AUTO keys b d Th INPUT INFO
287. me is set in relative time When the specified time elapses the operation is automatically reset and restarted Integration is repeated until STOP is pressed When the integration value reaches the maximum or minimum integration display value the integration time and value are held Setting the Integration Timer The time in units of hour minute second can be set in the following range 00000 00 00 to 10000 00 00 Note If the integration timer is set to 00000 00 00 in normal integration mode the integration is performed in manual integration mode see section 2 6 and 5 14 IM 760301 01E 5 31 1ueulioJnseoe u JOMOd E 5 12 Setting the Real time Integration Mode the Integration Timer and the Reservation Time Procedure To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the pem VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE EL Ow A A MEASURING MEASURING eene RMS MEAN YX DC J RMEAN H MODE aus itean pc ReAN MODE AUTO DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT NUMERIC WAVE ITEM FORM USER s ELEMENT LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL 1 Press INTEG to display the Integ menu 2 LOCAL SHIFT procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings
288. measurement function switches SHIFT USER USER SET Key See section 5 1 Displays a menu for registering defining the measurement functions that you wish to display when the USER key is pressed ELEMENT Key See section 5 1 Each time the ELEMENT key is pressed on models with four input elements installed the input element or wiring unit of the displayed item at the cursor switches in the following order 1 gt 2 gt 3 gt 4 gt XA gt XB gt 1 and soon The numeric data of the selected input element or wiring unit is displayed The above operation is carried out when numeric data is displayed and the menu is not displayed or the ITEM key has been pressed Only the input element or wiring unit switches The input element or wiring unit that is displayed varies depending on the number of input elements that are installed in the WT3000 or the selected wiring system SHIFT ELEMENT ALL Key See section 5 1 If the ALL indicator is illuminated by pressing the SHIFT ELEMENT ALL key on models with four input elements installed each time the ELEMENT key is pressed the input elements or wiring units displayed on one page switches in the following order 1 gt 2 gt 3 gt 4 gt ZA gt XB gt 1 and so on The numeric data of the selected input elements or wiring units is displayed If the SHIFT ELEMENT ALL key is pressed again the ALL indicator turns OFF and the function for switching the input elemen
289. ments 2 Functions The following eight types of numeric data can be determined For details related to the determination of measurement function data see Appendix 1 WpX sum of Wp Wp z sum of Wp Wp X sum of Wp q sum of q q sum of q q Z sum of q WSX sum of SX and WQx sum of Q Integration Mode For procedures see sections 5 11 and 5 12 e Manual Integration Mode Integration continues from the point when it is started to the point it is stopped However when the integration time reaches its maximum 10000 hours or the integration value reaches its maximum or minimum 999999 MWh or 999999 MAh the integration is stopped and the integration time and integration value at that point are held Hold hele When the maximum integration value Integration 999999 MWh or 999999 MAh value is reached Hold Hold Integration time MEN Start Stop Reset Start Reset When STOP is pressed or the maximum integration time is reached IM 760301 01E 2 19 uondiosog jeuonouneJ Hu 2 6 Integration Normal Integration Mode The integration time is set in relative time The integration is stopped after the specified time elapses or when the integration value reaches the maximum or minimum integration display value The integration time and value are held at that point Hold Integration value Hold Integration time f Timer value gt Start Reset Repetitive Integration Mode C
290. ments are selected with the SHIFT ELEMENT ALL key as explained on the previous page the synchronization source of all input elements can be set collectively UPDATE RATE Key See section 4 10 Displays a menu for selecting the acquisition interval data update rate of the sampled data that is used to determine the numeric data measured values such as voltage current and power HOLD Key See section 4 11 When the HOLD key is pressed and the HOLD indicator illuminates the measurement and display operation is aborted and the numeric data display is held Pressing the HOLD key again turns OFF the HOLD indicator and restarts the updating of the numeric data display SINGLE Key See section 4 11 If the SINGLE key is pressed while in the hold condition the measurement is performed once at the specified data update rate and the WT3000 returns to the hold condition 1 4 IM 760301 01E 1 2 Setup Menu Display Key and Execution Key Displaying the Measured Computed Results ELEMENT Ersson OO e e MEASURING MEASURING Jt RMS MEAN x amp I move auto aid Qum Cor H MODE Auro DISPLAY 8 eed s 7 6 3 EE EJ se oala 57 E lee MODE Key See section 5 2 The voltage or current can be displayed by switching the measurement mode The mode can be
291. mmunication output and other values are set to the maximum held values 5 18 IM 760301 01E 5 6 Measuring the Average Active Power Explanation The average active power is specified using the user defined function as follows Integrated power Average active power g P Elapsed time of integration For example to determine the average active power of element 1 the equation of the user defined function is set as follows WH E1 TI E1 For the procedure of setting equations see section 5 4 IM 760301 01E 5 19 1ueulioJnseoe u JOMOd E 5 7 Setting the Equation for Efficiency Procedure ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE S WIRING INPUT INFO RMS J MEAN J DC RMEAN MEASURING CURRENT RANGE MEASURING MODE DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 ITEM LOWER ITEM USER USER SET ss CAL INTEG FORM LOWER FORM ELEMENT O AL Setting the Equation for Efficiency 1 Press WIRING to display the Wiring menu 2 Press the n Formula
292. monic Mode on the WT1600 and PZ4000 This computing equation can be selected on models with the harmonic measurement option The harmonic measurement must be performed correctly For details on harmonic measurement see chapter 7 in the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Active power for three phase four wire system PX P1 P2 P3 Apparent power for three phase four wire system sy A Px 4 QF Reactive power for three phase four wire system Q Q1 Q2 Q3 Setting the Equation for Corrected Power Depending on the applicable standard when the load that is connected to the potential transformer is extremely small the active power of the potential transformer that is measured needs to be compensated In such cases set the compensating equation and the coefficient Corrected power Pc is a measurement function in the normal measurement mode Selecting the Applicable Standard Select the standard from below For the equations of each applicable standard see section 1 5 EC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 EC76 1 1993 Setting the Coefficient Coefficients P1 and P2 can be specified Set the coefficients in the range of 0 0001 to 9 9999 Note Corrected power is computed only when the voltage mode is RMS or MEAN IM 760301 01E 5 27 1ueulioJnseoe u JOMOd E 5 10 Selecting the Display Format of the Phase Difference Procedure a Cursor keys 4 gt 0
293. n press ESC located above MO TOR FREQ the soft keys SET FILTER In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the OE ODE cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and FILE imace save STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET print msc He MENU 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Press the Config soft key to display the Config menu Selecting the Crest Factor 3 Press Crest Factor to select CF3 or CF6 Message Language ENG System Overview Language ENG Alphabet Font Gothic Remote Control LCD Brightness 2 Key Lock Shift Lock Crest Factor Next a cre ILE Explanation For details see section 2 2 Selecting the Crest Factor The crest factor is a ratio of the amplitude with respect to the rms value You can select CF3 or CF6 Note Ifthe crest factor is selected the voltage range and current range are set to the maximum range on all elements Ifthe crest factor is set to 6 the measurement conditions of crest factor 5 and higher required by IEC62018 are met When measuring waveforms whose crest factor is less than or equal to 3 accurate measurements
294. n as step 6 None u 1 P s Q A U peak ou 1 FreqU Freq z Rs anm Xs Rp Xp Uhdf Ihdf Phdf Uthd U peak Ithd Pthd Uthf Ith Utif Itif hvf Function 3 hcf U peak I peak I peak cfu cfi 1 peak Pc Time uP wet uP q qt Function 4 I peak IM 760301 01E 5 3 1ueulioJnseoe u JOMOd E 5 1 Displaying Numeric Data and Changing the Displayed Items Selecting from the Menu 4 Press ITEM to display the Numeric menu Selecting the Item to Be Changed Press the Item No soft key Press the cursor keys to select the item to be changed The item to be changed is highlighted Oa Changing the Measurement Function 7 Press the Function soft key to display the measurement function selection box 8 Pressthe cursor keys to select any of the measurement functions starting with None 9 Press SET The symbol for the selected measurement function and the numeric data are displayed at the highlighted position Changing the Element Wiring Unit 10 Press the Element X soft key to display the element wiring unit selection box 11 Press the cursor keys to select any of the elements wiring units starting with Elementi 12 Press SET The symbol for the selected element number or wiring unit and the numeric data are displayed at the highlighted position This completes the procedure for changing the displayed items using the menu Fordetails on changing the harmonic order of the measurement functions of harmonic
295. n below the MEASURING MEASURING WIRING phrase press the cursor AUTO GOE eH mode AUTO keys may be used This PUTINO phrase refers to the procedures for selecting f DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT ow tems and entering values A and character strings For gt see section 3 14 Cu QR wn CAL v l ITEM FORM USER ELEMENT INTEG SHIFT Y LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL 1 Press WIRING to display the Wiring menu 9 9 r o 9 gt r Selecting the Wiring System Pattern 2 Pressthe Wiring Setting soft key to display the Wiring Setting dialog box 3 Press the cursor keys to select the target element Example in which four elements are installed Wiring Settin Element 1_ 2_ 3_ t 41 E 1P2u 1 E 1P2u 1P2u 1 1P2W 1 3 Press SET The pattern selection window opens 4 Press the cursor keys to select the pattern 5 Press SET to confirm the new pattern Example in which four elements are installed Wiring Settin Element 1 2_ 3 t 1p2w J 4 l L 1P2u 1 1P2u 1 1P2W 3P3W 3P4W 3P3wC3v3A IM 760301 01E 4 1 suonipuo 1ueuiaunseo y BH 4 1 Selecting the Wiring System Explanation The selectable patterns of wiring systems vary depending on the number of input elements that are installed in the instrument You may b
296. n for Crest Faelor 3 uiii ENE crest factor CT ratio CUISINES PAPPE e UE orta EH T RE EEPU IEEE Currerit NOUT 2i ciiin cii ct tcr oret current input terminal ER Current mode 2 ieu icsireiio tecti eee boit cedi tag current range setting of esee 4 6 CURSOR cursor measurement esseesseeeseeeeeeenneeeernn 6 23 Cursor Path Jessie inpr EHE HS E N 6 24 D Page D A GUIDUbu ide iei p TET 2 31 data compressIOT ii coiere it crater trn hri tho e a dts 9 13 data format 9 13 data points we 2 23 data size 8 17 9 8 Datta TYPO M 8 14 data type 8 17 data update rate 4 26 Date Time 3 23 Dor P 5 9 de uus App 1 Delete icti teres 9 20 Delete EX60 2i od diste ERE rack and 9 22 delta computation 2 8 2 18 directories sssssssssesesseseeeeeeeeneneen nennen nnne 9 27 directories creation OF iieica eiie eec eerte coins 9 27 directory di o eryEeo TUS display colors A display interpolation seeeeeennn 6 18 display resolution eene 2 14 display segment displayed items number of sssessesss 5 2 5 7 displayed items resetting the order of 5 5 IM 760301 01E Index 1 Index displaye
297. n the range of 9 999E 30 to 9 999E 30 Note The settings described in section 6 7 apply to display interpolation and graticule The setting in section 6 8 determines whether the upper and lower limits and labels are displayed IM 760301 01E 7 11 Aejdsig pualy i 7 6 Procedure Displaying Trends on Divided Windows ELEMENT OO OO m m m m zZ To exit the menu during VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE Ersson operation press ESC SENSOR RATIO S MEASURING In the procedural explanation below the MEASURING phrase press the cursor located above the soft Ca five 00 WIRING INPUT INFO RMS MEAN Dc ues MODE MODE AUTO keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting NO a Oo c o o x o lt a v 0 items and entering values DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT and character strings For ES CAL details on the procedures see section 3 14 OREMOTE LOCAL mem f FoRM _user ELEMENT INTEG sHirr LOWER ITEM OWER FORM USER SET O AL To display trends set the display mode to Trend Numeric Trend Wave Trend or Bar Trend For the setup procedure see section 7 1 Displayed only on models with the harmonic measurement option 1 Press FORM to display the Trend Form menu If the trend display is
298. nal sensor cable a le Q de Q QJ RI re Ethernet port option to be released in from the external the near future See the Expansion current sensor See M Function User s Manual IM760301 51E section 3 10 Current input terminal Used to connect current measurement cables See sections 3 8 3 9 and Torque signal input connector motor version Receives signals from torque meters when evaluating motors See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Revolution signal input connector motor version Receives signals from revolution sensors when evaluating motors See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E External start signal output connector Used when performing master slave synchronized measurement See section 10 8 Power connector See section 3 3 Power fuse See section 11 5 RGB video signal VGA output connector option Outputs image signals See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E D A output connector option Outputs numeric data that has been converted to analog DC voltage See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E 3 11 IM 760301 01E SEd Jo suonounJ pue seueN Ile Top Panel 1 1 Front Panel Rear Panel and Top Panel Outlet holes See section 3 2 Handle 12938025 2020 02 209090909090909 po a 0802080908020209 8 808080808 S 80899 s 88093 E 0889
299. nd E m p character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 MENU i Press FILE to display the File menu 4 File item Setup Load Save utility 9 14 IM 760301 01E 9 5 Loading Setup Parameters 2 Press the Load soft key The Load Menu and the File List dialog box appears Selecting the Load Source Storage Medium 3 Pressthe cursor keys to select the load source storage medium indicated by 4 Press SET to confirm the storage medium Selecting the Load Source Directory Perform this operation when directories are present on the medium 5 Press the cursor keys to select the load source directory indicated by lt gt 6 Press SET to confirm the directory The selected storage medium directory is displayed in Path located above and to the left of the File List dialog box Select lt and press SET to return to a higher level directory File List LLPath PC Card SPC 1 Space 128212992 hyte File Name Size Date Attribute la File Load Menu M File Item Setup IPC card 1 gt 2004705722 00 52 0003 27309 2004 05 22 00 54 R 0000 27309 2004 05 22 00 53 R Load Property in Save Filter Item All Load Exec 7 Utility Selecting the File to Be Loaded 7 Press the cursor keys to select
300. nd 7 6 For details on bar graphs and vector displays option see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Displays a menu for selecting the displayed item on the bottom half of the display when two types of displays are displayed simultaneously on the top and bottom halves of the display using the setup menu shown with the OTHERS key on the previous page The menu configuration is the same as when the bottom half of the display is shown by itself full screen FORM Key See section 5 1 6 2 6 3 6 6 to 6 8 7 4 7 5 and 7 8 For details on bar graphs and vector displays option see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Displays a menu for selecting the display format according to the display type selected with the NUMERIC WAVE or OTHERS key on the previous page SHIFT FORM LOWER FORM Key See section 5 1 6 2 6 3 6 6 to 6 8 7 4 7 5 and 7 8 For details on bar graphs and vector displays option see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Displays a menu for selecting the display format for the bottom half of the display when two types of displays are displayed simultaneously on the top and bottom halves of the display using the setup menu shown with the OTHERS key on the previous page The menu configuration is the same as when the bottom half of the display is shown by itself full screen U I P Key S Q Key WP q TIME Key FU FlI Key See section 5 1 Each time the U I P key i
301. nd Strings User Defined Function F1 F5 Function 1 Lj Expression Function 2 Expression Function 3 Expression Function 4 Expression Function 5 Expression Unit UCE1 ORT CAPS CET ORT wit C ET ORT 7007000000 0 HEILEIBET User Defined Function F1 F5 Function 1 unit UCET ORT UCE1 0RT m INSERT Rz GB npe etale ICEF Te TH TJ T LL rr E INIo PIoIRISETIU U UIX Y 2 peace 7D LT D Lopes xr nex pns pr prx Lad Rest qaesc Poort posrqemquosc poe Expression Ea Unit Function 5 Expression UCE1 0RT An equation can be created by combining the measurement function symbols Using the numeric values of the measurement functions the numeric data of the new equation can be determined Turning ON OFF the User Defined Function Computation You can select whether to perform the specified user defined function computation Se ON Executes the computation OFF Does not perform the computation tting the Unit Number of Characters Eight characters or less However not all eight characters can be shown on the numeric data display This depends on the number of displayed items see section 5 1 Types of Characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard and spaces IM 760301 01E 5 13 1ueuloJnseoe u JOMOd a 5 4 Setting the User Defi
302. nding to the displayed element to select the target element 5 Pressthe cursor keys to set the CT ratio 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set the CT ratio for all elements Scaling pr ow MN f Scaling Item vi E s Ea EVEN 1 000 Element 2 1 0000 Element 3 1 0000 Element 4 1 0009 SUOI IPUOD 1ueuaunseo y BH Setting the Power Coefficient 3 Press the Scaling Item soft key to select SF Scaling Factor Selecting the Target Element 4 Press one of the soft keys corresponding to the displayed element to select the target element 5 Pressthe cursor keys to set the power coefficient 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set the SF ratio for all elements Scaling o Scaling Item Wu vi cr BF Ji a C UT 1 0009 Element 2 1 0009 Element 3 1 0009 Element 4 1 0009 IM 760301 01E 4 15 4 5 Setting the Scaling Function When Using VT CT Explanation Set the VT ratio for the case when applying the signal to the same voltage input terminal as when the output from the secondary side of the VT is directly applied Then set the CT ratio or the transformation ratio of the current sensor that outputs current for the case when applying the signal to the same current input terminal as when the secondary output of the CT or clamp type current sensor that outputs current is directly applied and measured For details
303. ned Function Setting the Equation The combination of the measurement function and element number Urms1 for example can be used as an operand to create up to 20 equations F1 to F20 There can be up to 16 operands in one equation Measurement Functions for Computation The operators for the measurement functions are shown below in the form measurement function operand U U Urms URMS Umn UMN I I P P S S Q Q LAMBDA o PHI fU FU fl FI U pk UPPK U pk UMPK l pk IPPK I pk IMPK CfU CFU Cfl CFI Pc PC n1 ETA1 12 ETA2 n3 ETA3 n4 ETA4 Wp WH Wp WHP Wp WHM q AH q AHP q AHM Time TI The following measurement functions can also be specified on models with the motor evaluation function motor version Speed SPEED Torque TORQUE Pm PM Slip SLIP SyncSp SYNC The following measurement functions can also be specified on models with delta computation option AF1 DELTA1 AF2 DELTA2 AF3 DELTA3 AF4 DELTA4 The following measurement functions can also be specified on models with the harmonic measurement option oU UPHI ol IPHI Z Z Rs RS Xs XS Rp RP Xp XP Uhdf UHDF Ihdf IHDF Phdf PHDF Uthd UTHD Ithd ITHD Pthd PTHD Uthf UTHF Ithf ITHF Utif UTIF Itif ITIF hvf HVF hcf HCF oU1 U2 PHIU1U2 oU1 U3
304. neteseesesees 5 9 App 1 SING EUR 4 28 SMTP client function Soft KEY scsi ita teed aat i EAER EEA spare fuse RCM Fen oranie E eRT hee na Pea e E EA kana spare parts split display seen Storage environment seesessesseseeeneeeenee storage location storage medium inuenire tete deed ce storage medium information Storage operation starting of Store co nt iare eR 8 3 Store Interval 42 5 otii petia racer ct sed ve Mien c er Rede ee 8 3 Store Item Store MOO 5 ott eee eco ridens Creep Siene sarake Nonis 8 1 Store reservation time ssssssessseeeeeereennns 8 4 STORE SET Store Setting teer STOFO lO 5i na ae ere rete e Eee ee RE ea stored data saving of stray capacitance iecore perro een SUEEDG M E A E cer eese rere dette irte eed ii Cruce nepita V Sync Measure re 10 14 SYNC SOURCE cet reete rcr be ere 4 18 synchronization source 4 18 App 24 synchronized measurement ssse 2 32 10 14 system condition eese 11 7 System conditions 2 31 System configuration 2 0 2 eee cece ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeetteaeeeteneeeeteae 2 1 system errors x System Overview sse 11 7 T Page Bo Th AE eA E e re ERE TUER URB UR ER C Hr E 7 9 temperature coefficient sssssssss 12 6 12 7 Iac ETE Test I
305. ng a Directory or File 4 Press the Rename soft key to display the Rename menu Funct ion Delete Ea Rename MakeDir Format Attribute Ml Dest Dir Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory 5 Same as the procedures given in Selecting the Storage Medium and Selecting the Save Destination Directory in section 9 3 Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box 6 Same as the procedure given in Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box in section 9 6 Viewing the Properties 7 Same as the procedure given in Viewing the Properties in section 9 6 Selecting the File Attribute 8 Same as the procedure given in Selecting the File Attribute in section 9 6 Renaming a Directory or File 9 Pressthe cursor keys to select the directory or file 10 Press the File Name soft key A keyboard appears The name of the selected directory or file is displayed in the entry box of the keyboard 11 Use the keyboard to enter the directory or file name For keyboard operations see section 3 14 Entering Values and Strings Rename Rename M Function M Fu Rename R hl M File Name Fi zi 0000 SET CAPS IMERT ZIEEISI IBI TI Hp E A a gt Pe Te TA TSTCTPTETETSTHT TTJTETLTREI a Property TS BCT C EA L GAES W D DEA AEL pr ss ETE a E EA EA a Ka DA E TES Filter F Item an 1 tem Attrib
306. ntal frequency Harmonic distortion factor The ratio of the rms value of the specified n order harmonic contained in the distorted wave to the rms value of the fundamental wave or all waves Harmonic order Integer ratio of the harmonic frequency with respect to the fundamental frequency Total harmonic distortion The ratio of the rms value of all harmonics to the rms value of the fundamental wave or all waves Interference Caused by Harmonics Below are some of the effects on electric devices and equipment caused by harmonics Condenser and series reactor Harmonic current reduces the circuit impedance causing excessive current to flow This results in vibration beat overheat or burnout Cable Harmonic current flows through the neutral line of a three phase four wire system causing the neutral line to overheat Transformer Causes magnetostrictive noise of the iron core and increases iron loss and copper loss Breaker and fuse Excessive harmonic current causes erroneous operation and fuse to blow Communication line Electromagnetic induction causes noise voltage Controller Distorted control signal causes erroneous operation Audio visual equipment Causes degradation of performance and service life flickering of video caused by noise and malfunction of parts xipueddy IM 760301 01E App 19 Appendix 4 Power Basics Power Harmonics and RLC of AC Circuits RLC of AC Circuits Resistance Current i wh
307. o determine the measurement function data can be selected User Defined Functions For procedures see section 5 4 Equations can be created defined by combining the measurement function symbols and operators The numeric data corresponding to the equation can then be determined The combination of a measurement function and element number U1 U E1 ORT for example constitutes an operand 20 equations F1 through F20 can be defined Operator There are 11 operators ABS absolute value SQR square SQRT square root LOG logarithm LOG10 common logarithm EXP exponent and NEG negation Number of Operands There can be up to 16 operands in one equation MAX Hold For procedures see section 5 5 Holds the maximum value of the numeric data The measurement function of which the maximum value is to be held is specified using the user defined function Setting the Average Active Power For procedures see section 5 6 The average active power can be computed on devices on which the power fluctuates such as an intermittent control device The computing equation for average active power is specified using the user defined function Setting the Computing Equation for Efficiency For procedures see section 5 7 By setting equations for n1 to n4 the input output efficiency of a device can be measured For example if the input power to a device is PXA and the output power is PXB the power conversion e
308. o select one of the reservation year month date hour minute and second boxes for specifying when the integration operation will start 13 Press SET An entry box appears 14 Press the cursor keys to set the year month date hour minute or second that you selected in step 12 15 Press SET or ESC to close the box 16 Repeat steps 12 to 15 to set the year month date hour minute and second 17 Press the cursor keys to select one of the reservation year month date hour minute and second boxes for specifying when the integration operation will end 18 Repeat steps 13 to 16 to set the year month date hour minute and second Timer Settin O 00000 E on Timer Setting Real Time Control D A Output Rated Time IM 760301 01E 5 33 1ueulioJnseoe u JOMOd E 5 12 Setting the Real time Integration Mode the Integration Timer and the Reservation Time Explanation For functional details see section 2 6 To perform integration the integration mode and integration time must be set before starting the operation This section will describe how to set the normal integration mode and the integration time for real time control For the procedure to start the integration see section 5 14 Selecting the Real time Normal Integration Mode or Real time Repetitive Integration Mode In this mode integration is performed between the times specified by integration start and stop Th
309. o the earth potential of the power source SOURCE Easily affected Not easily affected Ys LA U U SOURCE A LOAD SOURCE LOAD o l Effects due to the Amplitude of the Measured Voltage and Current When the measurement current When the measurement current is relatively large is relatively small Connect the voltage measurement Connect the current measurement terminal to the load side terminal to the load side LOAD SOURCE LOAD SOURCE Explanation For details on the effects of stray capacitance and the effects due to the amplitude of the measured voltage and current see appendix 5 For Making Accurate Measurements IM 760301 01E 3 11 sjuswainseayy Bunes o40Jog BH 3 8 Guide for Selecting the Method Used to Measure the Power Select the measurement method according to the amplitude of the measured voltage or current from the table below For details on the wiring methods see the respective sections Measurement Method of Voltage When the voltage is less When the voltage than or equal to 1000 V exceeds 1000 V Voltage Direct input See section 3 9 Direct input is not possible wiring VT See section 3 11 Measurement Method of Current When the voltage is less than or equal to 1000 V When the current is less When the current Bib ue ke ad than or equal to 30 A exceeds 30 A exceeds Direct input See s
310. of input element 2 Total rms value of the voltage Rms value of the fundamental wave of the voltage SQRT SQR U E2 ORT SQR U E2 OR1 Note An equation F1 to F20 cannot be placed inside another equation F1 to F20 If an operand in the equation is undetermined the computation result displays no data For example this occurs if a measurement function of a delta computation is in the equation but the delta computation is turned OFF or a measurement function of an element that is installed is in the equation 5 16 IM 760301 01E 5 5 Setting MAX hold a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Sian A numeri WAVE U LIP s a cud HOLD toca Cursor keys lt gt WPIq X OTHERS ug FU FI m SINGLE CAL ITEM FORM USER Femen INTEG sur mE LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL Y scnuns renes l AVG To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above WOOR FREG the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the Or cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and FILE IMAGE save STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 pr msc Crap MENU Turn
311. on the measurement functions of harmonic measurement option Setting the Attenuation Constant If averaging is turned ON and the averaging type is Exp exponential averaging exponential averaging is performed using the selected attenuation constant 2 4 8 16 32 or 64 Measurement Functions That Are Averaged The measurement functions that are directly averaged are indicated below Other functions that use these functions in their computation are also affected by the averaging For details regarding the determination of each measurement function see appendix 1 U k I k P k S k and Q k A k and k are computed from the averaged P k and Q k Z Rs Xs Rp Xp Uhdf Ihdf Phdf Uthd Ithd Pthd Uthf Ithf Utif Itif hvf and hcf k harmonic order Note The following measurement functions are not affected by averaging Measurement functions of normal measurement fU fl U pk U pk I pk I pk Time Wp Wp Wp Wp Wp X Wp X and Sync Spd models with the motor evaluation function Measurement functions of harmonic measurement option oU k ol k 9Ui Uj Ui Uk QUi li QUi lj and QUi Ik k harmonic order IM 760301 01E 4 25 suonipuo 1ueuaunseo y BH 4 10 Selecting the Data Update Rate Procedure To exit the menu during ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE Ensas Operation press ESC eO located above the soft oro A CA o Cv CY In
312. ons When integration is not performed Approx 4 K 4xDn 16xnumber of storage operations When integration is performed Approx 4K 4xDn 16 16xTi number of storage operations Qn Number of numeric data to be stored Number of measurement functionsx number of elements mber of wiring units o5 Number of integration time to be stored aimed yc Option n Data Type EXtensio aS ytes onditionNnumber of elements 1 measurement m a hers maxi ASCII CSV aximum order 100 10 storage During Gs Float WTD Approx d 4x 16xnumber 9r storage operations NNumber of ore bas to be Stored are fo storedNNumber of elements x ea Mop of el When Others are ecd ge th h The maximum harmonic order to be analyzed that is sp fled in During normal measurement Data Type Extension Data Size Bytes ASCII CSV Approx 103 K condition when there is oh waveform to be Float FLD Approx 4K 4x1002xTw 16 xnumber of storage operations Tw is the number of waveforms to be stored During harmonic measurement option Same as for normal measurement IM 760301 01E 8 17 eea paJ01S eui Burnes pue ejeg Burjjeoeg pue Bunos Ile 8 5 Saving the Stored Data Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory Storage media on which saving and reading is possible are displayed in the File List dialog box Display Example of Storage Media PC_Car
313. ons UZ IZ PZ Sx Q Pcx WPX and qX indicate the case when input elements 1 2 and 3 are set to the wiring system shown in the table If elements 2 3 and 4 are set to the wiring system shown in the table replace the numbers 1 2 and 3 with 2 3 and 4 respectively Equation TYPE 3 for SX and QX can be selected only on models with the harmonic measurement option S Q and o on the WT3000 are derived through the computation of the measured values of voltage current and active power except Q is calculated directly from the sampled data when TYPES is selected If distorted signal is input the value obtained on this instrument may differ from that obtained on other instruments using a different measurement principle For Q var computation when the current leads the voltage the Q value is displayed as a negative value when the current lags the voltage the Q value is displayed as a positive value The value of Q may be negative because it is calculated from Q of each element including the sign For details on the measurement functions of the motor evaluation function see section 1 10 in the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E For details on the measurement functions of harmonic measurement see section 7 9 in the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E IM 760301 01E App 3 xipueddy Appendix 2 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numeric Data Initial Settings Factory Default E
314. ons for controlling the Communication Interface WT3000 using communication User s Manual CD ROM commands Vol 2 3 WT3000 Precision Power Analyzer IM 760301 51E Explains the expansion functions Expansion Function User s Manual options of the WT3000 and their Vol 3 3 operating procedures The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of continuing improvements to the instrument s performance and functions The figures given in this manual may differ from those that actually appear on your screen Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without the permission of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is strictly prohibited The TCP IP software of this product and the document concerning the TCP IP software have been developed created by YOKOGAWA based on the BSD Networking Software Release 1 that has been licensed from the University of California MS DOS is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Adobe Acrobat and Acrobat Reader are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated For purposes of this manual the TM
315. onsumed watt hour WP X Sum of negative P watt hour returned to the power supply q Sum of positive and negative ampere hours q Sum of positive ampere hour q X Sum of negative ampere hour WSX Integration of SX WQz Integration of Q For details on the measurement functions of motor evaluation see section 1 10 in the Expansion Function User s Manual For details on the measurement functions of harmonic measurement see section 7 9 in the Expansion Function User s Manual 12 4 IM 760301 01E 12 4 Accuracy Voltage and Current Accuracy Item Specifications Accuracy accuracy at 6 months Conditions Temperature 23 5 C Humidity 30 to 75 RH Input waveform Sine wave Common mode voltage 0 V Line filter OFF power factor 1 Crest factor 3 After warm up time has passed Wired condition after zero level compensation or measurement range change f is the frequency Frequency Accuracy reading error measurement range error DC 0 05 of reading 0 05 of range 0 1 Hz lt f lt 30 Hz 0 1 of reading 0 2 of range 30 Hz lt f lt 45 Hz 0 03 of reading 0 05 of range 45 Hz lt f lt 66 Hz 0 01 of reading 0 03 of range 66 Hz lt f lt 1 kHz 0 03 of reading 0 05 of range 1 kHz lt f lt 10 kHz 0 1 of reading 0 05 of range 10 kHz lt f x 50 kHz 0 3 of reading 0 1 of range 50 kHz lt f lt 100 kHz 0 012 x f of reading
316. ontinuous Integration The integration time is set in relative time When the specified time elapses the operation is automatically reset and restarted Integration is repeated until STOP is pressed When the integration value reaches the maximum or minimum integration display value the integration time and value are held Hold Integration value Hold Integration time Timer Timer Timer lt e gt lt value value value Reset Start Press STOP 2 20 IM 760301 01E 2 6 Integration Real Time Normal Integration Mode The date and time of start and stop of the integration operation are set The integration is stopped at the specified time or when the integration value reaches the maximum or minimum integration display value The integration time and value are held at that point Hold Integration value Hold Integration time Start date time Stop date time Reset Real Time Repetitive Integration Mode Continuous Integration The start and stop of the integration operation are set with the date and time The integration is repeated at the specified timer setting during that time When the time specified by the timer elapses the operation is automatically reset and restarted The integration is stopped at the specified time or when the integration value reaches the maximum or minimum integration display value The integration time and value are held at that point Integration Hold value Integration Hold time Time
317. ooming Vertically and Moving the Vertical To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT OREMOTE procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For numeri WAVE OTHERS ITEM FORM USER U I P 0 1 6 WP q us RE oo ss CAL INTEG ELEMENT LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL LOCAL details on the procedures see section 3 14 s To display waveforms set the display mode to Wave Numeric Wave Wave Trend or Wave Bar 1 Press ITEM to display the Wave Items menu If the waveform display is at the lower section of the screen on the split display press SHIFT ITEM LOWER ITEM 2 Selecting the Target Element 3 Only the installed elements are displayed 4 target element Wave Items Wave Display V Zoom amp Position Frequency Meas Item Element Element 1 U Position 0 00 7 x1 0 00 7 For the setup procedure see section 6 1 Displayed only on models with the harmonic measurement option Press the V Zoom amp Position soft key to display the V Zoom amp Pos menu Press the Element soft key to display the Element menu Press one of
318. option Others Numer ic Wave Numer ic Bar Numeric Trend IM 760301 01E 5 1 1ueulioJnseoe u JOMOd I 5 1 Displaying Numeric Data and Changing the Displayed Items The following procedures are given as typical examples in which the display mode is set to Numeric numeric data on the entire screen Selecting the Number of Displayed Items 2 Press FORM to display the Numeric Form menu 3 Press any of the soft keys from 4 Items 8 Items 16 Items All Items Single List and Dual List to select the number of displayed items Only on models with the harmonic measurement option Li n 4 Items 8 Items 16 Items All Items Single List Dual List There are three methods to select the item to change measurement function and element wiring unit Select using the function select keys Select using the user defined function select key USER key Select from the menu IM 760301 01E 5 1 Displaying Numeric Data and Changing the Displayed Items Changing Using the Function Select Keys The display of measurement functions of U I P S Q A 6 WP q TIME FU Fl and n and the element wiring unit can be changed using function select keys Selecting the Item to Be Changed 4 Press ESC to clear the Numeric Form menu 5 Press the cursor keys to select the item to be changed The item to be changed is highl
319. or 6 Press the Cursor Path soft key to display the Cursor Path menu 7 Press any of the soft keys from Max to Mid to select the movement path Moving the Cursor 8 Press the Wave C1 Wave C2 x soft key to set the cursor target to Wave C1 Wave C2 x or both Wave C1 and Wave C2 x f you select Wave C1 the position of cursor can be moved f you select Wave C2 x the position of cursor x can be moved f you select both Wave C1 and Wave C2 x the two cursors can be moved without changing the spacing between the two The value of the digit being specified by Wave C1 changes 9 Press the cursor keys to move the cursor Cursor Cursor Wave Cursor Wave Cursor Cursor Cursor Wave Cursor Wave Cursor Set bj 11 PFF ON prr ON PFF ON ON u2 2 A Wavect Trace M WaveC1 Trace u4 14 WaveC2 Trace M WaveC2 Trace M WaveC2 Trace M WaveC2 Trace 11 Speed Torque LK Cursor Path j Max Wave C2 X F 8 Oms Cursor Path Max M wave C1 E 2 0ms b Wave C2 X C 8 Oms JJ 6 24 IM 760301 01E 6 9 Cursor Measurement Explanation For functional details see section 2 6 ON OFF A cursor can be placed on the displayed waveform to measure and display the value at any point It can be used to measure the voltage and current of various sections of the waveform and the data
320. or Cr Lf Date Time Display On Config Message Language ENG Menu Language ENG Alphabet Font Gothic LCD Brightness 2 Key Lock Off Shift Lock Off Crest Factor CF3 Graph Color Mode Default Text Color Mode Preset 1 App 8 IM 760301 01E Appendix 2 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numeric Data Example of the Display Order of Numeric Data Example for a Model with Four Input Elements Installed 4 Item Display When the order of the numeric data is reset the measurement function data are displayed in the order given in the next table For details on each display see section 5 1 as well as sections 1 1 and 7 1 in the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Display Page 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 U1 U2 U3 U4 UXA UXB WP1 9 n1 l1 12 I3 l4 IZA IZB WP2 Speed P1 P2 P3 P4 PXA PXB WP3 Torque M 8 Item Display A2 A3 M AXA AXB WP4 Pm Display Page 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 U2 U3 U4 UXA UXB WP1 l1 I2 I3 l4 IZA IZB qi WPXA n1 n2 qXA P1 P2 P3 P4 PXA PXB WP2 WPXB n3 1 S2 S3 S4 SZA S B q2 q B n4 Q1 A1 Q2 Q3 Q4 QXA QXB WP3 F1 Speed Torque 91 SyncSpd fU FreqU 1 16 Item Display Pm Display Page 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 U1 U2 U3 U4 UXA WP1 WP3 9 F1 n I2
321. or details on the hold function during integration see section 5 14 4 28 IM 760301 01E Chapter 5 Power Measurement 5 1 Displaying Numeric Data and Changing the Displayed Items Procedure To exit the menu during ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE operation press ESC eO located above the soft keys ELEMENT In the procedural AL explanation below the UEASURING EASURING phrase press the cursor WIRING Ci e C H MODE keys may be used This INPUT INFO phrase refers to the procedures for selecting a DISPLAY 2 A WAVE DD CA e EKO MENJ vus 0 1 RAE HOLD Ex E Die CAL v O l ITEM FORM l user ELEMENT INTEG lt LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM i USER SET O AL a Y o orme and character strings For details on the procedures See section 3 14 Q o gt r items and entering values Cursor keys a G SHIFT Function select key Displaying Numeric Data on the Entire Screen 1 Press NUMERIC to display numeric data Displaying Numeric Data by Dividing the Display into Halves Split Display 1 Press OTHERS to display the Others menu 2 Press any of the soft keys from Numeric wave Numeric Bar and Numeric Trend to select the display mode Displayed only on models with the harmonic measurement
322. or reduce each displayed waveform voltage current You can select the zoom factor from the following 0 1 0 2 0 25 0 4 0 5 0 75 0 8 1 1 14 1 25 1 33 1 41 1 5 1 6 1 77 2 2 28 2 66 2 83 3 2 3 54 4 5 8 10 12 5 16 20 25 40 50 and 100 Moving the Position Vertical Direction Only The displayed position of the waveform can be moved vertically to the desired position such as when you wish to view the mutual relationship between the voltage and current waveforms or when the section of the waveform you wish to view goes out of the display frame The position can be set in the range from 0 000 to 130 000 When the zoom factor is 1 half of the total vertical span of the waveform display screen equal to measurement range x 3 or measurement range x 6 when the crest factor is set to 3 or 6 respectively is considered to be 10096 The span between the vertical center of the screen to the upper limit of the screen is 10096 the span between the vertical center of the screen to the lower limit of the screen is 10096 100 7 p Move the position by 50 gt Move the position by 50 100 _ E When the zoom factor is not 1 the value equal to the measurement range x 3 10096 or measurement range x 6 100926 when the crest factor is set to 3 or 6 respectively is not located at the upper and lower limi
323. or the External Start Stop Signal and Time Chart 5 V 100 Q Start Stop input signal WW 2 gt Minimum pulse width Start Stop input signal Input delay time Trigger occurrence Measurement start N CAUTION When the instrument is set to master do not apply external voltage to the external start stop signal input output connector START STOP If you do the instrument may malfunction Applying a voltage outside the 0 to 5 V range to the external start stop signal input output connector when the instrument is set to slave may cause damage to the instrument 10 16 IM 760301 01E Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Maintenance and Inspection 11 1 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting f a message is displayed on the screen read the following pages If servicing is necessary or if the instrument is not operating correctly after performing the corrective actions contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Problem and Corrective Action Reference Section Nothing shows up on the display when the power switch is turned ON Securely connect the power cord to the power connector of the instrument 3 3 and the power outlet Set supply voltage within the permitted range 3 3 Check the display settings 10 6 Check that the fuse is not blown 11 5 The displayed data is not correct Check that t
324. or the input signal level when the crest factor is set to 6 Frequency measurement filter Frequency filter see section 12 1 Integration Item Specifications Mode Select from manual normal repetitive real time normal and real time repetitive Measurement function See section 12 3 Integration timer Automatic stop of integration by setting a timer 0000h00m00s to 10000h00m00s Count overflow When the integration time reaches its maximum 10000 hours or the integration value reaches its maximum or minimum 4999999 MWh or 999999 MAh the integration time and integration value at that point are held and the integration is stopped Accuracy Power accuracy or current accuracy timer accuracy Timer accuracy 0 02 of reading IM 760301 01E 12 9 suoleoyioeds H 12 5 Functions Computation Item Specifications User defined function Computes numeric data of equations up to 20 equations that are created by combining the measurement function symbols and operators Average active power setting Set with the user defined function Efficiency equation setting Computes numeric data of equations up to four equations that are created by combining the measurement function symbols Compensation setting Computes wiring compensation efficiency compensation and two wattmeter compensation Equation for apparent power and reactive power
325. ore Interval 4 Press the Interval Press the cursor keys to sele i the h Press SET to display the entry P pid Press the cursor keys to seNhe hotr pues p SACO 9i step 5 For the procedures on how to enter Y Entering Values and Strings Press SET or ESC to close the box Repeat steps 5 to 8 to set the hour minute aqd second eo 9 Mode a flenory File Recall Setting Convert Memory Initialize Henory Exec DISPLAY women WAVE ITEM amp ELEMENT U I P save OREMOTE UPDATE POAT HOLD LOCAL weg rmn SINGLE CAL mem FORM USER ELEMENT INTEG sarr LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 tore Ss sofikey to display the Store Setting dialog box OS S Setting SOY dev e Interval Setting dialog box le r fpinute orc second box y at you selected in section 3 14 lues ust 2 eys see o Store Setting 4 Mode Store Set Mode Recall Manual Interval Setting Convert Memory Initial
326. orm Display Displaying Waveform Labels For procedures see section 6 8 Waveform labels can be turn ON or OFF Ur SOLD V Upper limit 1f AR L Waveform label 15 00 A Lower limit LE 5 cadis am Time at the right end of the screen Time at the left end of the screen Cursor Measurement For procedures see sections 6 9 and 7 8 The value at the crossing point of the waveform and cursor can be measured and displayed It can be used to measure the voltage and current of various sections of the waveform and the data on the horizontal axis X axis Cursor measurements are performed on the data that is displayed on the screen Cursors are the and x marks that are displayed on the screen The vertical value and the X axis value from the left end of the screen for each cursor can be measured In addition the difference in the vertical values and in the X axis values between the cursors can be measured Cursor Cursor x xe 7000 0us Measured value Xx 27 000ms ax 20 000ms wax 50 000 Hz IM 760301 01E 2 27 uondiosog jeuonouneJ Hu 2 8 Trend Bar Graph and Vector Displays Trends of each measurement function bar graphs of harmonics of each order and vectors of the fundamental signal of each element when using the harmonic measurement option can be displayed Trend display The trends of all measurement functions that are measured during normal meas
327. ote 5555 Note that if you format a storage medium that has data stored on it all of the stored data are cleared l ttakes a few seconds to format a PC card 9 4 IM 760301 01E 9 3 Saving Setup Parameters the data on it CAUTION Do not remove the PC card or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or icon of the PC card is blinking Such acts can damage the PC card or destroy Procedure Qc CP D SCALING MOTOR SET La YU FREQ FILTER HRM SET measure erne source CURSOR NULL FILE PRINT MENU 1 2 M File uti Setup MENU STORE SET DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT OREMOTE NUMERIC WAVE mes ITEM FORM U I P S 0 1 0 USER ELEMENT UPDATE PDA HOLD sas CAL INTEG LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL LOCAL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 Press FILE to display the File menu Press the Save soft key to display the Save Menu menu Item lity IM 760301 01E 9 3 Saving Setup Parameters 3 P
328. our nearest YOKOGAWA dealer 2 The Overvoltage Category is a value used to define the transient overvoltage condition and includes the impulse withs voltage regulation CAT Il applies to electrical equipment that is powered through a fixed installation such as a wall ou wired to a distribution board tand tlet 8 Measurement Category II CAT Il applies to electrical equipment that is powered through a fixed installation such as a wall outlet wired to a distribution board and measurement performed on such wiring 4 Pollution Degree applies to the degree of adhesion of a solid liquid or gas which deteriorates withstand voltage or surface resistivity Pollution Degree 1 applies to closed atmospheres with no or only dry non conductive pollution Pollution Degree 2 applies to normal indoor atmospheres with only non conductive pollution 5 Use cables of length 3 m or less 6 Annex A specifications Immunity test requirement for equipment used in commercial environment IM 760301 01E 12 15 suoneoiyi2ods H 12 12 External Dimensions
329. peak C U cfi Pc gt Element 3 Time P wp uP q q q Element 4 ws wo m 92 23 4 AF1 Za ar2 4F3 4FA QUi Uj ui uk Ui li Ui lj zB X Selecting the Harmonic Order Applicable Only on Models with the Harmonic Measurement Option 11 Press Order soft key 12 Press the cursor keys to select the order from normal measured value and 0 to the maximum measured order see section 7 5 in the Expansion Function User s Manual Trend Items S Trend object T1 M Function K Element dement 1 Pre GRE Order To check the trend display settings use the setup parameter list function see section 3 16 7 6 IM 760301 01E 7 3 Selecting the Trend Display Target Explanation Set the item to be shown on the trend display You can set 16 lines of trends trend 1 T1 through trend 16 T16 Selecting the Measurement Function The types of measurement functions that can be selected are the items that are indicated in Types of Measurement Functions during Normal Measurement of section 2 2 User Defined Function and Corrected Power of section 2 5 Measurement Functions of Integration Motor Evaluation Function Motor Version Delta Computation Option and Harmonic Measurement Option in section 2 6 1 For details see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Selecting the Element Wiring Unit You can select the element w
330. pecified trigger condition is met At this point the waveform is ready to be displayed on the screen Trigger Mode Trigger mode specifies the conditions for updating the screen display Auto Mode If a trigger occurs within a specified amount of time about 100 ms referred to as the timeout period the waveform display is updated If a trigger does not occur within the timeout time the display is automatically updated when the timeout time elapses Normal Mode The display is updated only when the trigger occurs The display is not updated if the trigger does not occur Trigger Source Trigger source refers to the signal that is used in checking the trigger condition Trigger Slope Trigger slope refers to the movement of the signal from a low level to a high level rising edge or from a high level to a low level falling edge When the slope is used as one of the trigger conditions it is called a trigger slope Trigger Level Trigger level refers to the level through which the trigger slope passes When the slope of the trigger source passes through the specified trigger level on a rising or falling edge a trigger is activated You can select the input signal of each element or external clock input signal as a trigger source Trigger level Trigger source I When set to rising 4 the trigger occurs here trigger point Trigger Point Trigger point refers to the point at which a trigger occur
331. perties in section 9 6 IM 760301 01E 9 3 Saving Setup Parameters An error occurs if a key other than the Abort key is pressed while saving or loading a file The number of directories and files that can be displayed in the file list is 2500 If the number of directories and files in a directory exceeds 2500 the file list randomly displays 2500 of the directories and files If you change the extension of the file such as on a PC the file can no longer be loaded Files that do not have an archive attribute are not displayed in the File List window Do not remove the archive attribute of the files saved by the WT3000 using your PC Up to 42 characters can be displayed in the path If the path exceeds 42 characters is displayed at the end of the character string File names are not case sensitive Comments are case sensitive In addition the following names cannot be used due to limitations of MS DOS AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK COM1 to COMQ and LPT1 to LPT9 Setup parameters such as the date and time and communications are not saved Therefore loading setup data from a file will not change these settings Setup parameters saved on models with a different product version element configuration or options as well as models with a different firmware ROM version of incompatible data cannot be loaded IM 760301 01E 9 4 Saving the Screen Image Data Procedure CAUTION Do not remove the PC card or turn OF
332. played unit changes to kW kVA or kvar The display resolution is 600000 Because the voltage and current ranges switch independently according to range increase and decrease conditions in auto range mode different power ranges may be set for the same power value 4 8 IM 760301 01E 4 3 Setting the Measurement Range for Direct Input The combinations of the actual voltage and current ranges and the power range are listed below according to the table on the previous page when the voltage or current range of each element is set to the same range The table shows the active power range unit W The same ranges are set for apparent power unit VA and reactive power unit var Just replace the unit with VA or var when looking at the tables When the crest factor see section 4 6 is set to 3 Active Power Range of Each Element Voltage Range V Current Range A 15 0000 30 0000 60 0000 100 000 150 000 300 000 600 000 1000 00 500 000m 7 5000 W 15 0000 W 30 0000 W 50 0000 W 75 000 W 150 000 W 300 000 W 500 000 W 1 00000 15 0000 W 30 0000 W 60 0000 W 100 000 W 150 000 W 300 000 W 600 000 W 1 00000 kW 2 00000 30 0000 W 60 0000 W 120 000 W 200 000 W 300 000 W 600 000 W 1 20000 kW 2 00000 kw 5 00000 75 000 W 150 000 W 300 000 W 500 00
333. power Q S P Q App 18 IM 760301 01E Appendix 4 Power Basics Power Harmonics and RLC of AC Circuits Harmonics Harmonics refer to sine waves whose frequency is an integer multiple of the fundamental wave normally sine waves of commercial frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz excluding the fundamental frequency The input current that flows through the power rectification circuit phase control circuit and other circuits used in various electric and electronic equipment generate harmonic current or voltage on the power line When the fundamental and harmonic waves are combined distortion occurs in the waveform and interference sometimes occur in equipment connected to the power line Terminology Terminology related to harmonics is described below Fundamental wave fundamental component The sine wave with the longest period among the different sine waves derived from the periodic complex wave Or the sine wave that has the fundamental frequency within the components of the complex wave Fundamental frequency The frequency corresponding to the longest period in the periodic complex wave The frequency of the fundamental wave Distorted wave A wave that differs from the fundamental wave Higher harmonic A sine wave with frequency that is an integer multiple twice or greater of the fundamental frequency Harmonic component A waveform component with frequency that is an integer multiple twice or greater of the fundame
334. power and power factor more accurately on an unbalanced three phase circuit it is recommended that a three phase three wire system three voltage three current system 3P3W 3V3A be used to make the measurement The following wiring examples are for connecting CTs When connecting a clamp type current sensor that outputs current substitute the CT with the clamp type current sensor The assignment of elements to the input terminals in the following figure varies depending on the number of installed input elements For details see Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems in section 2 3 Measurement Conditions Wiring Example of a Single Phase Two Wire System 1P2W Using VT and CT SOURCE LOAD SOURCE LOAD 2 Input terminal Input terminal Wiring Example of a Single Phase Three Wire System 1P3W Using VT and CT SOURCE LOAD G4 O 2 2 Input terminal 1 Input terminal 2 IM 760301 01E 3 21 sjuswainseayy Bunes e40Jog BH 3 11 Wiring the Circuit under Measurement When Using the VT CT Wiring Example of a Three Phase Three Wire System 3P3W Using VT and CT R SOURCE LOAD S T O oL jvvr oL DV VT 000 TOU 000 TOU I I I 1 1 O Ol 1 0 Ovi 1 O Ol i Ovi ax s tee
335. proportional to the rotating speed of the motor and the DC voltage analog signal or pulse count signal received from a torque meter which is proportional to the motor s torque In addition the synchronous speed and slip of a motor can be determined by setting the motor s number of poles Furthermore the active power and frequency that are measured by the WT3000 and the motor output can be used to compute the motor efficiency and the total efficiency For details see chapter 1 Motor Evaluation Function Motor Version in the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E IM 760301 01E uondiosog jeuonouneJ Hu 2 2 Measurement Function and Measurement Period Determining the Voltage and Current Elements Wiring System There are four types of measurement functions for voltage U and current I Urms Irms True Rms Value These values are the true rms values of the voltage and current The instantaneous values over one period are squared and averaged Then the square root of the value is determined f t and T represent the input signal as a function of time and the period of the input signal respectively 11 Urms or Irms Li f t dt T 0 Umn Imn Rectified Mean Value Calibrated to the Rms Value This function rectifies one period of the voltage or current signal determines the average and multiplies the result by a coefficient The coefficient is a value that when applied to a sinusoidal input signal gives the
336. quation for Apparent Power and Reactive Power For 5 procedures see section 5 9 o There are three types of powers active power reactive power and apparent power D In general each type is defined by the following equations 9 Active power P Ulcos eessse eem 1 9 Reactive power Q Ulsin ccccccscscsscscscsesesscecseseecstsesesecetscsens 2 3 Apparent power S Ul ooo eeeceeceeeeeeeneeteeeeneeseaeeeeeesnaeeeneeeeeeetae 3 S where U rms voltage I rms current and Phase between voltage and current For three phase power it is the sum of the powers of each phase In addition these power values are related as follows Apparent power S active power P reactive power 4 These definitions apply only for sine waves The measured values for apparent power and reactive power vary for distorted waveform measurement depending on which definitions above are combined for the computation Because the equations for deriving the power for distorted waveforms are not defined none of the equations can be said to be more correct than the other Therefore the WT3000 provides three equations for determining the apparent power and reactive power Because active power is derived directly from the sampled data errors resulting from different definitions do not occur such as in the apparent power and reactive power TYPE 1 The Method Used by Normal Mode of Conventional WT Series Power Meters The appa
337. r Timer Timer value value value Reset Start date time Stop date time IM 760301 01E 2 21 uondiosog jeuonouneJ H 2 7 Waveform Display The WT3000 displays waveforms based on the data sampled within the data update rate Selecting the Waveform to Be Displayed For procedures see section 6 2 You can select whether to show or hide the voltage and current waveforms of each input element This feature enables easy viewing of waveforms as only the required waveforms can be displayed Vertical Amplitude Axis The vertical display range is determined based on the specified measurement range For example if the crest factor is set to 3 and the voltage measurement range is set to 100 Vrms then the display range is set so that the top of the screen is 300 Vpk 100 Vrms x 3 and the bottom is 300 Vpk 100 Vrms x 3 with the zero input line at the center If the crest factor is set to 6 and the voltage measurement range is set to 50 Vrms then the display range is set so that the top of the screen is 300 Vpk 50 Vrms x 6 and the bottom is 300 Vpk 50 Vrms x 6 with the zero input line at the center The waveform clips if this range is exceeded When measured at the measurement When the same signal is measured at range of 100 Vrms the measurement range of 300 Vrms 300 Vpk 900 Vpk Input zero lines
338. r 8 Storing and Recalling Data and Saving the Stored Data 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 Setting the Store Mode oe eoeren vere n ent ra ie easet den 8 1 Setting the Store Count the Store Interval and the Store Reservation Time 8 3 Setting the Numeric Data and Waveform Display Data to Be Stored 8 6 Storing Data iip ua cnr Ee ne p nc ERR Ei e pc ek e De gs 8 10 Saving the Stored Data pde et RE ROO UR PR T 8 13 Recalling the Stored Data sisarien roerien isnie oe iiiaae ia Eaa G aeaa 8 20 IM 760301 01 Contents Chapter 9 Saving and Loading Data Chapter 10 Other Functions A Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Specifications IM 760301 01 9 1 PC CAN OS E trey atc LI I MI NM 9 1 9 2 Formatting the PG Card seen iesus Mecscevenseesresecieeateseutinscencere 9 2 9 3 Saving Setup Parameters sssesssssssssesseseseeeeenee enne nre nnne tenens nnne 9 5 9 4 Saving the Screen Image Data sssssssssssseeeeeneeenenee nene 9 10 9 5 Loading Setup Parameters sessssssseeeeeeennen nene eene nennen 9 14 9 6 Specifying the File to Be Displayed Displaying File Properties and Selecting File AttriQUteS m 9 17 9 7 Deleting Files 3 8 eee CERE aii es 9 20 98 COPYING FIGS oes 9 23 9 9 Renaming Files or Directories and Creating Directories
339. r Reset Integration 5 14 integration time has reached its preset value 842 Attempted to start integration while 5 14 integration is in progress 843 Measurement stopped due to overflow Reset Integration 5 14 during integration or due to a power failure 844 Attempted to stop integration even though 5 14 integration was not in progress 845 Attempted to reset integration even though 5 14 integration was in progress or integration mode was not selected 846 Attempted to start integration while 5 14 measurement of peak overflow was in progress or during an overrange condition 847 Attempted to start integration in continuous 5 11 integration mode when integration preset time was set to 0 848 Attempted made to start integration in real 5 12 time counting integration mode when the end time had already passed 857 Cannot be set while Master Slave 10 9 Synchronized Measurement is set to Slave 864 This wiring cannot be set as the first 4 1 selected element 865 Cannot be set while integration is running Stop or reset Integration IM 760301 01E B uonoedsu pue e ueuejure y bunoouso qno4 11 2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions Error in System Operation Code Message Corrective Action Reference Section 901 Failed to backup setup data The system has been initialized Maintenance service is required 3 4 902 System RAM failure Maintenance service is required
340. r s data and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences Note Calls attention to information that is important for proper operation of the instrument On pages that describe the operating procedures in chapters 3 through 11 the following symbols displayed characters and terminology are used to distinguish the procedures from their explanations Follow the numbered steps All procedures are written with inexperienced users in mind experienced users may not need to carry out all the steps Explanation This subsection describes the setting parameters and the limitations on the procedures It may not give a detailed explanation of the function For a detailed explanation of the function see chapter 2 Displayed Characters and Terminology Used in the Procedural Explanations Panel Keys and Soft keys Bold characters used in the procedural explanations indicate characters that are marked on the panel keys or the characters of the soft keys or menus displayed on the screen SHIFT Panel Key SHIFT key means you will press the SHIFT key to turn ON the SHIFT key followed by the operation key The setup menu marked in purple below the panel key that you pressed appears on the screen k Denotes 1000 Example 12 kg 100 kHz K Denotes 1024 Example 459 KB file data size IM 760301 01E vii Flow of Operation The figure below is provided to familiarize the first time user with the general flow
341. r the accuracy when the crest factor is set to 3 Accuracy of Other Parameters and Computation Accuracy Accuracy of apparent power S Voltage accuracy current accuracy Accuracy of reactive power Q Accuracy of apparent power 4 1 0004 22 1 22 x100 Of range Accuracy of power factor A A 2 1 0002 cos cos o sin 1 influence from the power factor when X 0 100 1 digit when voltage and current is at rated input of the measurement range Accuracy of phase difference cos 1 A 1 0002 sin 1 influence from the power factor when A 0 100 deg 1 digit when voltage and current is at rated input of the measurement range For the accuracy of frequency fU and fl see Frequency Measurement in section 12 5 Functions For the accuracy of measured values WP WP WP q q and q and the integration time see Integration in section 12 5 Functions For the accuracies of voltage current and power during harmonic measurement the accuracies of rotating speed and torque and the accuracy of D A output see the respective sections in the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E IM 760301 01E 12 7 suoleoyioeds H 12 5 Functions Measurement Function and Measurement Conditions Item Specifications Measurement method Digital multiplier method Crest factor Select 3 or 6 when rated value of the measurement range is input 300 fo
342. r the data update rate so that more periods of the input signal fit within the data update interval IM 760301 01E App 25 Appendix 6 Setting the Measurement Period When the Waveform of the Synchronization Source Is Distorted Change the synchronization source to a signal that allows more stable detection of the period change from voltage to current or from current to voltage Also turn ON the frequency filter For the setup procedure of the frequency filter see section 4 8 The WT3000 applies hysteresis to the zero crossing detection to reduce the effects of noise If the synchronization source is distorted or harmonic or noise is superposed on the signal to a level exceeding this hysteresis zero crossing detection due to high frequency components occur frequently and the zero crossing of the fundamental frequency cannot be detected stably Consequently this may cause the measured values of voltage and current to be unstable Also when high frequency components are superposed on the current waveform such as in the aforementioned inverter example turn the frequency filter ON to stably detect the zero crossing The validity of setting the filter can be verified by a more accurate and stable frequency measurement result Frequency filter ON When Measuring a Signal with No Zero Crossing due to DC Offset Superposed on the AC Signal The measured values may be unstable if the period of the AC signal cannot be detected accura
343. r the minimum effective input Measurement period Period used to determine and compute the measurement function The measurement period is set by the zero crossing of the reference signal synchronization Source when the data update interval is 50 ms 100 ms 5 s 10 s or 20 s excluding watt hour WP as well as ampere hour q during DC mode Measured through exponential averaging on the sampled data within the data update interval when the data update interval is 250 ms 500 ms 1 s or 2 s For harmonic measurement G5 option the measurement period is from the beginning of the data update interval to 9000 points at the harmonic sampling frequency Wiring system Select the wiring system from the following 1P2W single phase two wire 1P3W single phase three wire 3P4W three phase four wire and 3P3W 3V3A three voltage three current However the selectable wiring systems vary depending on the number of input elements that are installed You may be able to select only a single wiring system or two wiring systems Measurement range See section 17 1 Compensation function Efficiency compensation Compensates for the instrumental loss during efficiency computation Wiring compensation Compensates for the instrumental loss due to wiring 2 Wattmeter Method Compensation Scaling Set the current sensor transformation ratio VT ratio CT ratio and power factor in the range of 0 0001 to 99999 9999 when
344. rage medium Loads the saved setup parameters from the storage medium PC card and network drive The Ethernet interface is an option Printing of Screen Images Prints the screen image on the internal printer The built in printer is an option IM 760301 01E 12 11 suoleoyioeds H 12 6 Input Output of the Master Slave Synchronization Signal Item Specifications Connector type BNC connector Common to the master and slave I O level TTL Common to the master and slave Output logic LJ Negative logic falling edge Applicable to the master Measurement start delay Within 1 us 1 sample period Applicable to the master time Output hold time Low level 500 ns or more Applicable to the master Input logic LI Negative logic falling edge Applicable to the slave Minimum pulse width Low level 500 ns or more Applicable to the slave Input delay time During HOLD ON Within 1 us 1 sample period Applicable to the slave During HOLD OFFWithin 63 us 1 sample period Applicable to the slave 12 7 External Clock Input Common Item Specifications Connector type BNC connector Input level TTL When Used as a Synchronization Source Ext Clk during Normal Measurement Item Specifications Frequency range Same as the measurement range of Frequency Measurement in section 12 5 Input waveform 50 duty ratio rectangular wave When Used as a PLL Source Ext Clk
345. range is reading error x 1 5 Maximum display 140 of the rated voltage or current range Minimum display Down to 0 3 of the measurement range for Urms and Irms 0 6 if the crest factor is set to 6 Down to 2 of the measurement range for Umn Urmn Imn and Irmn 4 if the crest factor is set to 6 Values lower than these figures are fixed to zero suppressed to zero The integrated current q is dependent on the current value Lower limit of measurement frequency 50ms 100ms 250ms 500ms 1s 2s 5s 10s 20s 45Hz 25Hz 20Hz 10Hz 5Hz 2Hz 0 5Hz 0 2Hz 0 1 Hz Data update interval Lower limit of measurement frequency Line filter influence When the cut off frequency is 500 Hz 45 Hz lt f lt 66 Hz Add 0 2 of reading f lt 45 Hz Add 0 5 of reading When the cut off frequency is 5 5 kHz f lt 66 Hz Add 0 2 of reading 66 Hz lt f lt 500 Hz Add 0 5 of reading When the cut off frequency is 50 kHz f lt 500 Hz Add 0 2 of reading 500 Hz lt f lt 5 kHz Add 0 5 of reading Conditions for detecting lead and lag Lead and lag are detected correctly when the voltage and current signals are both sine waves the amplitude is greater than or equal to 50 greater than or equal to 100 if the crest factor is set to 6 of the measurement range the frequency is between 20 Hz and 10 kHz and the phase difference is between 5 and 175 Temperature coefficient Add 0 02 of reading C in th
346. ration on the WT3000 However the key is invalid when the WT3000 is in local lockout mode IM 760301 01E 1 9 syed Jo suonoun pue sowen Ile Chapter 2 Functional Description 2 1 System Configuration and Block Diagram System Configuration Load Power Motor supply Y Y Current VT CT sensor Y Torque Revolution meter sensor Voltage Current Input either one Input either one Dra d d External clock input lt aM v Master slave Measurement syncsignal start stop Setup parameters Numeric data Motor evaluation Motor version Internal memory Store numeric data and waveform display data Recall numeric data and waveform display data Built in printer option Print screen image data numeric data list LEY Waveform display data Screen image data Store data Ethernet interface option PC card Screen image LS 1 2 3 GP IB interface RGB video signal VGA output M RS 232 interface option Image signal Ethernet interface option Setup parameters Numeric data D A output option Waveform display data Output the measured Numeric data Screen image data values as analog Waveform display data voltage Screen image data Store data
347. re data update interval Computation including exponential average is performed by applying digital filtering on the sampled data in this measurement period This method does not require the input signal period to be detected accurately IM 760301 01E App 31 xipueddy Appendix 8 Efficiency Compensation Function This function compensates for the loss caused by the wiring of each element The WT3000 has the following three types of correction functions to measure the power and efficiency with high accuracy Wiring Compensation Efficiency Compensation Compensation for the Two Wattmeter Method Wiring Compensation This function compensates for the loss caused by the wiring of each element U I This is used when the voltage measurement circuit is connected to the load side The measured voltage is determined by subtracting the voltage applied to the current terminal from the voltage value of each element The voltage applied to the current terminal is derived by the equation the measured current x the input resistance of the current terminal U SOURCE Loap 1M NP I U This is used when the current measurement circuit is connected to the load side The measured current is determined by subtracting the current that flows through the voltage terminal from the current value of each element The current that flows through the voltage terminal is derived by the equation the measured voltage the inpu
348. real number FUn n byte unsigned real number Bm m bit data xipueddy IM 760301 01E App 13 Appendix 4 Power Basics Power Harmonics and Power RLC of AC Circuits This chapter describes the basics of power harmonic and RLC of AC circuits Electrical energy is converted into other types of energy for use such as in the form of heat for electrical heaters and furnaces turning force for motors and light for fluorescent lamps or mercury lamps Electric power refers to the work that electricity performs on these types of loads expressed in terms of the quantity per unit time The unit is watts W and electric energy that performs 1 joule of work in 1 second equals 1 W DC Power DC power P W is determined by the product of the applied voltage U V and the current A that flows P Ul W In the example below this amount of electric energy is retrieved from the power supply and consumed by resistance R Q every second 1 Alternating Current AC Normally the power supplied by the power company is alternating current and the waveform is sinusoidal The size of alternating current can be expressed in terms of the instantaneous value maximum value rms value and mean value Normally it is expressed in terms of the rms value The instantaneous value i of the sinusoidal alternating current is expressed by Imsinat where Im is the maximum value of current is the angular velocity defined as
349. red The trigger point is always at the left end of the screen The waveform after the trigger point is displayed from the left to the right of the screen as the time progresses Trigger point Time 2 24 IM 760301 01E 2 7 Waveform Display Zooming Vertically on the Waveform For procedures see section 6 5 Each displayed waveform can be expanded or reduced vertically by the zoom factor in the range of 0 1 to 100 The waveform is zoomed around the zero input line When the zoom factor is doubled oe NEUE M NEIEEIEEEEEI Input zero lines manga displayed Baii TARRE are ee we b ERES Vertical Position of the Waveform For procedures see section 6 5 The displayed position of the waveform can be moved vertically to the desired position such as when you wish to view the mutual relationship between the voltage and current waveforms or when the section of the waveform you wish to view goes out of the display frame 100 a Move the position by 50 y Move the position by 50 100 IM 760301 01E 2 25 uondiosog jeuonouneJ H 2 7 Waveform Display Split Display of the Waveform and Assignment of Waveforms For procedures see section 6 6 The screen can be even
350. rement range when the crest factor is set to 3 less than or equal to 4 if the crest factor is set to 6 Urms Umn Urmn Irms Imn Irmn and the measurement functions that are determined using these measurement functions display zeroes A or displays an error fthe measured value of frequency is outside the measurement range fU or fl displays an error If the power factor A is greater than 1 and less than or equal to 2 becomes 1 displays zero Ifthe power factor is greater than 2 and 6 display errors If the voltage or current measurement mode is not RMS CfU or Cfl displays no numeric data IM 760301 01E 5 7 5 1 Displaying Numeric Data and Changing the Displayed Items Changing the Measurement Function The types of measurement functions that can be selected are the items that are indicated in Types of Measurement Functions during Normal Measurement of section 2 2 User Defined Function and Corrected Power of section 2 5 Measurement Functions of Integration Motor Evaluation Function Motor Version Delta Computation Option and Harmonic Measurement Option in section 2 6 Fordetails see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E You can also select not to display the measurement functions None The number 1 2 3 and 4 that is attached to the measurement function symbol of the delta computation has no relation to the element number The number attached to the user
351. rent power of each phase is calculated using equation 3 and the reactive power of each phase is calculated using equation 2 The results are summed to derive the power Active power for three phase four wire system PZ P1 P2 P3 Apparent power for three phase four wire system SX S1 S2 S3 U1xH U2xlI2 U3xlI3 Reactive power for three phase four wire system Q Q1 Q2 Q3 s1x V Ulxl1 P1 s2x U2x12 P2 s3x U3xl3 P3 However the sign for s1 s2 and s3 is positive when the current leads the voltage and negative when the current lags the voltage e TYPE2 The apparent power of each phase is determined from equation 3 and the results are added to derive the three phase apparent power The three phase reactive power is calculated from the three phase apparent power and three phase active power using equation 4 Active power for three phase four wire system P P1 P2 P3 Apparent power for three phase four wire system S S1 S2 S3 U1xl1 U2xl2 U3xI3 Reactive power for three phase four wire system Qx 4 S Px IM 760301 01E 2 17 2 5 Computation TYPE 3 The Method Used by Harmonic Measurement Mode on the WT1600 and PZ4000 The reactive power of each phase is calculated directly using equation 2 The three phase apparent power is calculated using equation 4 This computing equation can be selected on models with the harmonic measurement option Active po
352. respectively 1 When the voltage current mode is MEAN DC or RMEAN the measurement functions are Umn and Imn Udc and ldc or Urmn and Irmn respectively If all the installed input elements are selected all the element indicators are illuminated the measurement range is decreased on all input elements when the range decrease condition above of all input elements is met When a wiring unit is configured the measurement range is decreased on all input elements in the wiring unit when the range decrease condition above of all input elements in the wiring unit is met When non periodic pulse waveforms are applied during auto range the range may not remain constant If this happens use the fixed range setting Power Range The measurement ranges power ranges of active power P apparent power S and reactive power Q are as follows Wiring System Power Range 1P2W single phase two wire voltage range x current range 1P3W single phase three wire voltage range x current range x 2 3P3W three phase three wire when the voltage and current ranges on the corresponding elements are set to the same range 3P3W 3V3A three voltage three current 3P4W three phase four wire voltage range x current range x 3 Note when the voltage and current ranges on the corresponding elements are set to the same range When the result of the equation voltage range x current range exceeds 1000 W VA or var the dis
353. ress SHIFT LINE FILTER FREQ FILTER to display the Line Filter menu Only the installed elements are displayed 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the target element to select ON or OFF T Element 1 prr ON Element 2 ON Element 3 prr ON Element 4 ON Explanation There are two types of filters line filter and frequency filter Selecting the Line Filter Because the line filter is inserted into the voltage and current measurement input circuit it directly affects the voltage current and power measurements see the block diagram in section 2 1 When the line filter is turned ON the measured value does not contain high frequency components Therefore measurement of voltage current and power is possible by eliminating high frequency components from inverter waveforms strain waveforms etc The cutoff frequency can be selected from the list of choices below OFF 500 Hz 5 5 kHz and 50 kHz f any of the target elements is set to a setting other than OFF the LINE FILTER key illuminates Selecting OFF disables the filter Selecting the Frequency Filter Because the frequency filter is inserted into the frequency measurement input circuit it affects frequency measurements In addition if the display update interval of the WT3000 is set to 50 ms 100 ms 5 s 10 s or 20 s it affects the detection of the measurement period for voltage current and power measurements see appendix 6 and 7 In this ca
354. ressthe File List soft key to display the File List dialog box Selecting the Storage Medium 4 Press the cursor keys to select the storage medium indicated by 5 Press SET to confirm the storage medium Selecting the Save Destination Directory Perform this operation when directories are present on the medium 6 Press the cursor keys to select the save destination directory indicated by lt gt 7 Press SET to confirm the directory The selected storage medium directory is displayed in Path located above and to the left of the File List dialog box Select and press SET to return to a higher level directory eee 4 File List File List em Path PC CardNPC File Name LSpace 127881216 byte File Name Size Date Attribute IPC card 1 gt 2004 05 21 17 46 Save Exec Setting the File Name and Comment 8 Press the File Name soft key The Save dialog box opens 9 Pressthe cursor keys to select Auto Naming 10 Press SET to select ON or OFF 11 Press the cursor keys to select File Name 12 Press SET A keyboard appears 13 Use the keyboard to set the file name For keyboard operations see section 3 14 Entering Values and Strings 14 Enter the Comment in a similar fashion 15 Press ESC to close the Save dialog box Save Menu Save Menu K K Save File Name Sav
355. ring operation press ESC located above the soft keys A DISPLAY sjuswainseayy Bunes o40Jog BH scaua meme ava MOTOR FREQ SET FILTER um seT measure pme source CURSOR O NULL In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 9p Ss MENU 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Pressthe Date Time soft key to display the Date Time dialog box Turning ON OFF the Date Time Display 3 Pressthe cursor keys to select Display 4 Press SET to select ON or OFF Setting the Date or Time 5 Press the cursor keys to select the Date year month and day or Time hour minute second box 6 Press SET to display the entry box 7 Press the cursor keys to set the year month date hour minute or second that you selected in step 5 8 Press SET or ESC to close the box 9 Repeat steps 5 to 8 to set the entire year month date hour minute and second Confirming the New Settings 10 Press the cursor keys to select Set 11 Press SET If ON was selected in step 4 the new date and time are displayed in the lower right corner of the screen If the procedure is aborted without pressing SET th
356. rmal Wave Form M Format Single IS Time div Trigger i Mode Normal g Wave Mapping Selecting the Trigger Source 3 Press the Source soft key A trigger source selection box appears 4 Press the cursor keys to select any of the elements wiring units starting with U1 5 Press SET to confirm the new trigger source Wave Form M Format Single Time div Ruto Normal Ext Clk Wave Mapping e Selecting the Trigger Slope 3 Press the Slope soft key to select f or ft e Setting the Trigger Level 3 Press the cursor keys to set the trigger level Wave Form M Format Single S Time div Mode Ei Level 0 7 amp Wave Mapping 6 8 IM 760301 01E 6 4 Setting the Trigger Explanation AN For functional details see section 2 7 A trigger is a cue used to display the waveform on the screen The trigger is activated when the specified trigger condition is met At this point the waveform is ready to be displayed on the screen Selecting the Trigger Mode Trigger mode specifies the conditions for updating the screen display You can select the measurement range from the following Auto Enables auto mode lfatrigger occurs within the timeout time approx 100 ms the display is updated using that trigger lfatrigger does not occur within the timeout time the display is automatic
357. rmat Single eau S Time7div Sms I u Trigger Display Settings Wave Mapping IM 760301 01E 6 5 Aejdsiq u0JoAeA Hu 6 3 Setting the Time Axis Explanation For functional details see section 2 7 Set the time axis in terms of Time div time per grid The time axis can be set in 1 2 or 5 steps in the range up to the point in which the time corresponding to one screen is equal to the data update interval For example changing the time per division in the order 0 5 ms 1 ms 2 ms 5 ms 10 ms 20 ms and 50 ms when the data update interval is 500 ms changes the time corresponding to one screen in the order 5 ms 10 ms 20 ms 50 ms 100 ms 200 ms and 500 ms M Format Single Time div Time div setting Sms Number of data points displayed g in the range from the left to the right end of the screen E ous When P P is displayed waveform Settings is displayed using P P compression see section 2 7 Trigger g n ETT Wave Mapping X AQ ee gt gt ER Time at the left end of the screen Time at the right end of the screen fixed to 0 s time span of the screen 6 6 IM 760301 01E 6 4 Setting the Trigger For a functional description see section 2 7 To exit the menu during ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE operation press ESC eO located above the soft 5C A CA rers ELEMENT In the procedural ALL C
358. rms 12 30Arms _ E BG3P3w _ Element3 U3 1000vmean U3 1000 mean 13A 30Arms 13A 30Arms U4 1000vmea Element4 14A 30Arms U4 1000vmean 14A 30Arms If the independent setting of input elements is OFF and a wiring system other than 1P2W is selected when the measurement range or synchronization source setting of each input element is different these settings are changed as follows The measurement range is set to the maximum range on all input elements included in the wiring unit The external sensor input range has precedence over the direct input range for the current range The voltage current mode and auto range settings are changed to match the settings of the input element with the maximum measurement range If multiple input elements with maximum measurement range exist the settings of the input element with the smallest input element number takes precedence The synchronization source setting is changed to match the setting of the input element with the smallest input element number among the input elements included in the wiring unit When you press the ELEMENT key to select the element to be configured the LEDs of input elements in the wiring unit illuminate simultaneously IM 760301 01E 4 3 suonipuo 1ueujaunseo y BH 4 2 Elements Procedure ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE MEASURING WIRING INPUTINFO 7 GD Ccoupen CURRENT RANGE SENS
359. rom integration start to integration stop h m s 1 N N u n i n Time Watt WP nzi hour Ming N is the number of samples over the integration time and c is the number of samples in 1 hour Wh WP is the sum of positive and negative watt hours WP is the sum of positive P consumed watt hours WP is the sum of negative P watt hours returned to the power supply N 1 q is the sum of Sna N 3 I n Time positive and negative z1 c Ampere hour RMEAN ii ampere ngus S Ah I n is the nth measured current value and N is the number of data updates 4 is the sum of pe i N positive I ampere a q 17 hours o i n Time t d N 2 n q is the sum of i n is the nth sampled data of the current signal and N is the number of negative I ampere data samples hours 1 N Volt ampere hour N D S n Time WS VAh n S n is the nth measured apparent power value and N is the number of data updates 1 N Var hour N an Time WQ varh m i Q n is the nth measured reactive power value and N is the number of data updates Single phase Three phase Three phase three wire three voltage Three phase Wiring system two wire 1P3W three wire 3P3W three current 3P3W 3V3A four wire 3P4W Ux V U1 U2 2 U1 U2 U3 3 Ix A I1 12 2 11 12 13 3 Px W P1 P2 P1 P2 P3 TYPE1 43 V3 Sr vA TYPE2 S1 S2 z S1 S2 S2 S3 S1 S2 S3 TYPE3 PX QX TYPE1 Q1 Q2 Q1 Q2 Q3 Qz var T
360. s Q sum of reactive powers AX power factor average oz phase difference average PcX sum of corrected powers Efficiency x Functions User Defined Function Four efficiency functions 11 to n4 are available 20 user defined functions F1 to F20 are available See section 2 5 Measurement Functions of Integration See section 2 6 Delta Computation Option Four delta functions AF1 to AF4 are available See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E IM 760301 01E 2 3 uondiosog jeuonouneJ Hu 2 2 Measurement Function and Measurement Period Types of Measurement Functions for Harmonic Measurement Option On models with the harmonic measurement function option functions such as Uthd Ithd total harmonic distortion of the voltage current can be computed in addition to the measurement functions of normal measurement The WT3000 cannot perform harmonic measurements compatible with IEC 61000 3 2 For details see chapter 7 Harmonic Measurement in the WT3000 Precision Power Analyzer Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E IM 760301 01E 2 2 Measurement Function and Measurement Period Types of Measurement Functions of the Motor Evaluation Function Motor Version By using the motor evaluation function motor version the rotating speed torque and output of a motor can be determined from the DC voltage analog signal or pulse count signal received from a revolution sensor which is
361. s For wen WAVE U lIP s 0 1 6 ner HOLD toca details on the procedures Cursor keys ENTE See section 3 14 WPa lt gt TIME ruin ses CAL ITEM FORM USER ELEMENT INTEG sher Y LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL d Displaying the Relation Table of Elements and Measurement Ranges 1 Press SHIFT WIRING INPUT INFO The relation table of measurement ranges input filters transformation ratios scaling factors and other parameters are displayed for each element Displaying the Relation Table of Rotating Speeds and the Input Ranges of Torque 2 Press PAGE to display the list of motor settings A relation table of the rotating speed and the input range filter scaling factor unit and synchronization source of torque number of poles frequency measurement source and other parameters is displayed 1 Displayed only on models with the motor evaluation function motor version Displaying the Relation Table of Trend Targets and Measurement Functions 2 Press PAGE to display the list of trend settings The relation table of trend targets and measurement functions is displayed Displaying the Relation Table of D A Output Channels and Measurement Functions 2 Press PAGE to display the list of D A output settings The relation table of D A output channels and measurement functions is displayed
362. s from User Defined F1 to F20 to select the user defined function to be assigned The User Defined Function dialog box opens Turning ON OFF the User Defined Function Computation 4 Press the cursor keys to select the desired user defined function 5 Press SET to select ON or OFF Display example when the User Defined F1 F5 soft f key is pressed m T aor Def ined User Defined Function F1 F5 User Defined Function F1 F5 Serena Function 1 J Unit v Expression UCE Function 2 unit Ca Expression I E Function 3 unit v Expression UCET ORT User Defined F6 F10 g User Defined F11 F15 Pc Formula M Sampling Frequency Auto User Defined F16 F20 Function 4 J unit Ca Expression 1CET ORT Phase Function 5 j Unit v Expression UCET ORT _ 1 1 180 Lead Lag Sync Measure 5 12 IM 760301 01E 5 4 Setting the User Defined Function Explanation Setting the Unit 5 6 7 Press the cursor keys to select Unit Press SET A keyboard appears Use the keyboard to set the unit For keyboard operations see section 3 14 Entering Values and Strings Setting the Equation Press the cursor keys to select Expression 8 9 10 Press SET A keyboard appears Use the keyboard to set the equation For keyboard operations see section 3 14 Entering Values a
363. s less than or equal to 0 6 or Imn or Irmn is less than or equal to 4 Backup During Power Failures If a power failure occurs when integration is in progress the integration result is held When the power recovers the integration result calculated up to the point when the power failure occurred is displayed with the integration operation stopped Ifthe integration is reset after the power recovers integration can be started once again IM 760301 01E 5 41 1ueulioJnseo u JOMOd E 5 14 Performing Integration Start Stop and Reset Limitation on Modifying the Settings during Integration When the integration is in progress some of the functions cannot be changed as shown below Integration Operation Condition Integration Reset Integrating Integration Suspended START indicator OFF ON OFF STOP indicator OFF OFF ON Function Wiring system Yes No No Measurement range Yes No No Scaling Yes No No Filter Yes No No Averaging Yes No No Synchronization source Yes No No Hold Yes Yes Yes Single measurement Yes Yes Yes Data update rate Yes No No Display mode Yes Yes Yes Integration mode Yes No No Displayable Displayable Integration timer Yes No No Displayable Displayable Integration start Yes No Yes Integration stop No Yes No Integration reset Yes No Yes Store excludes integration Yes Yes Yes synchronization mode Printer Yes No Yes Zero level crossing Yes No No Null Yes No No
364. s pressed the measurement function of the displayed item at the cursor switches in the following order U P the measurement function before the U I P key was pressed U and so on The numeric data of the selected measurement function is displayed The above operation is carried out when numeric data is displayed and the menu is not displayed or the ITEM key has been pressed Only the measurement function switches The measurement function of U and varies depending on the voltage or current measurement mode For example if the voltage measurement mode is set to RMS Urms and its numeric data are displayed When the S Q A okey WP g TIME key or FU FI key is pressed the measurement function also switches in order similar to the U I P key 1 6 IM 760301 01E 1 2 Setup Menu Display Key and Execution Key USER Key See section 5 1 Each time the USER key is pressed the measurement function of the displayed item at the cursor switches to the preset user defined measurement function and the numeric data of the selected measurement function is displayed The above operation is carried out when numeric data is displayed and the menu is not displayed or the ITEM key has been pressed Up to four measurement functions can be preset user defined After displaying the user defined measurement functions the measurement function that was displayed before the USER key was pressed is shown Only the
365. s the electrical and mechanical specifications 1 Seethe Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E 2 See the Communication Interface User s Manual IM760301 17E IM 760301 01E B uonoedsu pue e ueuejure y Bunoouso qno4 11 2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions Error Messages There are cases in which error messages are displayed on the screen during operation This section describes the meanings of the messages and their corrective actions The messages can be displayed either in English or Japanese see section 3 17 If the corrective action requires servicing contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs In addition to the error messages listed below there are communication error messages These messages are described in the Communication Interface User s Manual IM760301 17E Error in Execution Code Message Corrective Action Reference Section 11 Cannot measure PLL frequency Check input level 601 Invalid file name Check file name 9 3 9 4 602 No media inserted Make sure that the storage medium is 9 1 9 2 inserted if applicable 604 Media failure Check the storage medium 605 File not found Check the file name and the storage medium 606 Media is protected Set the disk s medium s write protect switch to OFF 607 Media was removed while accessing Check the storage medium 608 File already
366. s well as storing the numeric data to the internal memory e e Waveform display Split display including a waveform display Display Position of the Data Update Rate The data update rate is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen when the UPDATE RATE key is pressed Data update rate Computing method Update 500msec EAMP YOKOcawA Element 1 U1 1000vrms 11 30Arms Element2 u2 1000vrms Data Update Rate The data update rate can be selected from the choices below The numeric data is updated at the selected interval You can increase the data update rate to acquire relatively fast load fluctuations in the power system or decrease the rate to acquire sampling data for several periods even for relatively long signals 50 ms 100 ms 250 ms 500 ms 1 s 2 s 5 s 10s and 20s Note n some cases the display update rate of the numeric data and waveform data that are displayed on the screen may take longer than the data update rate The WT3000 automatically switches the method of computing the measured values according to the data update interval For details see appendix 7 IM 760301 01E 4 27 suonipuo 1ueuaunseo y BH 4 11 Hold and Single Measurement Procedure To exit the menu during ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE Ersson operation press ESC OO located above the soft GG A keys In the procedural ALL Cw explanation below the
367. s1 1 6741 Ep using PAGE W or PAGE A the g mms top and bottom sections of the S P1 0 1651 pp mnta page bar shows A V If page E 1 0 1781 wa L13_ 3OArms scrolling is not possible A V x Element4 is shown Qt 0 0669 wa B trm o M 0 92688 Spd 2 LTrq 20v 91 D 22 046 v _integ Reset Time fU1 4 1004 wz Update 7 Data update count The data update count is displayed under Update in the lower left corner of the screen Press HOLD to hold the data update count Press HOLD again to release e When the value exceeds 65535 it returns to 0 The data update count is reset to 0 if the power is turned OFF or a setting such as the measurement range or filter is changed IM 760301 01E 5 5 1ueulioJnseoe u JOMOd I 5 1 Displaying Numeric Data and Changing the Displayed Items Measurement Functions of Normal Measurement e Symbol and Meaning of the Displayed Measurement Functions U voltage Urms Umn Udc Urmn current Irms Imn Idc Irmn P active power S apparent power Q reactive power power factor phase difference fU fl or freqU fregl voltage current frequency U pk U pk voltage maximum minimum l pk I pk current maximum minimum CfU Cfl voltage current crest factor Pc corrected power Wp watt hour sum of positive and negative watt hours Wp positive watt hour consumed Wp negative watt hour returned to the power supply q ampere hour sum of positive
368. sas Operation press ESC eO located above the soft ero A CA revs In the procedural ALL Cw Cv explanation below the Q MEASURING phrase press the cursor RING AUTO OEC e ModE AUTO keys may be used This eene wove auro woos phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values A DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT mee iow details on the procedures s see section 3 14 CX UR Eum 5a M amp ITEM l FORM USER eement intec DID LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL 1 Press INTEG to display the Integ menu 2 Pressthe Integ Set soft key to display the Integ Set menu SHIFT Selecting Normal Integration Mode or Repetitive Integration Mode Continuous 3 Press theMode soft key to display the Mode menu 4 Press either the Normal or Continuous soft key to select the integration mode Normal Normal Start Timer Setting Continuous Stop Reset gt Inte R Normal gt R Cont inuous Auto Cal Auto Cal prr ON brr ON i D A Output D A Output Rated Time Rated Time 5 30 IM 760301 01E 5 11 Setting the Normal Integration Mode and the Integration Timer Setting the Integration Timer 5 Pressthe Timer Setting soft key to display the Timer Setting dialog box 6 Pressthe cursor keys to select the hour minute or second box
369. se press the CURSO O NULL cursor eys may be used This phrase refers to the i jacer for selecting items and entering values and INGE SAVE 1 strings For details on the procedures see section MEND TAN 05 MENU 1 Press SHIFT ron BET to display the Store Set menu 2 Press the Mode Saft key CC 3 Press the Store to soft key Select If you selected Memory sroceedd adn n Data That Has Already Been Stored on the next page Q If you selected File proceed to when Si g per a Store and Save Operation Sequence on page 8 16 C iy Y t Setting Setting gt Convert Convert Memory Memory Qo Initialize Initialize Memory Exec Memory Exec um EXE Store Set Mode tore Recall ie LL E IM 760301 01E 8 13 eea paJ01S eui Burnes pue ejeg Burjjeoeg pue Buros Ile 8 5 Saving the Stored Data When Saving Data That Has Already Been Stored 4 Press the Convert Memory soft key to display the Convert Memory dialog box Selecting the Data Type for Saving the Data 5 Pressthe Data Type soft key to select ASCII or Float Selecting the Storage Medium 6 Pressthe File List soft key to display the File List dialog box 7 Press the cursor keys to select the storage medium indicated by 5 d 8 Press SET to confirm the storage medium 25 Q Selecting the Save Destination Directory n Perform this operation when directories are present on
370. se Two Wire System 1P2W Using a Shunt Type Current Sensor SOURCE LOAD ee Earth side I OUTL Input terminal External current sensor input connector EXT Wiring Example of a Single Phase Three Wire System 1P3W Using a Shunt Type Current Sensor SOURCE LOAD Input terminal 2 External current sensor External current sensor input connector input connector EXT EXT Wiring Example of a Three Phase Three Wire System 3P3W Using a Shunt Type Current Sensor SOURCE n LOAD Input terminal 1 Input terminal 2 External current sensor External current sensor input connector input connector EXT EXT IM 760301 01E 3 10 Wiring the Circuit under Measurement When Using the Current Sensor Wiring Example of a Three Phase Three Wire System Three Voltage Three Current System 3P3W 3V3A Using a Shunt Type Current Sensor SOURCE LOAD T Input Im U Input H terminal 1 H terminal 2 e terminal 3 External current sensor External current sensor External current sensor input connector input connector input connector EXT EXT EXT Wiring Example of a Three Phase Four Wire System 3P4W Using a Shunt Type Current Sensor SOURCE LOAD N Input YD Input Input terminal 1 4 terminal 2 term
371. se the filter also acts as a filter for detecting the zero crossing point see section 2 2 more accurately The frequency filter is not inserted into the voltage and current measurement input circuit Therefore the measured values include high frequency components even when the frequency filter is turned ON The WT3000 detects the zero crossing point with a hysteresis of approximately 5 of the measurement range If the line filter described above is ON the line filter affects the frequency measurement even when the frequency filter is OFF tis recommended that the frequency filter be turned ON when the input signal frequency is less than or equal to 440 Hz Note For details on selecting the line filter for the motor evaluation function see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E 4 22 IM 760301 01E 4 9 Selecting the Averaging Function Procedure ITEM amp ELEMENT OneoTE a DISPLAY A numeri WAVE l U LIP s a cud HOLD toca WPa Ca gt TIME FU FI n SINGLE CAL ITEM FORM USER Femen INTEG sFr LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL scaune INE FILTER AG To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above MOTOR FREQ the soft keys SET FILTER HRMSET MEASURE SYNCSOURCE CURSOR NULL In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys
372. set to true rms value RMS rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value MEAN simple average DC or rectified mean value RMEAN for the voltage and current separately NUMERIC Key See section 3 15 and 5 1 For details on the harmonic measurement option see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Displays the screen that shows the numeric data Pressing the ITEM key explained later while showing the numeric data opens a menu for changing the displayed items Pressing the FORM key explained later while showing the numeric data opens a menu for changing the number of displayed items For harmonic measurement option a list showing the measured values for each harmonic order can also be selected WAVE Key See section 3 15 and 6 1 to 6 8 Displays the screen that shows the waveform Pressing the ITEM key explained later while showing the waveform opens a menu for selecting the displayed waveform or a menu for zooming the waveform Pressing the FORM key explained later while showing the waveform opens a menu for setting the time axis of the displayed waveform the trigger for displaying the waveform on screen the number of divided waveform display windows the assignment of waveforms to the divided windows etc OTHERS Key See section 3 15 7 1 to 7 6 and 7 8 For details on bar graphs or vector displays option see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Displays a menu for selecting t
373. settings of the input element with the maximum measurement range If multiple input elements with maximum measurement range exist the settings of the input element with the smallest input element number takes precedence The synchronization source setting is changed to match the setting of the input element with the smallest input element number among the input elements included in the wiring unit IM 760301 01E 4 5 4 3 Input Procedure Setting the Measurement Range for Direct ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE To exit the menu during operation press ESC SENSOR RATIO CURRENT RANGE located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the D MEASURING WIRING INPUT INFO RMS J MEAN FX DC RMEAN MODE AUTO MEASURING MODE phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the DISPLAY procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 ITEM amp ELEMENT E Furm OREMOTE SINGLE ITEM LOWER ITEM FORM LOWER FORM USER USER SET ELEMENT O AL CAL e s Selecting the Target Element 1 Press ELEMENT to select the target element The corresponding element indicator above of the ELEMENT key illuminates To select all elements press
374. slot Normally the eject button is retracted To eject the PC card press the eject button once to pop the button out and press it again Press the eject button once to pop Front side the button out and press it again CAUTION The WT3000 may malfunction if the PC card is inserted and ejected within 1 second time period Do not remove the PC card or turn OFF the power while it is being accessed If you do the data on the PC card may be destroyed An access icon is displayed at the upper left corner of the screen while the PC card is being accessed General Handling Precautions of PC Cards For the general handling precautions of the PC card read the instruction manual that came with the PC card IM 760301 01E 9 1 9 2 Procedure scauna mere Dave MOTOR FREQ SET FILTER MEASURE CURSOR NULL FILE uacesave storE MENU STORE SET print msc me MENU ilis 2 3 M File Item Setup a Formatting the PC Card CAUTION Do not remove the PC card or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or icon of the PC card is blinking Such acts can damage the PC card or destroy the data on it fthe WT3000 fails to detect a formatted PC card reformat the PC card on the WT3000 Note that all the data on
375. soft key to display the n Formula dialog box 3 Pressthe cursor keys to set the numerator or denominator of the efficiency equation from n1 to n4 4 Press SET A box used to select the parameters for computing the efficiency appears 5 Press the cursor keys to select the parameter for computing the efficiency To set the sum of multiple parameters to the numerator or denominator in the equation select Udef1 or Udef2 6 Press SET to confirm Setting the Parameters for Computing the Efficiency 1 Press the cursor keys to set the operand of the equation to Udef1 or Udef2 2 Press SET A box used to select the computation parameter appears 3 Press the cursor keys to select the computation parameter 4 Press SET to confirm Wiring 3 Formula Wiring Setting Element C 4120 2 1I 330 4 C 1P24 1 1P2Ww 1 1P2W 1 1P2U 1 Compensation Element Independent PFF ON 4 Measure 5 20 IM 760301 01E 5 7 Setting the Equation for Efficiency Explanation An efficiency equation can be created by combining the measurement function symbols Using the numeric values of the measurement functions the energy conversion efficiency of the device can be determined Setting the Equation Four efficiency equations n1 to 14 can be defined by assigning the power of an element the power of a X function or the motor output as an operand To s
376. soft keys corresponding to the displayed element to select the target element Setting the External Current Sensor Transformation Ratio 3 Press the cursor keys to set the transformation ratio Element 1 Giv A 10 0000 Element 2 Caza 10 0000 Element 3 Giv A 10 000 Element 4 wA 10 000 IM 760301 01E 4 4 Setting the Measurement Range When Using the External Current Sensor Explanation The output of current sensors that output voltage such as shunts and clamps can be input to the current sensor input connector of an element and measured Display Position of the Target Element and Specified Range It is the same as section 4 3 Setting the Measurement Range during Direct Input Selecting the External Current Sensor Input Connector To measure the current using the input signal from the external current sensor input connector EXT SENSOR must be selected EXT SENSOR key illuminated by pressing EXT SENSOR and then the external current sensor range must be specified Selecting the External Current Sensor Range Two types of range settings are available fixed and auto Fixed Range When the crest factor is set to 3 Select 50 mV 100 mV 250 mV 500 mV 1 V 2 V 5V or 10 V When the crest factor is set to 6 Select 25 mV 50 mV 125 mV 250 mV 500 mV 1 V 2 5 V or 5 V Auto Range When AUTO is pressed the AUTO key illuminates and auto range is enabled
377. splay Auxiliary display ON OFF Turn ON OFF the upper and lower limits scale value and the waveform label Cursor measurement Measure the value at the point where the cursor is placed on the waveform 12 10 IM 760301 01E 12 5 Functions Vector Display and Bar Graph Display Item Specifications Vector display Displays vectors of the phase difference of the fundamental waveforms Applicable on models with the harmonic measurement option Bar graph display Displays the bar graph of the amplitude of each harmonic Applicable on models with the harmonic measurement option Trend Display Displays the trend of the numeric data of the measurement function on a graph The maximum number of displayed items is 16 Simultaneous Display Displays a combination of two displays from numeric waveform bar graph and trend in the top and bottom halves of the divided screen Data Store and Recall This function cannot be used on the current WT3000 that you are using The information given here may change in the future Stores the numeric data and waveform display data in the internal memory Saves the stored data to a storage medium Recalls the stored data from the internal memory 1 PC card and network drive The Ethernet interface is an option 2 Cannot recall the data from a saved file Saving and Loading of Data Saves setup parameters and screen image data to a sto
378. ss the Function soft key to display the Function menu Press the Delete soft key to display the Delete menu TTR Delete E Copy Rename MakeDir Format Attribute Delete Exec Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory 5 Same as the procedures given in Selecting the Storage Medium and Selecting the Save Destination Directory in section 9 3 IM 760301 01E 9 6 Specifying the File to Be Displayed Displaying File Properties and Selecting File Attributes Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box 6 Pressthe Filter soft key to select Item or All e If you select Item the list of files corresponding to the file type Setup Wave or Numeric that is specified for File Item in the File menu in the directory selected in step 5 is displayed If you select All the list of all the files in the directory selected in step 5 is displayed using Viewing the Properties 7 On the File List dialog box press the cursor keys to select the file 8 Press the Property soft key to display the file property window 9 Press ESC to close the file property window L elete Function ES Delete Set Reset All Set Property P Filter Item all Attribute Delete Exec HEE 7 Selecting the File Attribute Property File Name File Size Date Time Attribute 0001 S
379. surement for Direct Input ssssssesess 3 13 Wiring the Circuit under Measurement When Using the Current Sensor 3 16 Wiring the Circuit under Measurement When Using the VT CT eeeesss 3 20 Setting the Date Tirmie creer iren I eSI FERE Re E ERR EE UR RES 3 23 Initializing the Settings ssssssssseeseeeeeneneneenne nnne 3 25 Entering Values and Character Strings 3 27 Switching the Display sesesssseeeeeenenneenneenneee nennen nnne tnter nnne nnns 3 31 Displaying the Setup Parameter List 3 33 Selecting the Message Language ssssseeeeeeneenenen nennen nenne 3 35 Chapter 4 Measurement Conditions 4 1 Selecting the Wiring System ssssssssssssseseeeeeeenenen nennen nennen 4 1 4 2 Selecting Independent Setting of Input Elements sseeeeene 4 4 4 3 Setting the Measurement Range for Direct Input sseseeeeenne 4 6 4 4 Setting the Measurement Range When Using the External Current Sensor 4 11 4 5 Setting the Scaling Function When Using VT CT sesseeenemm 4 14 4 6 Selecting the Crest Factor sssssssssseseeeeeneneeneennee nennen nennen nnne 4 17 A 4 7 Setting the Measurement Period sss 4 18 4 8 Selecting the Input Filter esee 4 21 4 9 X Selecting the Averaging Function
380. t The current sensor input transformation function can be used to transform the input signal to data that correspond to direct measurements For the setup procedure see section 4 4 Setting the Measurement Range When Using the Current Sensor Note that the frequency and phase characteristics of the current sensor affect the measured data Make sure you have the polarities correct when making the connections Otherwise the polarity of the measurement current will be reversed and correct measurements cannot be made Be especially careful when connecting the clamp type current sensor because it is easy to reverse the connection To minimize error when using a shunt type current sensor note the following points when connecting the external sensor cable Connect the shielded wire of the external sensor cable to the L side of the shunt output terminal OUT Minimize the area created between the wires connecting the current sensor to the external sensor cable The effects due to the line of magnetic force caused by the measurement current and noise that enter this area of space can be reduced Shunt type current sensor Area of space created by the connection wires External sensor cable cL WT3000 Shielded wire For a shunt type current sensor connect it to the power earth ground side as shown in the figure below If you have to connect the sensor to the non earth side use a wire that is thicker than AWG18
381. t keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 5 22 IM 760301 01E 5 8 Setting the Wiring Efficiency and Two Wattmeter Method Compensations Turning ON OFF the Efficiency Compensation 3 Press the cursor keys to select Efficiency Compensation 4 Press SET to select ON or OFF Turning ON OFF the Compensation for Two Wattmeter Method This appears only when the wiring system is set to 3P3W 3V3A 3 Pressthe cursor keys to select SP3W 3V3A ZA Compensation 4 Press SET to select ON or OFF Wiring Wiring Setting Element C 4120 2130 3 10 4 E 3P3W 3V3A Z A 3 0 fP2U 1 9 Formula Wiring Compensation OFF Cor Cor Cor i Compensation Efficiency 1 i Compensation 3P3W 3V3A ZA Compensation Independent PFF ON Lorr pw 4 Measure Explanation Wiring Compensation Compensates for the loss caused by the wiring of each element For details see appendix 8 Set the compensation according to the setting specified for Effects due to the Amplitude of the Measured Voltage and Current in section 3 7 If wiring for When the Measurement Current Is Relatively Small is used U I f wiring for When the Measurement Current Is R
382. t element 2 U2 or I2 U3 or I3 Input element 3 Power Transformer with Single Phase AC Input and Three Phase AC Output If the device that converts single phase AC power to three phase AC power is connected and measured as shown in the figure below set the synchronization source of input elements on the input end to the same signal and do the same for the input elements on the output end In this example set the synchronization source of input element 1 to U1 or I1 and set the synchronization source of input elements 2 and 3 to U2 or I1 U3 or I3 In this case AC signals of different frequencies are measured If the synchronization source of all input elements is set to the same signal the measurement period of either the input signal or the output signal will not be an integer multiple of the signal which is undesirable Single phase AC power Connect to input element 1 Three phase AC power Connect to input elements 2 and 3 using three phase three wire system AC power U2 and I2 AC power U1 and l1 AC power U3 and I3 Power transformer Synchronization source setup example Input element 1 U1 or I1 Input element 2 U2 or I2 U3 or I3 Input element 3 To measure the input output efficiency with high accuracy without being affected by the synchronization source setting such as in this case or in the power measurement or efficiency measurement of aforementioned devices set the data
383. t resistance of the voltage terminal SOURCE x Compensation Details The measured value is determined by substituting the compensated instantaneous values u n and i n below into the respective equation in appendix 1 For U I Wiring Compensated instantaneous voltage u n u n Rixi n The instantaneous current is i n For I U Wiring Compensated instantaneous current i n i n u n Ru The instantaneous voltage is u n In the equations above u n Measured instantaneous voltage sampled data of the voltage signal i n Measured instantaneous current sampled data of the current signal Ru Compensation value for the input resistance 10 MQ of the voltage input terminal Ri Compensation value for the input resistance 5 5 mQ of the direct current input terminal App 32 IM 760301 01E Appendix 8 Efficiency Compensation Function Efficiency Compensation In the efficiency equation 1 A B the compensation value Err in the table below is subtracted from denominator B according to the element or wiring unit included in numerator A Element or Wiring Unit Compensation Err Element Err U xU RUxsf l xl xRIxsf XA B Err XErrit total of Err of all elements included in X Ust Measured voltage rms mean r mean or dc depending on the voltage measurement mode is the element number l Measured current rms mean r mean or dc depending on the current me
384. ta are stored Numeric Wave Numeric data and waveform display data are stored Selecting the Numeric Data to Be Stored Select the numeric data items that are to be stored m ent ang Measurement Function Types for Notor ee Function orrec A ent option st in re applicable for the selection d that ace stored can be selected from U including i Ha d NN Rhdf S Q A U ol Z Rs Xs Rp Xp and hes f Others is selected t je fent functions Uthd Ithd Pthd Uthf Ithf Utif Itif hvf hcf fU and fof the d Bo phase difference 6 X functions user ve defined functions ahd so on 2 L Selecting the Waveform Displa NN SU Select the waveform display dataNtems t hy tored Only the input signals of the installeceleme e acabis forthe selection For models with the motor evaluation function n ve the input signals of Speed and Torque are also selectable item Note Determination of Delta Computation For details on the wiring units expressed as XA and XB see section 4 1 System j no data is stored in places where there is no numeric data If there are no integrated values because integration is not performed no data is stored no data is also stored in places where there is no integration time The maximum order for which the harmonic data is saved is the maximum harmonic order to be analyzed that is specified in the harmoni
385. tails on the symbols in the equation see the Note on page App 3 True rms value Urms Urms Umn Udc Urmn Volt Rectified mean value calibrated oltage i5 the rms value UMN T U V Simple average Udc Javan z2yz ASIn l AVG u n AVGI u n Rectified mean value Urmn True rms value Irms Irms Imn Idc Irmn Rectified mean value calibrated Current to the rms value Imn T Simple average Ide Ni AVGTi n 2V2 AVG i n AVG i n AVGI i n Rectified mean value Irmn Active power P W AVG u n i n Apparent power S VA TYPE1 TYPE2 aii TYPES 4P Q Reactive power TYPE1 Q var TYPE2 s 4 S P S is 1 or 1 for lead phase or lag phase respectively TYPE3 p aw k min Q k Ur k lj k Uj k Ir k Ur k and Ir k are the real part components of U k and I k Uj k and lj k are the imaginary part components of U k and I k Valid only when harmonics are being measured correctly Power factor Phase difference P S cos S The phase angle can be switched between lead D lag G display and 360 display See section 5 10 Voltage frequency fU FreqU Hz Current frequency fl Freql Hz The voltage frequency fU and current frequency fl are measured using zero crossing detection Two frequencies from the fU and fl of all installed elements including the PLL source frequency can be measured simultaneously On the model with
386. ted waveform The range of movement of cursors is from the left end to the right end of the Screen The movement step of cursors is the time corresponding to one screen 500 Note ifimmeasurable data exists is displayed in the measured value display area AY is measured even if the unit is different The result has no unit in this case Ifthe crest factor is set to 3 the allowed range of cursor measurement vertically is 300 of the range If the crest factor is set to 6 it is 600 of the range IM 760301 01E 6 25 Aejdsiq woane M Hu Chapter 7 Trend Display 7 1 Trend Display For a functional description see section 2 8 Procedure a DISPLAY ITEM FORM ITEM amp ELEMENT USER INTEG Grant Gror ELEMENT LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL Displaying Trends 1 Press OTHERS to display the Others menu 2 Press any of the soft keys from Trend Numeric Trend Wave Trend and Bar Trend to select the display format Others Vector Numer ic Wave Numer ic Bar Numeric Trend Next d Press the Next 1 2 soft key gt OREMOTE Q o gt r SHIFT Displayed only on models with the harmonic measurement option To exit the menu during ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE operation press ESC eO located above the
387. tely Change the synchronization source to a signal that allows more stable detection of the period change from voltage to current or from current to voltage The frequency detection circuit is AC coupled The period of AC signals with no zero crossing due to an offset can be detected if the AC amplitude is greater than or equal to the detection level of the frequency measurement circuit see section 12 5 With this feature the measurement period is set to an integer multiple of the period of the AC signal q Data update interval Data update interval Signal FN NF NJ Measurement period gt AAAA AC coupling r When Measuring a DC Signal If ripple exists on the DC signal and its level is greater than or equal to the detection level of the frequency measurement circuit see section 12 5 and the period can be detected accurately and stably a more accurate DC measurement becomes possible If a large AC signal is superposed on the DC signal a more stable measurement can be achieved by detecting its period and taking the average In addition if a small fluctuating pulse noise riding on the DC signal crosses level zero that point is detected as a zero crossing As a result sampled data is averaged over an unintended period and the measured values such as voltage and current may be unstable If the synchronization source is set to None these types of erroneous detection can be prevented All of the samp
388. tem a Text Color ae errr CUMS AG AEE E se scecubecd cancabdeaadbeduedeussidaldeshcredarovetesds nue MEETUPS timer accuracy Timer Setting esee top panel scree eet cime rrr enne rete eee total harmonic distortion trademarks reete eue hens cmd ere In IE aiaa i Huc ts 7 1 Trend C1 7 16 Trend C2 x wee 7 16 Trend Cursor wee 7 16 Trend Cursor Setting s 7215 Trend Disp tems erre kie eene nte 7 5 Trend Display sese 7 8 trend display 2 2 itn erede nr eet tei o Moa 7 1 Trend Scale s 7 10 TrendC1 Trace we 7 16 TrendC2 Trace Triad 6 17 7 13 Trigger iecit rt cte enit eter e Pro ee ke dora 6 7 trigger level creen 2 24 6 10 trigger mode cement tne 2 24 6 9 trigger point trigger slope een trigger source true rms value two wattmeter method sssssssseeeeeeenern 5 23 storage operation stopping of eesessssss 8 12 STORE 35 5 eiie eter n edi UD ERREUR 8 11 STOO cocta ets ch de i CE de eode e ds 2 29 8 1 Index 4 IM 760301 01E Index SDK ade 5 6 UPDATE RATE irte etes 4 26 Upper Scale User Defined Function ccccccccccsssceeceeesesssseeeeeeeeseeees 5 12 USER KGy 3e EROTOISORUPEURPEBOWIIERRHDOITOS 5 3 Utility iiic ci eterne cen 9 2 9 17 9 20 9 23 9 27
389. the fuse holder 4 Remove the blown fuse that is attached to the tip of the fuse holder 5 X Attach a new fuse to the fuse holder and push the fuse holder back in the original place Fuse holder 11 8 IM 760301 01E 11 6 Recommended Replacement Parts The three year warranty applies only to the main unit of the instrument starting from the day of delivery and does not cover any other items or expendable items items which wear out The replacement period for expendable items varies depending on the conditions of use Refer to the table below as a general guideline Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer to have parts replaced Parts Name Recommended Replacement Period Built in printer Under normal usage 200 rolls of printer paper part No B9316FX LCD backlight 3 years Cooling fan 3 years Backup battery 3 years Lithium battery IM 760301 01E B uonoedsu pue e ueuejure y bunoousoe qno4 Chapter 12 Specifications 12 1 Input Section Item Specifications Input terminal type Voltage Plug in terminal safety terminal Current Direct input Large binding post Current sensor input Isolated BNC connector Input format Voltage Floating input resistive voltage divider Current Floating input shunt input Measurement range Voltage rated value When the crest factor is set to 3 15 V 30 V 60 V 100 V 150 V 300 V 600 V and 1000 V When the crest factor is set to
390. the NULL function at no input condition opened current input terminal and shorted voltage input terminal NULL Value The NULL values are set to the Udc and ldc values numeric data of the simple average of voltage current as well as speed and torque on models with the motor evaluation function when the input signal from the sensor is analog that were measured the previous time when the voltage current mode is set to DC and the NULL function is turned ON If the previously measured Udc and Idc as well as Speed and Torque values do not exist such as when the NULL function is turned ON without making a measurement after turning ON the power Udc and Idc are set to zero To subtract the DC offset using the NULL function when making measurements with the voltage current mode set to RMS MEAN or RMEAN activate the NULL function with the voltage current mode set to DC and then change the voltage current mode to RMS MEAN or RMEAN Note The NULL function is automatically released when the range or filter setting is changed or integration is started If you perform the procedure of releasing the NULL function while in the hold condition the NULL function is actually released and the NULL indicator turns OFF when the hold is released or when a single measurement is made Ifthe crest factor is set to 3 a NULL value of approximately 50 is set for a signal that exceeds 50 of the range If the crest factor is set to 6 a NULL value of approxi
391. the PC Card For procedures see chapter 12 The WT3000 comes standard with a PC card drive The numeric data waveform display data screen image data and setup parameters can be saved to the PC card The saved setup parameters can be loaded as necessary The screen image data can be pasted to documents on a word processing application This function cannot be used on the current version of the WT3000 The information given here may change in the future PC card PC Microsoft Excel ERR PD ER a csv I i Binary Float format format I I I I I I I I I I I I i i CSV format E lt I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 Data acquisition via the Ethernet GP IB RS 232 interface 2 Retrieval via the storage medium IM 760301 01E 2 29 uondiosog jeuonouneJ Hu 2 9 Saving and Loading Data and Other Functions Printing on the Built in Printer The screen image can be printed on the built in printer optional For details see chapter 2 in the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Built in printer option Ethernet Communication Option Planned to Be Released The numeric data waveform display data screen image data and setup parameters can be saved to a device connected via the Ethernet interface or information about the WT3000 can be tr
392. the file Executing the Load Operation 8 Pressthe Load Exec soft key The selected file is read from the directory indicated in Pathz At the same time the Load Exec soft key changes to the Abort soft key Aborting the Load Operation 9 Press the Abort soft key The load operation is aborted At the same time the Abort soft key changes to the Load Exec soft key Load Menu Load Menu gt I Property Property Filter Filter Item All te All Load Exec IM 760301 01E 9 15 9 5 Loading Setup Parameters e Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box Same as the procedure given in Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box in section 9 6 Viewing the Properties Same as the procedure given in Viewing the Properties in section 9 6 Explanation The setup parameters saved using the WT3000 can be loaded Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory Same as the explanation given in Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory in section 9 3 Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box Same as the explanation given in Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box in section 9 6 Properties Same as the explanation given in Properties in section 9 6 Note An error occurs if a key other than the Abort key is pressed while saving or loading a file The number of dir
393. the numeric data or waveform display data that are obtained when the current is directly applied to the input terminals Measurement Function Transformation Data before Transformation Ratio Transformation Result Current I E Is current sensor output Is E Active power P E Ps Ps E Apparent power S E Ss Ss E Reactive power Q E Qs Qs E Max Min current value Ipk E Ipks current sensor output lpks E When Applying Voltage or Current Signals via an External VT or CT Measurements can be made by connecting the output of the secondary side of the VT and the output of the secondary side of the CT to the same voltage and current input terminals that are used when directly applying a signal Set the VT ratio CT ratio and power coefficient coefficient multiplied to the power determined from the voltage and current Then the input signal can be made to correspond to the numeric data or waveform display data that are obtained when the current is directly applied to the input terminals Measurement Function Data before Transformation Transformation Result Voltage U Ue secondary output voltage of the VT UsxV V VT ratio Current I l2 secondary output of the CT lox C CT ratio Active power P P2 PoxVxCxSF SF Power coefficient Apparent power S S2 S2xVxCxSF Reactive power Q Q2 QoxVxCxSF Max Min voltage value Vpk Vpk secondary output of the VT VpkexV Max Min current value Ipk Ipke secondary output of the CT IpkexC
394. the procedures see section 3 14 updated by carrying out single measurements by pressing SINGLE N Stopping the Integration Press the STOP soft key The START indicator turns OFF and the STOP indicator illuminates The integration time and integration value are held Integration continues if you press START at this point Resetting the Integration 8 Press the RESET soft key The STOP indicator turns OFF the integration time and integration value are reset and the display of integration measurement functions such as WP shows no data 5 36 IM 760301 01E 5 14 Performing Integration Start Stop and Reset Inte Start Stop Reset E EEL E Integ Set Performing Integration in the Normal Integration Mode 1 Check that the integration mode is set to normal integration or repetitive integration Continuous See section 5 11 2 Check that the integration timer is set to some value other than 00000 00 00 See section 5 11 Starting the Integration 3 Press INTEG to display the Integ menu 4 Press the START soft key The START indicator to the right of the INTEG key illuminates and the integration is started Holding the Integration 5 Press HOLD The HOLD key illuminates and the numeric data display is held Integration continues Releasing the Hold Operation 6 Press HOLD while the values are held The HOLD key turns OFF and the numeric data displa
395. the time axis When the display of scale values is turned ON see section 6 8 the times at the left end fixed to 0 s and the right end of the screen are displayed in the lower left corner and lower right corner of the screen respectively 4 Format Sinale f BI Trend taiv 3s div WE Exec 7 8 IM 760301 01E 7 4 Setting the Time Axis Explanation Set the time axis in terms of T div time per grid Set the time per division in the range of 3 s to 1 day The data update interval of the trend is determined by the data update rate and the time axis T div For example if the data update rate and T div are set to 50 ms and 3 s respectively the trend display is updated every second If the data update rate and T div are set to 10 s and 3 s div respectively the trend display is updated every 10 s and the trend data is shown as a line graph at 10 s intervals If T div is set to 1 day the data update interval of the trend is 1728 s regardless of the data update rate setting Note 2 Ifthe time axis is changed the retrieval of trend waveform data restarts The trend display up to that point is cleared and the trend starts from the right end One division on the trend display corresponds to 50 rasters For example if T div is set to 1 day 1 raster is equal to 1728 s 1 day 50 In this case the data update interval of the trend is 1728 s and the data is displayed P P compressed For a description
396. the various sensors and adapters for the WT3000 according to the object being wired as follows Wiring to the Voltage Measurement Terminal Voltage measurement target 758921 f 758917 4 H NYI 758922 Lh Voltage input terminal BE of the WT3000 758929 758923 gt 758931 Loge When using the clamp on probe that is sold separately use it as follows Wiring to the Current Measurement Terminal Current measurement target 96001 voltage output type EXT input terminal 758924 of the power meter 758921 Current input terminal of the power meter Connecting the clamp on probe The current input terminal and EXT input terminal cannot be wired used simultaneously 3 10 IM 760301 01E 3 7 Wiring for Making Accurate Measurements To make accurate measurements wire the voltage input terminal and current input terminal by referring to the items below Effects of Stray Capacitance When measuring a single phase device the effects of stray capacitance on the measurement accuracy can be minimized by connecting the current input terminal of the instrument to the side that is close t
397. then metier te n eire eine FesponsBe tlime cnr nt retenti eerie RGB video signal rising zero crossing App 25 RMEAN 5 4 tete nde rette iae dr deed 5 9 rmn App 1 RMS ioci pterea edebant po Ded pe at o ae 5 9 roll Dap6r orent ner tes iv ROM version 211 7 ROMAN eet 10 5 S Page PPAR TE 5 6 safety terminal adapter sss 3 9 sample rate n Sampling Frequency ee 10 3 SAVO cu e eee rece doit de e E e Ede ER anette 9 5 save Save Exec scale Scale Value Scal valuge neue p des SCALING 1i ceti et bete PEN EO P EE EAE EUER Scaling scaling scaling factor rtt rte tet Screen brightness screen brightness of sessssssssseeeeene Screen divisions number of ssssuuss screen image data saving of SCrOll ec selt test iones need neis Selftest SENSOR RATIO serial Set Reset sss settings that cannot be initialized setup parameter list eeeeeeeeeneene 3 33 setup parameters loading of 9 14 setup parameters SAVING of 9 5 setup parameters that are saved sues 9 8 rene Imi d e E E LUE i 4 15 SHIFT KOY taire ttc ee eed ae vii Shift LOCK avg aii in Als men 10 11 simple average eee seeseeseeceseerseeseeeesese
398. time corresponding to one screen the following process is performed P P compression is performed over a certain period along the time axis the waveform display data is determined and the data is displayed P P compression refers to the determination of the maximum and minimum values for each certain period One raster will display these two points oop Sampled data Sooo Sampled data E Fij Mo 73 NS P E ae 3 A Vertical axis On the screen _ Time axis lt gt 0 501 rasters 500 Aliasing When the sampling rate is comparatively low with respect to the input signal frequency the harmonics contained in the signal are lost In this case some of the harmonics will appear at low frequencies due to the effects described by the Nyquist sampling theorem This phenomenon is called aliasing Aliasing signal Input signal Sampling point Retrieval of waveform display data The WT3000 retrieves waveform display data to the memory at a sampling rate of approximately 200 kS s The frequency that allows displaying of waveforms that are close to the input signal is up to approximately 10 kHz 2 23 uondiosog jeuonouneJ H 2 7 Waveform Display Trigger For procedures see section 6 4 A trigger is a cue used to display the waveform on the screen The trigger is activated when the s
399. tion source for input element 1 is set to 11 an integer multiple of the period of 11 becomes the measurement period By averaging the sampled data in this measurement period the WT3000 computes the measured values for input element 1 such as U1 11 and P1 Deciding on Which Input Voltage or Current to Use for the Synchronization Source Select an input signal with stable input level and frequency with little distortion for the synchronization source Correct measured values can be obtained only if the period of the synchronization source signal is detected accurately To see whether the frequency of the synchronization source signal is being measured correctly display the frequency of the selected input signal on the WT3000 according to section 5 3 Selecting the Frequency Measurement Source The input signal whose measurement result is accurate and more stable is suitable for the synchronization Source For example if a switching power supply is being measured and the distortion of voltage waveforms is smaller than current waveforms set the synchronization source to the voltage signal Voltage waveform Synchronization source setting Voltage signal Current waveform App 24 IM 760301 01E Appendix 6 Setting the Measurement Period Voltage waveform Current waveform N As another example if an inverter is being measured and the distortion of current waveforms is smaller than voltage waveforms set the synchroni
400. tion value reaches the maximum or minimum integration display value The integration time and value are held at that point Setting the Reservation Time The reservation time is set in units of year month date hour minute second Setthe year month and day Setthe hour minute second in the following range 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 Make sure the reservation time for stopping the integration is after the reservation time for starting the integration Note The reservation time allows up to 31 days to be specified for February In this case an error message is displayed at the time of execution of the integration operation section 5 13 Reset the reservation time Leap years are recognized at the time of execution of the integration operation 5 34 IM 760301 01E 5 13 Turning ON OFF Integration Auto Calibration Procedure To exit the menu during ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE operation press ESC eO located above the soft GC A e keys ELEMENT In the procedural 2 CY explanation below the MEASURING MEASURING phrase press the cursor WIRING Auro GOE mone AUTO keys may be used This NPUTINFO phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Owwr and character strings For wen WAVE U LIP s 0 0 ner HOLD details on the procedures 4 keys see section 3 14 WP q GZ amp
401. tion when integration is in progress Reset Integ Stop Displays Stop and the elapsed time of integration when integration i 0 1650 l id is aborted canceled or done 2 0 926 1 9 Gigi desde y when ready in real time integration mode TO TOO IL OD OILS CO TRO T 918 ULL Update 71 Note In addition to Reset Start Stop and Ready as displays for indicating the integration status the displays shown in the following table are available TimeUp When integration continues up to the time specified by the integration timer it automatically stops The integration status in this condition is considered TimeUp status Error The WT3000 stores and holds the integration result even when a power failure occurs while integration is in progress When the power recovers the integration result calculated up to the point when the power failure occurred is displayed with the integration operation stopped The integration status in this condition is considered Error status Displayed when the integration time is set to a value other than 0 Displayed when ready E amp change items PAGE Elementi a U1 100vrms Element1 Urms1 q 11 s00mmear U1 100vrms V 11 500mAmean H Element2 2 u2 100vrms Element _ B 12 500mAmean U2 100vrms Imn1 12 500mAmean 4 T 5 8 0 6 4 rus Tobvras Element3 5 mA p 13 s00mnea u3 100vrms
402. to make the measurement 3 8 IM 760301 01E 3 6 Assembling the Adapter to Be Connected to the Input Terminal Assembling the 758931 Safety Terminal Adapter When connecting a measurement cable to the voltage terminal of the WT3000 use the 758931 Safety Terminal Adapter that comes with the package or the 758923 Safety Terminal Adapter that is sold separately When using the 758931 Safety Terminal Adapter assemble it according to the following procedure Assembling the Safety Terminal Adapter 1 Remove approximately 10 mm of the covering from the end of the cable and pass it through the internal insulator Internal insulator Attachable cable Cable Covering Max diameter 3 9 mm Core wire Max diameter 1 8 mm 2 Insert the tip of the cable into the plug Fasten the cable in place using the hexagonal wrench Hexagonal wrench Plug Insert the hexagonal wrench into the plug and tighten 3 Insert the plug into the internal insulator P 4 Attach the external cover Check that the cover does not come off Cover Note Once the cover is attached disassembly is difficult Use care when attaching the cover Below is an illustration of the adapter when the work is completed IM 760301 01E 3 9 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 el 3 6 Assembling the Adapter to Be Connected to the Input Terminal Explanation Use
403. true rms value When the input signal is a distorted or is a DC waveform these values will differ from the true rms values f t and T represent the input signal as a function of time and the period of the input signal respectively T t 1 24 2 T Umn or Imn t at 0 e Udc Idc Simple Average These are the average values over one period of the voltage and current signal This function is useful when determining the average value of a DC input signal or a DC component that is superimposed on an AC input signal T 1 Udc or Idc t f t dt T Jo Urmn Irmn Rectified Mean Value This function rectifies one period of the voltage or current signal and determines the average 1 Urmn or Irmn L KO at T Io Element refers to a set of input terminals that can input a single phase of voltage and current to be measured The WT3000 can contain up to four elements which are numbered from 1 to 4 The element number is appended to the symbols that were defined in the earlier section Measurement Functions on Each Input Element so that the correspondence between the numeric data and the element can be seen For example Urms1 represents the true rms value of the voltage of element 1 The selectable patterns of wiring systems vary depending on the number of input elements that are installed in the instrument You may be able to select only a single wiring system or two wiring systems When two types of wiring methods
404. ts of the screen as shown in the following figure Set the position by paying attention to the zoom factor The following figure shows an example when the crest factor is set to 3 300 Vpk a r a r 4 3 r 300 Vpk 1 1 1 1 r 77 r 77 r 5 100 e E a E shades hig SE EN ee ee 255 Vpk 150 Vpk 150 Vpk Move the position by 25 V di 150 Vpk 150 Vpk L 4 t 4 21 Range displayed on the screen 300 Vpk 300 Vpk 100 er rosea ener es 100 rae eee nae Note To expand and view a section of the waveform we recommend the following procedure 1 Set the zoom factor to 1 2 Move the vertical position so that the desired section of the waveform is at the center position according to the procedure described in this section 3 Set the vertical zoom factor 6 14 IM 760301 01E 6 6 Procedure ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE OO OO MEASURING olL WIRING INPUT INFO m m Fa J E Auro CURRENT RANGE MEASURING fextsensoR Ee RATIO Soe a DISPLAY ITEM ITEM amp ELEMENT USER ELEMENT SINGLE CAL LOWER ITEM USER SET O ALL OREMOTE son INTEG SHIFT Waveform Display on Divided Windows To exit the menu during operation press ESC
405. ts or wiring units displayed on one page is released The above operation is carried out when numeric data is displayed and the menu is not displayed or the ITEM key has been pressed Only the input element or wiring unit switches The input element or wiring unit that is displayed varies depending on the number of input elements that are installed in the WT3000 or the selected wiring system MEASURE Key See section 5 3 to 5 6 5 9 5 10 10 3 and 10 9 Displays a menu for selecting the frequency measurement source setting the user defined functions setting the MAX hold function setting the average active power setting the computing equation for apparent reactive power setting the computing equation for corrected power selecting the display format of phase difference selecting the sampling frequency setting the master slave synchronized measurement and so on On models with the frequency measurement add on function option the menu for selecting the frequency measurement source does not appear because the frequencies of all elements are measured SHIFT MEASURE CURSOR Key See section 6 9 and 7 7 For details on bar graphs option see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Displays a menu for measuring values with cursors when waveforms trends or bar graphs harmonic measurement option are displayed IM 760301 01E 1 7 syed Jo suonoun pue sowen BH 1 2 Setup Menu Display Key and Execut
406. ttings that are not saved Date Time settings GP IB communication RS 232 communication option and Ethernet communication option settings Data Size The data size of a single set of setup parameters is approximately 20 KB Extension The SET extension is automatically added to the file name Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory Storage media on which saving and reading is possible are displayed in the File List dialog box Display Example of Storage Media PC_Card PC card File Name and Comment A file name must be assigned Comments are optional You cannot save data to a file name that already exists in the same directory overwriting not allowed Number and Types of Characters That Can Be Used Item Number of Characters Characters That Can Be Used File name 1 to 8 characters 0 9 A Z _ parentheses minus sign Comment 0 to 25 characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard and spaces Auto Naming Function When Auto Naming is turned ON files with a four digit number from 0000 to 2499 are automatically created when saving the data You can specify a common name up to 8 characters specified through File Name that is placed before the number Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box Same as the explanation given in Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box in section 9 6 Properties Same as the explanation given in Pro
407. u This function cannot be used on the current version of the WT3000 The information given here may change in the future FILE Key See section 9 1 to 9 3 and 9 5 to 9 9 Displays a menu for formatting the external storage medium saving loading setup parameters changing file attributes deleting files copying files renaming directories files creating directories etc IMAGE SAVE Key See section 9 4 Saves the screen image data 1 8 IM 760301 01E 1 2 Setup Menu Display Key and Execution Key Other Functions SHIFT IMAGE SAVE MENU Key See section 9 4 Displays a menu for setting the file name data format color mode data compression and comment shown on the display when saving the screen image data PRINT Key See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Prints the screen image data SHIFT PRINT MENU Key See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Displays a menu for setting the comment shown on the screen when printing the screen image QOREMOTE Bowen wwe wwe so CRE Lo wen Lc pow psc nen pipes enn al preso NUL meng sr U d MISC HELP SHIFT SINGLE CAL Key See section 10 1 Executes zero level compensation Creates a zero input condition inside the WT3000 and sets the level at that point as the zero level S
408. ure varies depending on the number of installed input elements For details see Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems in section 2 3 Measurement Conditions SOURCE LOAD Z0 Input terminal 1 Input terminal 2 Input terminal 3 Note or computed values see Appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions For the relationship between the wiring systems and the method of determining the measured values IM 760301 01E 3 15 sjuswainseayy Bunes e40Jog BH 3 10 Wiring the Circuit under Measurement When Using the Current Sensor To prevent the possibility of electric shock and damage to the instrument follow the precautions given in section 3 5 Wiring Precautions When the maximum current value of the circuit under measurement exceeds the maximum range 30 Arms of the current input terminal an external sensor can be connected to the current sensor input connector in order to measure the current of the measurement circuit Ashunt type current sensor or a clamp type current sensor that outputs voltage can be used for an external current sensor When using the clamp type current sensor that outputs current see section 3 11 Connecting to the External Current Sensor Input Connector Connect an external sensor cable with the BNC connector B9284L K sold separately to the external current sensor input connector Remove the measurement cable
409. urement and harmonic measurement are displayed Trend Display Data When the retrieval of waveform display data is OFF during normal measurement the numeric data of measurement functions that are determined for each data update rate is P P compressed for each display segment raster and made into trend display data When the retrieval of waveform display data is ON during normal measurement the numeric data of measurement functions that are determined each time a trigger occurs is P P compressed for each display segment raster and made into trend display data n some cases P P compression is not performed Horizontal Time Axis For procedures see section 7 4 The time per division can be set in the range of 3 s to 1 day Setting the Scale For procedures see section 7 5 Auto scaling is provided in which the upper and lower limits of the screen are determined automatically from the maximum and minimum values of the trend display data Manual scaling is also available in which the upper and lower limits can be set arbitrarily as necessary Split Display Display and Assignments For procedures see section 7 6 Up to 16 lines T1 through T16 of trends can be displayed You can select the measurement function of any element to be assigned to T1 through T16 During harmonic measurement you can also specify the harmonic The screen is divided up to 4 windows and the trends that are turned ON are assigned to the divided
410. ute A t BEIC m z sz m 9 28 IM 760301 01E 9 9 Renaming Files or Directories and Creating Directories Creating a Directory 4 Press the MakeDir soft key to display the MakeDir menu Function Delete copy C p T MakeDir Format Attribute Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory 5 Same as the procedures given in Selecting the Storage Medium and Selecting the Save Destination Directory in section 9 3 Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box 6 Same as the procedure given in Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box in section 9 6 Viewing the Properties 7 Same as the procedure given in Viewing the Properties in section 9 6 Selecting the File Attribute 8 Same as the procedure given in Selecting the File Attribute in section 9 6 Creating a Directory 9 Pressthe cursor keys to select the storage medium or a directory 10 Press the Dir Name soft key A keyboard appears 11 Use the keyboard to enter the directory name For keyboard operations see section 3 14 Entering Values and Strings MakeD ir MakeDir File List M Function M ru Path PC CardNPC1 Space 128133120 byte MakeDir M File Name Size Date Attribute 4 ul IPC card Dir Name Di Lee 2004 05 22 00 52 lt P
411. v CY explanation below the MEASURING MEASURING phrase press the cursor WANG AUTO GO ope AUTO keys may be used This phrase refers to the INPUT INFO procedures for selecting items and entering values A soiled TIER deena Owwr and character strings For wen WAVE U I P s a a e m HOLD piles Ed pi ocsdufes C gt weg nnn secs NES CAL v USER ELEMENT INTEG Y USER SET O AL Procedure r o 9 gt r Q c o o x UU lt o SHIFT LOWER ITEM gt To display waveforms set the display mode to Wave Numeric Wave Wave Trend or Wave Bar For the setup procedure see section 6 1 Displayed only on models with the harmonic measurement option 1 Press FORM to display the Wave Form menu If the waveform display is at the lower section of the screen on the split display press SHIFT FORM LOWER FORM 2 Press the Trigger soft key to display the Trigger menu Wave Form M Format Wave For Format Single Single Ed Time div S Time div Sms Sms aos Trigger K Mode Trigger Normal Display gt Settings Slope ETT z c Level g Wave Mapping Wave Mapping Aejdsiq u0JoAeA Hu IM 760301 01E 6 7 6 4 Setting the Trigger Selecting the Trigger Mode 3 Press the Mode soft key to select Auto or No
412. ve humidity is 80 Where the level of mechanical vibration is or more high n direct sunlight Where corrosive or explosive gas is present Where the temperature is 60 C Where an excessive amount of soot dust or higher salt and iron are present e Near a high humidity or heat source Where water oil or chemicals may splash It is recommended that the instrument be stored in an environment where the temperature is between 5 and 40 C and the relative humidity is between 20 and 80 RH 3 2 IM 760301 01E 3 2 Installing the Instrument Installation Position Desktop Place the instrument on a flat even surface as shown in the figure below If the instrument is installed in a horizontal position rubber stoppers can be attached to the feet to prevent the instrument from sliding Two sets four pieces of rubber feet are included in the package Rack Mount To rack mount the instrument use the rack mount kit that is sold separately Part Name Model Note Rack mount kit 751535 E4 For EIA Rack mount kit 751535 J4 For JIS An outline of the attachment procedures is given below For details regarding the attachment procedures see the instructions that are included with the rack mount kit ms 2 3 e Remove the handles from each side of the instrument Remove the four feet from the bottom of the instrument Remove the two plastic rivets and the four seals covering the rack mount att
413. voltage ei and voltage drop e across the current measurement circuit ei is the amount of error in this case The input resistance of the current measurement circuit is approximately 5 5 mQ If the load resistance is 1 KQ for example the effect on the measurement accuracy is approximately 0 00055 5 5 mQ 1 Q LOAD eL WT3000 App 22 IM 760301 01E Appendix 5 For Making Accurate Measurements Effects of Stray Capacitance The effects of stray capacitance on the measurement accuracy can be minimized by connecting the current input terminal of the instrument to the side that is close to the earth potential of the power source SOURCE The internal structure of the instrument is as follows The voltage and current measurement circuits are each enclosed in shielded cases These shielded cases are placed inside the outer case The shielded case of the voltage measurement circuit is connected to the terminal of the voltage input terminal and the shielded case of the current measurement circuit is connected to the terminal of the current input terminal Because the outer case is insulated from the shield case stray capacitance Cs exists Cs is approximately 100 pF The current generated by this stray capacitance Cs will cause errors Shielded case of the voltage measurement circuit Outer case Grounding Shielded case of the current measurement circuit For example we will
414. w Clearing the Help Window Press HELP again The help window disappears 3 Displaying the Help Window When you press HELP a help window containing information about the soft key menu that was displayed immediately before HELP was pressed appears If you press a key while the help window is displayed a help window containing information about the key appears Clearing the Help Window If you press the HELP key again while a help window is displayed the help window closes IM 760301 01E 10 13 suonoung Jou10 B 10 9 Master Slave Synchronization Measurement a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Sse A enc WAVE U LIP sun us HOLD roca 4 ve OTHERS Neig FU FI srce 0 omens TIME i ITEM FORM USER ELEMENT INTEG SHIFT amp e c mE Eee Scauna ner AG To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above Won FRE the soft keys HRM SET weasuRe sucs In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the CURSOR NULL H z cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and FILE mace save STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 print msc Cre
415. wer for three phase four wire system PS P1 P2 P3 Apparent power for three phase four wire system sy 4 py 4 Qx Reactive power for three phase four wire system QS Q1 Q2 Q3 Corrected Power For procedures see section 5 9 Depending on the applicable standard when the load that is connected to the potential transformer is extremely small the active power of the potential transformer that is measured needs to be compensated In such cases set the compensating equation and the coefficient IEC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 IEC76 1 1993 ee my een Um y pc p 1 Umn ume Umn Umn Pc Corrected Power P Active power Urms True rms voltage Umn Voltage rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value P4 P2 Coefficient as defined in the applicable standard Phase Difference For procedures see section 5 10 The display format of the phase difference between the voltage and current of each element can be selected With the voltage of each element as a reference one format displays the phase difference using 360 in the clockwise direction and the other format displays lead up to 180 in the counterclockwise direction D and lag up to 180 in the clockwise direction G The phase difference of harmonic order 1 to 100 of the voltage and current on the harmonic measurement option is displayed using a 360 format or a 180 format no sign for lead and negative sign for lag Delta Computation See the E
416. witch is a push button Press the button once to turn it ON and press it again to turn it OFF l De OFF od L LL Power ON Operation When the power switch is turned ON the self test starts automatically When the self test completes successfully the display shows the screen that was displayed immediately before the power switch was turned OFF Note If the instrument does not operate as described above when the power switch is turned ON turn OFF the power switch and check the following points Thatthe power cord is securely connected Thatthe correct voltage is coming to the power outlet see section 3 3 Connecting the Power Supply Thatthe fuse is not blown see section 11 5 Replacing the Power Fuse If the power switch is turned ON while holding down RESET the setup parameters are initialized to their factory default values For the initial settings see appendix 3 13 If the instrument still does not work properly when the power switch is turned ON after checking these items contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs IM 760301 01E 3 5 sjuswainseayy Bunes e40Jog BH 3 4 Turning ON OFF the Power Switch For Making Accurate Measurements Allow the instrument to warm up for at least 30 minutes after turning ON the power Switch Perform zero level compensation after warm up see section 10 1 Performing Zero Level Compensation Shutdown Operation
417. xample for a Model with Four Input Elements Installed The default settings vary depending on the number of installed input elements and the presence absence of options Item Setting RANGE U Range 1000 V input Terminal Direct Direct input Range 30A External Sensor Range 10V SENSOR RATIO 10 0000 mV A WIRING Wiring Setting Pattern1 n Formula n1 PXB PXA n2 PXA PXB n3 Off 1 n4 Off 1 Udef1 P1 None None None Udef2 P1 None None None Compensation Wiring Compensation Off Efficiency Compensation Off Element Independent Off AMeasure 2 SCALING Scaling Off Scaling Item VT VT 1 0000 CT 1 0000 Scaling Factor 1 0000 LINE FILTER Off FREQ FILTER Off AVG Averaging Off Averaging Type Exp Exp Count 2 Lin Count 8 MEASURE User Defined ON Off Unit Expression Function1 Off V U E1 ORT Function2 Off A I E1 ORT Function3 Off V U E1 ORT Function4 Off A I E1 ORT Function5 Off V U E1 ORT Function6 Off A I E1 ORT Function7 Off V U E1 ORT Function8 Off A I E1 ORT Function9 Off V U E1 ORT Function10 Off A I E1 ORT Function1 1 Off V U E1 ORT Function12 Off A I E1 ORT Function13 Off V U E1 ORT Function14 Off A I E1 ORT Function15 Off V U E1 ORT Function16 Off A I E1 ORT Function17 Off V U E1 ORT Function18 Off A I E1 ORT Function19 Off V U E1 ORT Function20 Off A I E1 ORT Max Hold Off App 4 IM 760301 01E Appendix 2 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numeric Data
418. xpansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Delta computation can be performed on models with the delta computation function option Equation for Distortion Factor See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E On models with the harmonic measurement option the distortion factor can be computed There are two equations that can be selected for computing the distortion factor 2 18 IM 760301 01E 2 6 Integration The WT3000 can integrate the active power watt hour the current ampere hour the apparent power volt ampere hour and the reactive power var hour During integration the measured and computed values of normal measurements can be displayed in addition to the watt hour current hour volt ampere hour var hour and integration time Measurement Functions of Integration Measurement Functions on Each Input Element The following nine types of numeric data can be determined For details related to the determination of measurement function data see Appendix 1 Wp watt hour sum of positive and negative watt hours Wp positive watt hour consumed Wp negative watt hour returned to the power supply regenerated energy q current hour sum of positive and negative current hours q positive current hour consumed q negative current hour returned to the power supply WS volt ampere hour WQ var hour and Time integration time Measurement Functions of the Sum of Input Ele
419. xplanation below the phrase press the R OM cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and Fue STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 1 Press FILE to display the File menu 2 Press the Utility soft key The Utility menu and the File List dialog box appear 3 Press the Function soft key to display the Function menu 4 Press the Copy soft key to display the Copy menu M File Item Setup utitity E ea i Function Delete Set Reset all Set Filter Item RM Fl f e Property Function Delete PE gt Copy Rename MakeDir Format Attribute p Exec n Selecting the Copy Source Storage Medium or Directory 5 Same as the procedures given in Selecting the Storage Medium and Selecting the Save Destination Directory in section 9 3 IM 760301 01E 9 23 9 8 Copying Files Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box 6 Same as the procedure given in Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box in section 9 6 Viewing the Properties 7 Same as the procedure given in Viewing the Properties in section 9 6 Selecting the File Attribute 8 Same as the procedure given in Selecting the File Attribute in section 9
420. y is updated In the hold condition the display can be updated by carrying out single measurements by pressing SINGLE Stopping the Integration 7 Press the STOP soft key The START indicator turns OFF and the STOP indicator illuminates The integration time and integration value are held If you press STOP before the time specified by the integration timer is reached and then press START integration continues up to the time specified by the integration timer If the time specified by the integration timer elapses in the normal integration mode the START indicator turns OFF and the STOP indicator illuminates The integration time and integration value are held If the time specified by the integration timer elapses in the repetitive integration mode the integration time and integration value are automatically reset and the integration is repeated until STOP is pressed IM 760301 01E 5 37 1ueulioJnseoe u JOMOd E 5 14 Performing Integration Start Stop and Reset Resetting the Integration 8 Press the RESET soft key The STOP indicator turns OFF the integration time and integration value are reset and the display shows no data Normal Mode Uover m Spd U1 1000vrms YoKocawa 4 INTEG Reset lover m m Trq Integ Reset a a Displays Reset when the ums 010778 1 icon can be garted id T Integ Start Irms1 Displays Start and the elapsed 1 6 532 Stop time of integra
421. y to display the trend on the entire screen Displaying the trend by dividing the display into halves split display Numeric Trend The numeric data and trend are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For details on how to set the numeric data display see section 3 15 and chapter 5 Wave Trend The waveform and trend are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For details on how to set the waveform display see section 6 Bar Trend The bar graph and trend are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows Displayed only on models with the harmonic measurement option For details on how to set the bar graph display see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E 7 2 IM 760301 01E 7 2 Selecting the Trend Data to Be Displayed Procedure ELEMENT OO OO To exit the menu during WIRING INPUT INFO m m e g J E VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE operation press ESC located above the soft D GA In the procedural Cv Cv explanation below the MEASURING MEASURING phrase press the cursor Gu Ges C G MODE AUTO keys may be used This phrase refers to the Q c o o a e V procedures for selecting DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT items and entering values Orewore and character strings For T sone E w details on the procedures pus RI Eon see section 3 14 i CAL ITEM FORM USER ELEM
422. zation source to the current signal NVA LIEU DUAL WA N AMA Synchronization source setting Current signal Zero Crossing Rising or falling zero crossing refers to the time when the synchronization source passes through level zero center of the amplitude on the rising or falling slope The measurement period on the WT3000 is between the first rising or falling zero crossing and the last rising or falling zero crossing in the data update interval The rising or falling zero crossing is automatically selected for the one that allows the interval to be longer Data update interval Measurement period Synchronization source Q Zero crossing of the rise ramp O Zero crossing of the fall ramp When the Period of the Synchronization Source Cannot Be Detected If there are less than two rising or falling zero crossings of the input signal set as the synchronization source in the data update interval the period cannot be detected In addition the frequency cannot be detected if the AC amplitude is small For details on the detection level for frequency measurement circuit see section 12 5 If this happens the entire data update interval becomes the measurement period and the sampled data of the entire period are averaged Data update interval Measurement period xipueddy The measured values of voltage and current may be unstable due to causes described above In such case lowe

WT3000 Precision Power Analyzer User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents